P. 1
Physiotherapy Exercises

Physiotherapy Exercises

|Views: 58|Likes:
Published by Haish126
Physiotherapy
Physiotherapy

More info:

Published by: Haish126 on Jun 30, 2013
Copyright:Attribution Non-commercial

Availability:

Read on Scribd mobile: iPhone, iPad and Android.
download as PDF, TXT or read online from Scribd
See more
See less

11/21/2013

pdf

text

original

Exercise booklet for {

}1

Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi {

}

Abducting the thumb to a target
Therapist's aim To improve the ability to abduct the thumb. Client's aim To improve your ability to open your thumb to help pick up a cup or glass. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with their forearm resting in mid-pronation and wrist in extension on a table in front of them. Position a cup near their thumb and another cup touching their MCP joints. Instruct the patient to abduct their thumb to touch the cup. Ensure that the MCP joints remain in contact with the other cup and the wrist remains extended. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with your hand resting vertically on a table in front of you and your wrist bent back. Position a cup near your thumb and another cup touching your knuckles. Repeat __ times. Practice opening your thumb to touch the cup. Ensure that you keep your knuckles in contact with the other cup as you move your thumb. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Decrease the distance to the cup. More advanced: 1. Increase the distance to the cup. 2. Increase the amount of wrist extension. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7

Exercise booklet for {

}2

Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi {

}

Active assisted knee flexion and extension
Therapist's aim To strengthen the knee flexors and extensors and to stretch or maintain range of the knee joint. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the front and back of your thigh and to stretch or maintain range in your knee. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with their knees bent. Instruct the patient to actively extend their affected knee and provide further assistance with their unaffected leg, then actively flex their affected knee and provide further assistance with their unaffected leg. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with your knees bent. Practice straightening your affected knee as much as possible while assisting with your unaffected leg, then bending your affected knee Repeat __ times. as much as possible while assisting with your unaffected leg. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Increase assistance provided by the unaffected leg. More advanced: 1. Decrease assistance provided by the unaffected leg. 2. Progress using strength training principles. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7

Exercise booklet for {

}3

Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi {

}

Active cycle for upper limbs
Therapist's aim To improve fitness. Client's aim To improve your fitness. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in their wheelchair with their hands in the paddles of the active cycle. Instruct the patient to cycle with their hands. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting in your wheelchair with your hands in the paddles of the active cycle. Cycle with your hands. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Decrease the active resistance. More advanced: 1. Increase the active resistance. 2. Increase duration of exercise. Perform exercise for __ minutes. Precautions 1. Check for pressure marks in areas where sensation is absent or impaired. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7

Exercise booklet for {

}4

Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi {

}

Ankle dorsiflexor electrical stimulation
Therapist's aim To strengthen the ankle dorsiflexors. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the front of your ankle. Therapist's instructions Place the electrodes over the muscle belly of tibialis anterior.

Perform __ sets of __ reps. Do__ sessions per week. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right

Exercise booklet for {

}5

Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi {

}

Ankle dorsiflexor strengthening in sitting using sandbag weights
Therapist's aim To strengthen the ankle dorsiflexors. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the front of your ankle. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with a weight attached around their toes. Instruct the patient to dorsiflex their ankle. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with a weight attached around your toes. Start with your toes on the floor. Finish with your toes off the floor. Progressions and variations More advanced: 1. Progress using strength training principles. Perform __ sets of __ reps. Do__ sessions per week. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right

Exercise booklet for {

}6

Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi {

}

Ankle dorsiflexor strengthening in sitting without weights
Therapist's aim To strengthen the ankle dorsiflexors. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the front of your ankle. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with their feet flat on the floor and their knees relatively extended. Instruct the patient to dorsiflex the ankles. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with your feet together in front of you. Start with your feet flat on the floor. Finish with your toes lifted up. Ensure that you keep your heels on the ground. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Position the feet further forwards. 2. Place a bandage around the knees to hold them together. More advanced: 1. Position the feet further back. Perform __ sets of __ reps. Do__ sessions per week. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right

Exercise booklet for {

}7

Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi {

}

Ankle dorsiflexor strengthening in supine using theraband
Therapist's aim To strengthen the ankle dorsiflexors. Client's aim To strengthen your ankle muscles. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in supine with their legs extended. Adjust the theraband so that the direction of pull opposes ankle dorsiflexion. Instruct the patient to dorsiflex their ankle. Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your back with some theraband around your forefoot. Adjust the theraband so that the direction of pull is from the foot of the bed. Start with your ankle downwards. Finish with your ankle upwards. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Downgrade the colour of the theraband. More advanced: 1. Upgrade the Perform __ sets of __ reps. Do__ colour of the theraband. sessions per week. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right

Exercise booklet for {

}8

Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi {

}

Ankle dorsiflexor/plantarflexor strengthening in sidelying without weights
Therapist's aim To strengthen the ankle dorsiflexors/plantarflexors. Client's aim To strengthen your ankle muscles. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sidelying. Instruct the patient to dorsiflex and plantarflex their ankle. Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your side. Start with your toes pointing down. Finish with your toes pointing up.

Perform __ sets of __ reps. Do__ sessions per week. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right

Exercise booklet for {

}9

Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi {

}

Ankle dorsiflexor/plantarflexor strengthening in supine without weights
Therapist's aim To strengthen the ankle dorsiflexors/plantarflexors. Client's aim To strengthen your ankle muscles. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in supine. Instruct the patient to dorsiflex and plantarflex their ankle. Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your back. Start with your toes pointing down. Finish with your toes pointing up. Progressions and variations More advanced: 1. Progress using strength training principles.

Perform __ sets of __ reps. Do__ sessions per week. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right

Exercise booklet for {

}10

Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi {

}

Ankle evertor strengthening in sitting without weights
Therapist's aim To strengthen the ankle evertors. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the outside of your ankle. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with their knees together and ankles slightly apart. Instruct the patient to evert their ankles and bring the medial malleoli to touch together. Ensure that the knees are kept still. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with your knees together and ankles slightly apart. Start with your feet flat on the floor. Finish with outside of your soles lifted off the floor and the inside part of your ankles touching together. Ensure that your knees are kept still. Progressions and variations Perform __ sets of __ reps. Do__ Less advanced: 1. Place a bandage around the knees to hold them together. More sessions per week. advanced: 1. Perform the exercise in standing. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right

Exercise booklet for {

}11

Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi {

}

Ankle evertor strengthening in supine using theraband
Therapist's aim To strengthen the ankle evertors. Client's aim To strengthen your ankle muscles. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in supine with their legs extended. Adjust the theraband so that the direction of pull opposes ankle eversion. Instruct the patient to evert their ankle. Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your back with some theraband around your forefoot. Adjust the theraband so that the direction of pull is from the inside. Start with your ankle inwards. Finish with your ankle outwards. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Downgrade the colour of the theraband. More advanced: 1. Upgrade the Perform __ sets of __ reps. Do__ colour of the theraband. sessions per week. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right

Instruct the patient to invert their ankle. Client's aim To strengthen your ankle muscles. Adjust the theraband so that the direction of pull opposes ankle inversion. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in supine with their legs extended. Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your back with some theraband around your forefoot. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . More advanced: 1. Do__ colour of the theraband. Finish with your ankle inwards.Exercise booklet for { }12 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Ankle invertor strengthening in supine using theraband Therapist's aim To strengthen the ankle invertors. Upgrade the Perform __ sets of __ reps. sessions per week. Adjust the theraband so that the direction of pull is from the outside. Start with your ankle outwards. Downgrade the colour of the theraband.

Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Perform __ sets of __ reps. Finish with the soles of your feet facing out. Progress using strength training principles. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with your feet on the floor. Progressions and variations More advanced: 1. Instruct the patient to invert and evert their ankle. Ensure that your knees are kept still. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles on the inside and outside of your ankle.Exercise booklet for { }13 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Ankle invertor/evertor strengthening in sitting without weights Therapist's aim To strengthen the ankle invertors and evertors. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting. Do__ sessions per week. Start with the soles of your feet facing in.

Ensure that you keep your toes on the floor. Perform __ sets of __ reps. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Client's aim To strengthen your calf muscles. Instruct the patient to lift their heel off the floor by plantarflexing their ankle. Do__ sessions per week. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with a weight attached to the top of their knee. Progressions and variations More advanced: 1.Exercise booklet for { }14 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Ankle plantarflexor strengthening in sitting using sandbag weights Therapist's aim To strengthen the ankle plantarflexors. Progress using strength training principles. Start with your feet flat on the floor. Finish with your heel off the floor. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with a weight attached to the top of your knee.

Client's aim To strengthen your calf muscles. Upgrade the Perform __ sets of __ reps. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1.Exercise booklet for { }15 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Ankle plantarflexor strengthening in sitting using theraband Therapist's aim To strengthen the ankle plantarflexors. Ensure that you keep your toes on the wedge. More advanced: 1. Instruct the patient to lift their heel off the wedge by plantarflexing the ankle. Start with your foot flat on the wedge. Do__ sessions per week. colour of the theraband. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with your foot on a wedge and some theraband attached under the wedge and over the top of your knee. Finish with your heel off the wedge. Downgrade the colour of the theraband. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with their foot on a wedge and some theraband attached under the wedge and over the top of their knee. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right .

Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with their knees together. Ensure that you keep your toes on the floor. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Place a bandage around the knees to hold them together. More advanced: 1. Do__ sessions per week. Perform __ sets of __ reps.Exercise booklet for { }16 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Ankle plantarflexor strengthening in sitting without weights Therapist's aim To strengthen the ankle plantarflexors. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with your knees together. Instruct the patient to lift their heels off the floor by plantarflexing the ankles. Place a weight over the knees. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Finish with your heels lifted off the floor. Client's aim To strengthen your calf muscles. Start with your feet flat on the floor.

Instruct the patient to lift their heel off the wedge by plantarflexing their ankle. Client's aim To strengthen your calf muscles. Ensure that most of your weight is borne through the leg on the wedge. 2. Start with your foot flat on the wedge. Finish with your heel lifted off the wedge and standing on your toes. Do__ sessions per week. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing against a wall with their foot on a wedge and their other foot resting on a stool in front of them. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Provide hand support for balance. Move the stool closer. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Move the stool further away. Ensure that most of the weight is borne through the leg on the wedge. Client's instructions Position yourself standing against a wall with your foot on a wedge and your other foot resting on a stool in front of you. your knee is kept straight and your back remains against the Perform __ sets of __ reps.Exercise booklet for { }17 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Ankle plantarflexor strengthening in standing using a wedge Therapist's aim To strengthen the ankle plantarflexors. More advanced: 1. the knee is kept straight and the back remains against the wall. wall.

Instruct the patient to plantarflex their ankle. Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your back with some theraband around your forefoot. Downgrade the colour of the theraband. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. sessions per week. Adjust the theraband so that the direction of pull is from your knee. Client's aim To strengthen your calf muscles. Do__ colour of the theraband. Start with your ankle upwards.Exercise booklet for { }18 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Ankle plantarflexor strengthening in supine using theraband Therapist's aim To strengthen the ankle plantarflexors. More advanced: 1. Adjust the theraband so that the direction of pull opposes ankle plantarflexion. Finish with your ankle downwards. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Therapist's instructions Position the patient in supine with their legs extended. Upgrade the Perform __ sets of __ reps.

Impaired or absent sensation of stretch.Exercise booklet for { }19 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Ankle plantarflexor stretch in standing Therapist's aim To stretch or maintain length of the ankle plantarflexors. Increase forwards lean. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with one leg in front of the other and their hands resting on a wall. Decrease forwards lean. Less advanced: 1. Instruct the patient to lean forwards while keeping the back leg straight. Client's instructions Position yourself standing with one leg in front of the other and your hands resting on a wall. Progressions and variations Hold for __ minutes. Lean forwards while keeping your back leg straight. Ensure that both feet point forwards and your back heel remains on the ground. More advanced: 1. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Precautions 1. Client's aim To stretch or maintain range in your ankle. Ensure that both feet point forwards and the back heel remains on the ground.

Exercise booklet for { }20 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Ankle plantarflexor stretch using a foam block Therapist's aim To stretch or maintain length of the ankle plantarflexors. Place a pillow under the calves to raise the heels off the bed. Precautions 1. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your back with your feet resting against a foam block at the end of the bed. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in supine with their feet resting against a foam block at the end of the bed. Client's aim To stretch or maintain range in your ankle. Place a pillow under your calves to raise your heels off the bed. Hold for __ minutes. Impaired or absent sensation of stretch.

Do__ sessions per week. Perform __ sets of __ reps. Precautions 1. Client's instructions Place the two electrodes over the muscle belly as shown. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the front of your shoulder.Exercise booklet for { }21 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Anterior deltoid electrical stimulation Therapist's aim To strengthen the shoulder flexors. Perform skin tests. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Therapist's instructions Place the electrodes over the muscle belly of the anterior deltoid.

Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . 2. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting on a moveable object while holding onto a rope. Tow at a slow speed. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting on a moveable object while holding onto a rope. More advanced: 1. Instruct the patient to sit upright while getting towed across the floor. Practice sitting upright while getting towed across the floor. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. 2. Tow at a faster speed. Perform exercise for __ minutes.Exercise booklet for { }22 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Balancing while sitting on a moving object Therapist's aim To improve the ability to sit unsupported. Client's aim To improve your ability to sit unsupported. Tow the patient in many directions. Tow the patient in one direction only.

Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the front of your shoulder and chest. Progress using strength training principles. Perform __ sets of __ reps. Progressions and variations More advanced: 1.Exercise booklet for { }23 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Bench press Therapist's aim To strengthen the shoulder horizontal adductors and elbow extensors. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in supine with their shoulders abducted and elbows flexed. Lift the weights above your chest until your elbows are straight. Do__ sessions per week. Instruct the patient to lift the weights above their chest until their elbows are straight. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your back with your shoulders out to the side and elbows bent.

Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. More advanced: 1. Ensure that your forearm does not move. Decrease the distance from the wrist to the target lines. Hold an object with a larger diameter. 4. Hold an object that can deform. Remove the sandbag holding the forearm in place. Instruct the patient to flex and then extend their wrist to the target lines while grasping the object. Client's aim To improve your ability to bend and straighten your wrist. Practice bending your wrist backwards and forwards to the target lines while grasping the object. Repeat __ times. Increase the distance from the wrist to the target lines. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with a cylindrical object on a table in front of them and a sandbag on their forearm. Draw two target lines on the table to serve as targets for wrist movement. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . 2. Hold an object with a smaller diameter. 2. 3. Ensure that the forearm does not move.Exercise booklet for { }24 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Bending and straightening the wrist to targets Therapist's aim To improve the ability to flex and extend the wrist. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with a cylindrical object on a table in front of you and a sandbag on your forearm.

1. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Repeat __ times. Practice sliding your foot back so that your heel touches a line behind your knee. a roller-skate or slidesheet). Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with their toes on a line in front of their knee. Client's aim To improve your ability to bend your knee in preparation for standing. Progressions and variations Less advanced. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with your toes on a line in front of your knee. 1. 2. Fri Right . More advanced.Exercise booklet for { }25 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Bending the knee in sitting Therapist's aim To improve the ability to flex the knee in preparation for standing. Reduce the amount of friction under the foot by using a friction-reducing device (eg. Place the lines closer to the heel and toes. Place the lines further away from the heel and toes. Instruct the patient to flex their knee so that their heel touches a line behind their knee.

Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with a towel underneath your foot. Hold for __ seconds. Slide your foot backwards along the floor to bend your knee. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Instruct the patient to slide their foot backwards along the floor to flex their knee. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with a towel underneath their foot.Exercise booklet for { }26 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Bending the knee in sitting Therapist's aim To stretch or maintain range of the knee. Precautions 1. Impaired or absent sensation of stretch. Client's aim To stretch or maintain range in your knee. Repeat __ times.

More advanced. Instruct the patient to flex and extend their knee so that the roller-skate rolls between the lines on the floor. 1. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with one foot strapped into a roller-skate and their other foot on a block. Practice bending and straightening your knee so that the roller-skate rolls between the lines on the floor. Place the Repeat __ times. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with one foot strapped into a roller-skate and your other foot on a block. lines further away from the heel and toes. Client's aim To improve your ability to bend your knee in preparation for standing.Exercise booklet for { }27 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Bending the knee in sitting using a roller-skate Therapist's aim To improve the ability to flex the knee in preparation for standing. 1. Progressions and variations Less advanced. Place the lines closer to the heel and toes.

Impaired or absent sensation of stretch. Precautions 1.Exercise booklet for { }28 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Bending the knee in standing Therapist's aim To stretch or maintain range of the knee. Repeat __ times. Hold for __ seconds. Client's aim To stretch or maintain range in your knee. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing facing a wall with one foot resting on a high block. Place your hands on the wall and lunge forwards to bend your knee. Client's instructions Position yourself standing facing a wall with one foot resting on a high block. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Instruct the patient to place their hands on the wall and lunge forwards to flex their knee.

2. Practice straightening your wrist so that your hand touches the tip of the straw then relaxing your hand back down again. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with their forearm pronated and resting on a block on a table in front of them.Exercise booklet for { }29 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Bending the wrist to a target Therapist's aim To improve the ability to extend the wrist. Hold a cup with a smaller diameter. Instruct the patient to extend their wrist to touch the tip of the straw and then relax their wrist back into flexion. a sandbag on your forearm and tape a Repeat __ times. Bend the straw down to decrease the range that the wrist needs to move through. 2. Hold a cup that can deform. Place a cup in their hand. More advanced: 1. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with your forearm resting on a block on a table in front of you and your palm facing down. Client's aim To improve your ability to straighten your wrist. Hold a cup with a larger diameter. a sandbag on their forearm and tape a flexible straw to the dorsal surface of their forearm with the joint of the straw aligned with their wrist joint. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . flexible straw to the top of your forearm so that the bend of the straw is over your wrist. Place a cup in your hand. Bend the straw up to increase the range that the wrist needs to move through. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. 3.

Exercise booklet for {

}30

Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi {

}

Bending the wrist while holding a cup
Therapist's aim To improve the ability to radially deviate the wrist. Client's aim To improve your ability to bend your wrist. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with their hand grasping a cup and hanging over the edge of a table. Instruct the patient to tilt the cup up by radially deviating their wrist to a point level with, or higher than the table. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with your hand grasping a cup and hanging over the edge of a table. Practice tilting the cup up by bending your wrist to a point level with, or higher than the table. Progressions and variations Repeat __ times. Less advanced: 1. Move the cup through a smaller range of motion. 2. Use a cup with a smaller diameter. More advanced: 1. Move the cup through a larger range of motion. 2. Use a cup with a larger diameter. 3. Use a cup that can deform. 4. Add water to the cup. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7

Exercise booklet for {

}31

Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi {

}

Biceps electrical stimulation
Therapist's aim To strengthen the elbow flexors. Client's aim To strengthen your biceps. Therapist's instructions Place the electrodes over the muscle belly of the elbow flexors. Client's instructions Place the two electrodes over the muscle belly as shown. Precautions 1. Perform skin tests.

Perform __ sets of __ reps. Do__ sessions per week. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right

Exercise booklet for {

}32

Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi {

}

Bilateral ankle plantarflexor stretch using a wedge while standing against a wall
Therapist's aim To stretch or maintain length of the ankle plantarflexors. Client's aim To stretch or maintain range in your ankles. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with their back against a wall and both feet on a wedge. Ensure that their knees are kept straight and both feet point forwards. Client's instructions Position yourself standing with your back against a wall and both feet on a wedge. Ensure that you keep your knees straight and both feet point forwards. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Decrease the angle of the wedge. More advanced: 1. Increase the angle of the wedge. Hold for __ minutes. Precautions 1. Impaired or absent sensation of stretch. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7

Exercise booklet for {

}33

Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi {

}

Bilateral ankle plantarflexor stretch using a wedge while standing at a table
Therapist's aim To stretch or maintain length of the ankle plantarflexors. Client's aim To stretch or maintain range in your ankles. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with both feet on a wedge and a table in front. Ensure that their knees are kept straight and both feet point forwards. Client's instructions Position yourself standing with both feet on a wedge and a table in front. Ensure that you keep your knees straight and both feet point forwards. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Decrease the angle of the wedge. More advanced: 1. Increase the angle of the wedge. Repeat __ times. Precautions 1. Impaired or absent sensation of stretch. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7

Exercise booklet for {

}34

Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi {

}

Bilateral calf raises
Therapist's aim To strengthen the ankle plantarflexors. Client's aim To strengthen your calf muscles. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing. Instruct the patient to plantarflex their ankles. Client's instructions Position yourself standing with your feet together. Start with your heels on the ground. Finish with your heels off the ground. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Provide hand support for balance. More advanced: 1. Progress using strength training principles. Perform __ sets of __ reps. Do__ sessions per week. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right

Exercise booklet for {

}35

Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi {

}

Bilateral calf raises on a block
Therapist's aim To strengthen the ankle plantarflexors. Client's aim To strengthen your calf muscles. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing on a step with their heels off the edge. Instruct the patient to plantarflex their ankle. Client's instructions Position yourself standing on a step with your heels off the edge. Lift your body weight up onto your toes. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Provide hand support for balance. More advanced: 1. Wear a backpack with weights in it. 2. Progress using strength training principles. Perform __ sets of __ reps. Do__ sessions per week. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right

Exercise booklet for {

}36

Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi {

}

Bilateral shoulder internal rotator stretch in supine
Therapist's aim To stretch or maintain length of the shoulder internal rotators and adductors. Client's aim To stretch or maintain range in your shoulders. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in supine with their hands behind their head. Ensure that their elbows are free to drop down onto the bed. Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your back with your hands behind your head. Ensure that your elbows are free to drop down onto the bed. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Position hands on chest rather than behind head. 2. Place pillows under the elbows. More advanced: 1. Place a weight over the elbows. Hold for __ minutes. Precautions 1. Impaired or absent sensation of stretch. 2. Shoulder pain. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7

Exercise booklet for {

}37

Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi {

}

Bilateral squat in standing
Therapist's aim To strengthen the leg extensors. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles that straighten your leg. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing. Instruct the patient to bend their knees to squat down and then stand up straight again. Client's instructions Position yourself standing with your knees straight. Bend your knees and then stand up straight again. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Provide hand support for balance. More advanced: 1. Increase the amount of knee bend. 2. Wear a backpack with weights in it. Perform __ sets of __ reps. Do__ sessions per week. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right

Exercise booklet for {

}38

Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi {

}

Bilateral squat on tilt table
Therapist's aim To strengthen the leg extensors. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles that straighten your leg. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing on a sliding tilt table. Instruct the patient to flex then extend their knees. Client's instructions Position yourself standing on a tilt table. Start with your knees straight. Bend your knees. Finish with your knees straight. Progressions and variations Less Advanced: 1. Decrease the angle of the tilt table. More advanced: 1. Increase the angle of the tilt table. 2. Perform a single-leg squat. Perform __ sets of __ reps. Do__ sessions per week. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right

Exercise booklet for {

}39

Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi {

}

Bilateral squat to a target in standing
Therapist's aim To strengthen the leg extensors. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles that straighten your leg. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with targets at knee level in front of them. Instruct the patient to squat down by bending their knees to touch the targets. Ensure that the knees bend equally and in time with each other. Client's instructions Position yourself standing with targets at knee level in front of you. Practice bending your knees to touch the targets. Ensure that your knees bend equally and in time with each other. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Provide hand support for balance. More advanced: 1. Increase the amount of knee bend. 2. Wear a backpack with weights in it. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left

Perform __ sets of __ reps. Do__ sessions per week. Fri Right

Exercise booklet for {

}40

Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi {

}

Bouncing a ball with one hand
Therapist's aim To improve the ability to manipulate objects with the hand. Client's aim To improve your ability to manipulate objects with your hand. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with a ball in their hand. Instruct the patient to bounce a ball on the spot. Client's instructions Position yourself standing with a ball in your hand. Practice bouncing the ball on the spot. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Bounce the ball with two hands. 2. Bounce the ball on a firm surface. More advanced: 1. Bounce the ball while moving around. 2. Bounce the ball on a soft surface. Perform exercise for __ minutes. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right

Provide the patient with boxing gloves and instruct the patient to `box their therapist!`. 3. More advanced: 1. heights. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in short sitting on a plinth. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Decrease reaching distance. Client's aim To improve your ability to sit unsupported. 2. Ensure that the patient does not fall forward. Ensure thighs and feet are well supported. Precautions 1. Place some boxing gloves on and practice `boxing your therapist!`. Box when sitting in a wheelchair. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting over the edge of a plinth. Sit with feet unsupported. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Sit on stools of varied Perform exercise for __ minutes. Increase reaching distance.Exercise booklet for { }41 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Boxing in sitting Therapist's aim To improve the ability to sit unsupported. 3. 2.

2. Practice walking sideways by crossing your trailing leg over your leading leg. forwards etc). More advanced: 1. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Client's aim To improve your ability to walk. Increase speed of task to include a flight phase (ie. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1.Exercise booklet for { }42 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Braiding Therapist's aim To improve the ability to walk. in the pattern . Ensure that you walk sideways rather than diagonally. cross the trailing leg over Repeat __ times. Place a line on the floor and instruct the patient to walk sideways along the line. Alter the pattern of leg crossing (eg. behind . where both feet are off the ground at the same time).forwards. Instruct the patient to walk sideways by crossing the trailing leg over the leading leg. Client's instructions Position yourself standing with your feet shoulder width apart. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing. forwards. behind. forwards. Ensure that the patient walks sideways rather than diagonally.

Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the back of your hip. Lift your bottom off the bed. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in crook lying. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Perform the exercise using one leg. Do__ sessions per week. Instruct the patient to lift their bottom off the bed. 2. More advanced: 1. Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your back with your knees bent. Sustain the lift. Perform __ sets of __ reps. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Decrease the height of the lift.Exercise booklet for { }43 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Bridging Therapist's aim To strengthen the hip extensors.

Do__ sessions per week. Perform __ sets of __ reps. 2. More advanced: 1. Practice lifting your bottom up while keeping the ball still. Sustain the lift. Instruct the patient to lift their bottom up while keeping the ball still. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your back with your feet on a large ball. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Perform the exercise using one leg. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in supine with their feet on a large ball. Decrease the height of the lift. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the back of your hip and trunk.Exercise booklet for { }44 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Bridging on a large ball Therapist's aim To strengthen the hip extensors and trunk muscles.

Exercise booklet for { }45 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Cat stretch Therapist's aim To stretch or maintain range in the spine. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Practice arching (rounding) your back up as you bend your head down. then drop your back down to the opposite position and lift your head up. Repeat __ times. Precautions 1. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in four-point kneeling. Instruct the patient to flex their spine and head then extend their spine and head. Avoid hyperextended spinal positions. Client's instructions Position yourself on your hands and knees. Client's aim To stretch or maintain range in your spine.

Precautions 1. Practice connecting and disconnecting the plug from the socket.Exercise booklet for { }46 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Connecting a plug and socket Therapist's aim To improve the ability to manipulate objects with the hand. Instruct the patient to connect and disconnect the plug from the socket. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting in front of a table with a socket in their unaffected hand. Fri Right . Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Use a larger plug and socket. Client's aim To improve your ability to manipulate objects with your hand. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting in front of a table with a socket in your unaffected hand. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Repeat __ times. Ensure that the socket is not connected to the power supply.

Progressions and variations More advanced: 1. Position the peg horizontally. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with their forearm in mid-pronation and holding the end of a peg between their index finger and thumb. peg to lower slowly to a vertical position. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting while holding onto the end of a peg between your index finger and thumb. Client's aim To improve your ability to manipulate objects with your hand. Hold the peg horizontally. Practice reducing the pressure on the peg to allow the Repeat __ times. Ensure that you don`t let go of the peg. Instruct the patient to reduce the pressure on the peg to allow the peg to lower slowly to a vertical position. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Ensure that they don`t let go of the peg. Practice holding the peg between the thumb and other fingers in turn.Exercise booklet for { }47 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Controlling finger flexor force by lowering peg from horizontal to vertical Therapist's aim To improve the ability to modulate thumb and finger flexor force to manipulate objects with the hand.

Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with a sealed. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Client's aim To improve your ability to use the appropriate force when manipulating objects with your hand. Fill the plastic bottle most of the way with some coloured liquid and mark a line on the straw. Instruct the patient to lift up the bottle without letting the fluid rise above the marked line on the straw.Exercise booklet for { }48 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Controlling grip force by lifting a sealed bottle and straw Therapist's aim To improve the ability to modulate thumb and finger flexor force when manipulating objects with the hand. Change the resistance of the container by using bottles with different thickness plastic. Fill the plastic bottle most of the way with some coloured liquid and lift the bottle and mark a line on the straw at the height of the liquid. Ensure that the bottle and straw form a sealed system. Practice lifting up the bottle without letting the fluid raise above the marked line on the straw. thin plastic bottle and straw on a table in front of you. Progressions and variations Less advanced / More advanced: 1. thin plastic bottle and straw on a table in front of them. Repeat __ times. Ensure that the bottle and straw form a sealed system. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with a sealed.

Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Move the tips of the fingers through a smaller distance. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with their palm resting on a table. Client's aim To improve your ability to manipulate objects with your hand. Decease the amount of friction between the fingers and the table. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Ensure that your fingers remain straight and your forearm doesn`t move. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with your palm resting on a table. Repeat __ times. Practice sliding the tips of your fingers along the table towards your palm so that you make a tunnel underneath your knuckles. Ensure that the fingers remain extended and the forearm is stationary. Move the tips of the fingers through a larger distance. More advanced: 1. Instruct the patient to slide the tips of their fingers along the table towards their palm to elevate their metacarpophalangeal joints.Exercise booklet for { }49 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Cupping the hand on a table Therapist's aim To improve the ability to manipulate objects with the hand. 2.

Ensure that cupping of the hand occurs. Less advanced: 1. 2. Position the plate further away. Position the plate closer. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Place small objects (eg. Ensure that your palm forms a cup shape when lifting the plate. Progressions and variations Repeat __ times. Practice picking up the plate by placing your fingers underneath and thumb on top of the plate. Client's aim To improve your ability to manipulate objects with your hand. More advanced: 1. small balls) on the plate. Instruct the patient to pick up the plate by placing their fingers underneath and thumb on top of the plate. 3. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with a plate on a table in front of you. 2. Pick up a lighter plate. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with a plate on a table in front of them.Exercise booklet for { }50 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Cupping the hand while picking up a plate Therapist's aim To improve the ability to manipulate objects with the hand. Pick up a heavier plate.

keeping the blade vertical. Client's aim To improve your ability to use a knife. and the wrist is flexed. Ensure that the blade of the knife remains vertical. Practice cutting the putty with the knife. Instruct the patient to cut the putty with the knife.Exercise booklet for { }51 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Cutting with a knife Therapist's aim To improve the ability to use a knife. Use a sawing motion. More advanced: 1. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Precautions 1. 3. 4. Cut thicker pieces of putty. 2. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with a knife and some putty on a table in front of them. 2. Ensure that the patient does not cut themselves. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. 3. Cut different objects. Ensure that your index finger is kept straight and your wrist is bent. Use a knife and fork together. Apply vertical pressure through the knife only. Use tape to position the fingers on the knife appropriately. the index finger is extended. in the putty. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with a knife and some putty on a table in front of you. Make shallower indents Repeat __ times.

3. Move the finger through a larger range of motion. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Client's aim To improve your ability to move your fingers. More advanced: 1. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting in front of a table with their knuckles resting on a small cylinder and a finger resting on the prongs of a fork. 2. Ensure that your fingers stay straight. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting in front of a table with your knuckles resting on a small cylinder and a finger resting on the prongs of a fork. Practice pushing down on the fork prongs so that the other end of the fork lifts up. Push down with different fingers. Tape a small weight to the end of the fork.Exercise booklet for { }52 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Depressing a fork using the fingertips Therapist's aim To improve the ability to flex and extend the fingers. Instruct the patient to push down on the fork prongs so that the other end of the fork lifts up. Repeat __ times. Ensure that the interphalangeal joints remain extended. Move the finger through a smaller range of motion.

Instruct the patient to hold a coin in between the end of the tweezers and squeeze with their ring and little fingers. Practice pushing down on the prongs of the fork so that the end of the fork lifts up without dropping the coin. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with some plastic tweezers in your hand and a fork on a table in front of you. 2. Progressions and variations More advanced: 1. Increase the amount of wrist flexion. Ensure that the index finger remains extended. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with some plastic tweezers in their hand and a fork on a table in front of them. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Client's aim To improve your ability to hold onto and use a fork. Place your index finger on the prongs of the fork while holding the coin in Repeat __ times. Instruct the patient to push down on the prongs of the fork with their index finger so that the end of the fork lifts up without dropping the coin. Hold a coin in between the end of the tweezers and squeeze with your ring and little fingers. Practice with tweezers taped to the end of a fork while holding a coin. Ensure that your index finger is kept straight. the tweezers.Exercise booklet for { }53 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Depressing a fork whilst holding onto tweezers and a coin Therapist's aim To improve the ability to use a fork.

Client's aim To strengthen the muscles that straighten your elbow. Support the proximal part of the arm.Exercise booklet for { }54 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Elbow extensor strengthening in lying without weights Therapist's aim To strengthen the elbow extensors. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in supine with their arm extended vertically. Finish with your elbow bent and your palm touching your forehead. Ensure that your upper arm doesn`t move and only your forearm moves. Start with your elbow straight. Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your back with your arm held vertically. More advanced: 1. Ensure that the upper arm remains vertical and only the forearm moves. Do__ sessions per week. strength training principles. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Progress using Perform __ sets of __ reps. Instruct the patient to bend their elbow to bring their palm to touch their forehead and then straighten it again.

Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Therapist's instructions Position the patient in prone with their arm over the edge of the bed and their elbow flexed. Client's aim To strengthen your triceps. Progress using strength training principles. Do__ sessions per week. Finish with your elbow straight. Progressions and variations More advanced: 1. Perform __ sets of __ reps. Start with your elbow bent. Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your stomach with your arm over the edge of the bed. Instruct the patient to extend their elbow.Exercise booklet for { }55 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Elbow extensor strengthening in prone using free weights Therapist's aim To strengthen the elbow extensors.

Do__ 1. Precautions Perform __ sets of __ reps. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with their shoulder flexed and elbow flexed. Progressions and variations More advanced: 1. Progress using strength training principles. sessions per week. Ensure that wheelchair does not flip backwards. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Instruct the patient to extend their elbow. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting on a chair.Exercise booklet for { }56 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Elbow extensor strengthening in sitting using free weights Therapist's aim To strengthen the elbow extensors. Client's aim To strengthen your triceps. Finish with your arm above your head and your elbow straight. Start with your arm above your head and your elbow bent.

Progress using strength training principles. Perform __ sets of __ reps. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Progressions and variations More advanced: 1. Adjust the pulley so that the direction of pull is downwards from the ceiling. Client's aim To strengthen your triceps. Adjust the pulley system so that the direction of pull opposes elbow extension. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting facing the pulleys. Do__ sessions per week. Start with your elbow bent and tucked in beside your body. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting facing the pulleys. Instruct the patient to extend their elbow.Exercise booklet for { }57 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Elbow extensor strengthening in sitting using pulleys Therapist's aim To strengthen the elbow extensors. Finish with your elbow straight.

Upgrade the Perform __ sets of __ reps. Start with your elbow bent and tucked in beside your body. Client's aim To strengthen your triceps. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Client's instructions Position yourself sitting facing the theraband. sessions per week.Exercise booklet for { }58 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Elbow extensor strengthening in sitting using theraband Therapist's aim To strengthen the elbow extensors. Instruct the patient to extend their elbow. Adjust the theraband so that the direction of pull opposes elbow extension. Downgrade the colour of the theraband. Adjust the theraband so that the direction of pull is downwards from the ceiling. More advanced: 1. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Finish with your elbow straight. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with their elbow flexed. Do__ colour of the theraband.

Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Progressions and variations More advanced: 1. Progress using strength training principles. Start with your shoulder held vertically and your elbow bent. Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your back. Perform __ sets of __ reps. Finish with your elbow straight. Do__ sessions per week. Instruct the patient to extend their elbow.Exercise booklet for { }59 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Elbow extensor strengthening in supine using free weights Therapist's aim To strengthen the elbow extensors. Client's aim To strengthen your triceps. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in supine with their shoulder flexed to 90 degrees and their elbow flexed.

Exercise booklet for {

}60

Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi {

}

Elbow extensor strengthening in supine using theraband
Therapist's aim To strengthen the elbow extensors. Client's aim To strengthen your triceps. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in supine with their elbow flexed. Adjust the theraband so that the direction of pull opposes elbow extension. Instruct the patient to extend their elbow. Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your back. Adjust the theraband so that the direction of pull is from the top of the bed. Start with your arm beside you and your elbow bent. Finish with your elbow straight. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Downgrade the colour of the theraband. More advanced: 1. Upgrade the Perform __ sets of __ reps. Do__ colour of the theraband. sessions per week. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right

Exercise booklet for {

}61

Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi {

}

Elbow extensor strengthening in supine using theraband
Therapist's aim To strengthen the elbow extensors. Client's aim To strengthen your triceps. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in supine with their elbow flexed. Adjust the theraband so that the direction of pull opposes elbow extension. Instruct the patient to extend their elbow. Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your back. Adjust the theraband so that the direction of pull is from the top of the bed. Start with your arm beside you and your elbow bent. Finish with your elbow straight. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Downgrade the colour of the theraband. More advanced: 1. Upgrade the Perform __ sets of __ reps. Do__ colour of the theraband. sessions per week. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right

Exercise booklet for {

}62

Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi {

}

Elbow flexor strengthening in sitting using free weights
Therapist's aim To strengthen the elbow flexors. Client's aim To strengthen your biceps. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with their elbow and shoulder extended. Instruct the patient to flex their elbow. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with your arm down beside your body. Start with your elbow straight. Finish with your elbow bent. Ensure that you keep your elbow tucked in beside your body. Progressions and variations More advanced: 1. Progress using strength training principles. Perform __ sets of __ reps. Do__ sessions per week. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right

Exercise booklet for {

}63

Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi {

}

Elbow flexor strengthening in sitting using pulleys
Therapist's aim To strengthen the elbow flexors. Client's aim To strengthen your biceps. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting facing the pulleys. Adjust the pulley system so that the direction of pull opposes elbow flexion. Instruct the patient to flex their elbow. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting facing the pulley. Adjust the pulley system so that the direction of pull is upwards from the floor. Start with your elbow straight. Finish with your elbow bent. Progressions and variations More advanced: 1. Progress using strength training principles. Precautions 1. Ensure that wheelchair does not flip backwards.

Perform __ sets of __ reps. Do__ sessions per week. Fri Right Left Right

Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left

Tue Right Left

Wed Right Left

Thu

Exercise booklet for {

}64

Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi {

}

Elbow flexor strengthening in sitting using theraband
Therapist's aim To strengthen the elbow flexors. Client's aim To strengthen your biceps. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with their elbow extended. Adjust the theraband so that the direction of pull opposes elbow flexion. Instruct the patient to flex their elbow. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting facing the theraband. Adjust the theraband so that the direction of pull is upwards from the floor. Start with your elbow straight. Finish with your elbow bent. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Downgrade the colour of the theraband. More advanced: 1. Upgrade the colour of the theraband. Perform __ sets of __ reps. Do__ sessions per week. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right

Exercise booklet for {

}65

Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi {

}

Elbow flexor strengthening in supine using free weights
Therapist's aim To strengthen the elbow flexors. Client's aim To strengthen your biceps. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in supine. Instruct the patient to flex their elbow. Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your back. Start with your arm down beside your body. Finish with your hand up near your shoulder. Ensure that your elbow is held beside your body. Progressions and variations More advanced: 1. Progress using strength training principles.

Perform __ sets of __ reps. Do__ sessions per week. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right

Exercise booklet for {

}66

Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi {

}

Elbow flexor strengthening in supine using theraband
Therapist's aim To strengthen the elbow flexors. Client's aim To strengthen your biceps. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in supine with their elbow extended. Adjust the theraband so that the direction of pull opposes elbow flexion. Instruct the patient to flex their elbow. Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your back. Adjust the theraband so that the direction of pull is from the bottom of the bed. Start with your arm beside your body on the bed. Finish with your elbow bent. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Downgrade the colour of the theraband. More advanced: 1. Upgrade the Perform __ sets of __ reps. Do__ colour of the theraband. sessions per week. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right

Exercise booklet for {

}67

Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi {

}

Elbow flexor stretch in supine
Therapist's aim To stretch or maintain length of the elbow flexors. Client's aim To stretch or maintain range in your elbow. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in supine with their arm beside their body and their elbow extended over a rolled towel. Place a weight over their wrist joint. Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your back with your arm beside your body and your elbow held straight over a rolled towel. Place a weight over your wrist joint. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Decrease the size of the rolled up towel under the arm. More advanced: 1. Increase the size of the rolled up towel under the arm. Hold for __ minutes. Precautions 1. Impaired or absent sensation of stretch. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7

Exercise booklet for {

}68

Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi {

}

Elbow flexor/extensor strengthening in sidelying using slings
Therapist's aim To strengthen the elbow flexors/extensors. Client's aim To strengthen your biceps and triceps. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sidelying under an overhead cage with slings supporting their arms in shoulder flexion and elbow extension. Instruct the patient to flex and extend their elbow. Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your side with slings supporting your arms. Start with your arm beside your body and your elbow straight. Finish with your elbow bent. Progressions and variations More advanced: 1. Progress using strength training principles. Perform __ sets of __ reps. Do__ sessions per week. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right

Exercise booklet for {

}69

Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi {

}

Elbow flexor/extensor strengthening in sitting using slings
Therapist's aim To strengthen the elbow flexors/extensors. Client's aim To strengthen your biceps and triceps. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting under an overhead cage with slings supporting their arms in shoulder abduction and elbow flexion. Instruct the patient to flex and extend their elbow. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with slings supporting your arms. Start with your arms out to the side of your body and your elbows straight. Finish with your elbows bent. Progressions and variations More advanced: 1. Progress using strength training principles. Perform __ sets of __ reps. Do__ sessions per week. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right

Exercise booklet for {

}70

Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi {

}

Elbow flexor/extensor strengthening in supine using springs
Therapist's aim To strengthen the elbow flexors and extensors. Client's aim To strengthen your biceps and triceps. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in supine with their shoulder abducted to 45 degrees and their elbow bent. Position a handle attached to springs in their hand and fasten using a bandage. Adjust the spring so that the forearm is held vertically and place targets on either side of their forearm. Instruct the patient to flex and extend their elbow to move their hand to touch the targets. Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your back with your shoulder abducted to 45 degrees and your elbow bent. Position a handle attached to springs in your hand and fasten using a bandage. Perform __ sets of __ reps. Do__ Adjust the spring so that your forearm is held vertically and place targets on either side of your forearm. Practice moving your hand to touch the targets by bending and straightening sessions per week. your elbow. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Decrease the distance to the targets. More advanced: 1. Increase the distance to the targets. 2. Increase speed of task. 3. Practice in inner range. 4. Add resistance in mid range. 5. Progress using strength training principles. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7

Repeat __ times. against a wall).Exercise booklet for { }71 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Extending the arm to a target in lying Therapist's aim To improve the ability reach forwards and protract the shoulder. Ensure that your body is kept on the bed and your elbow is held straight. Instruct the patient to reach up and touch the object with their fingertips. Practice reaching up to touch a target object a small distance above your fingertips. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in supine with their arm and fingers extended vertically and a target object a small distance above their fingertips. Support the arm (eg. Client's aim To improve your ability to reach forwards. Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your back with your arm out straight and pointing vertically. Place the arm in an airsplint. 3. 2. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Position the object so that maximum protraction is required. Ensure that the trunk stays on the bed and the elbow remains straight. More advanced: 1. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Position the object closer to the fingertips.

the resistance of the elastic band. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with the tips of your fingers and thumb held together and an elastic band placed around them. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with the tips of their fingers and thumb held together and an elastic band placed around them. Practice opening your fingers and thumb outwards against the resistance of the elastic band. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Instruct the patient to open their fingers and thumb outwards against the resistance of the elastic band. Do__ sessions per week. Increase Perform __ sets of __ reps. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles that straighten your fingers and thumb. More advanced: 1. Reduce the resistance of the elastic band. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right .Exercise booklet for { }72 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Finger and thumb extensor strengthening using an elastic band Therapist's aim To strengthen the finger and thumb extensors.

Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with a piece of foam held in your hand. Use a grip strengthening device or ball (racquet ball). Perform __ sets of __ reps. Do__ sessions per week. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles that bend your fingers and thumb. Use a softer piece of foam. Use a denser piece of foam. Practice squeezing the foam to make a fist. More advanced: 1. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with a piece of foam held in their hand. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1.Exercise booklet for { }73 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Finger and thumb flexor strengthening using foam Therapist's aim To strengthen the finger and thumb flexors. 2. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Instruct the patient to squeeze the foam to make a fist.

Progress using strength training principles.Exercise booklet for { }74 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Finger and thumb flexor strengthening using grip device Therapist's aim To strengthen the finger and thumb flexors. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with a grip strengthening device in their hand. Do__ sessions per week. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with a grip strengthening device in your hand. Progressions and variations More advanced: 1. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles that bend your fingers and thumb. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Practice squeezing the device to make a fist. Instruct the patient to squeeze the device to make a fist. Perform __ sets of __ reps.

Combine with a pronator stretch by rotating the stretch board outwards. Impaired or absent sensation of stretch. Progressions and variations More advanced: 1. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with your hand in the device and your wrist and fingers out straight. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with their hand in the device and their wrist and fingers in extension. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Ensure that their forearm is firmly strapped in and their wrist joint is aligned with the hinge of the device.Exercise booklet for { }75 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Finger and wrist flexor stretch Therapist's aim To stretch or maintain length of the wrist and hand muscles. Hold for __ minutes. Precautions 1. Ensure that your forearm is firmly strapped in and your wrist joint is aligned with the hinge of the device. Client's aim To stretch or maintain range in your wrist and hand.

MCP and IP joints extended. Position the hands flat on a wall to increase wrist extension. Ensure that the hands are positioned with the wrist. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting on a plinth with your arms out straight behind you. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Ensure that your fingers are kept straight. Client's aim To stretch or maintain range in your wrists. Precautions 1. 2. Position the hands further away from Hold for __ minutes. Position the hands closer to the body. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. 2. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in long or short sitting with their arms out straight behind them. Place a small block under the palm to decrease wrist extension.Exercise booklet for { }76 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Finger and wrist flexor stretch in sitting by weight-bearing through hands Therapist's aim To stretch or maintain length of the wrist and finger flexors. More advanced: 1. Impaired or absent sensation of stretch. the body.

Perform skin tests. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Client's aim To strengthen your wrist/hand muscles. Perform __ sets of __ reps.Exercise booklet for { }77 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Finger extensor electrical stimulation Therapist's aim To strengthen the finger extensors. Precautions 1. Do__ sessions per week. Therapist's instructions Place the electrodes over the muscle belly of the finger extensors. Client's instructions Place the two electrodes over the muscle belly as shown.

Finish with your fingers straight. Do__ sessions per week. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with their fingers resting over the edge of the armrest. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Start with your fingers bent. Stabilise the forearm with a sandbag. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with your fingers resting over the edge of the armrest. Instruct the patient to extend their fingers.Exercise booklet for { }78 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Finger extensor strengthening in sitting without weights Therapist's aim To strengthen the finger extensors. Perform __ sets of __ reps. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles that straighten your fingers. More advanced: 1. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Progress using strength training principles.

Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with a small piece of foam between your ring and little fingers and palm of your hand. Practice squeezing your ring and little fingers to squash the foam into your palm.Exercise booklet for { }79 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Finger flexor and intrinsic muscle strengthening Therapist's aim To strengthen the finger flexors and intrinsic muscles of the hand. Do__ sessions per week. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Perform __ sets of __ reps. Use a denser piece of foam. Use a softer piece of foam. Fri Right . More advanced: 1. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles that bend your fingers. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with a small piece of foam between their ring and little fingers and the palm of their hand. Instruct the patient to squeeze their ring and little fingers to squash the foam into their palm. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1.

Client's aim To strengthen your wrist/hand muscles. Perform __ sets of __ reps. Therapist's instructions Place the electrodes over the muscle belly of the finger flexors.Exercise booklet for { }80 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Finger flexor electrical stimulation Therapist's aim To strengthen the finger flexors. Perform skin tests. Client's instructions Place the two electrodes over the muscle belly as shown. Do__ sessions per week. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Precautions 1.

Ensure that your back remains straight and your weight is borne equally through both legs. table to incline it. 2. Ensure that the back remains extended and weight is borne equally through both legs. both feet back and flat on the floor and their arms resting on a towel on a table. both feet back and flat on the floor and your arms resting on a towel on a table.Exercise booklet for { }81 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Flexing the hips in sitting and sliding arms forward on a table to a target Therapist's aim To improve the ability to move the trunk forwards to stand up. Practice bending forward at your hips and sliding your hands along the table to a target. Position a block under the front of the table to incline it. Instruct the patient to flex their hips and slide their hands along the table to a target. Decrease the distance to the target. Position a block under the front of the Repeat __ times. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with 50% thigh support. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . More advanced: 1. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Client's aim To improve your ability to move your trunk forwards to stand up. Increase the distance to the target. Practice lifting the bottom up after bending forward. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with half of your thighs supported.

Place a weight over their wrist joint. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in their wheelchair with their forearms supinated on their armrests. Client's aim To stretch or maintain range in your forearms. Impaired or absent sensation of stretch.Exercise booklet for { }82 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Forearm pronator stretch in sitting Therapist's aim To stretch or maintain length of the forearm pronators. Precautions 1. Place a weight over your wrist joint. Client's instructions Position yourself in your wheelchair with your palms facing upwards on your armrests. Hold for __ minutes. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right .

Increase distance between the target lines to maximum range. sessions per week. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting in front of a table and wall with their elbow bent and a ruler taped to their hand. Practice rotating your forearm back and forth until the ruler reaches the target lines.Exercise booklet for { }83 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Forearm supination and pronation to a wall target Therapist's aim To improve the ability to reach for objects. Ensure that the hand does not move Perform __ sets of __ reps. Ensure that internal rotation does not occur at the shoulder. Instruct the patient to supinate and pronate their forearm until the ruler reaches the target lines. More advanced: 1. Do__ sideways. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Draw two target lines on some paper on the wall. Tape a small weight to the ruler. Decrease distance between the target lines. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting in front of a table and wall with your elbow bent and a ruler taped to your hand. Draw two target lines on some paper on the wall. Client's aim To improve your ability to reach for objects. 2.

Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Place a weight over your wrist joint. Client's aim To stretch or maintain range in your forearms. Place a weight over their wrist joint. Hold for __ minutes. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in their wheelchair with their forearms pronated on their armrests. Impaired or absent sensation of stretch. Precautions 1.Exercise booklet for { }84 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Forearm supinator stretch in sitting Therapist's aim To stretch or maintain length of the forearm supinators. Client's instructions Position yourself in your wheelchair with your palms facing downwards on your armrests.

Client's instructions Place the two electrodes over the muscle belly as shown. Client's aim To strengthen your calf muscles. Perform __ sets of __ reps. Therapist's instructions Place the electrodes over the muscle belly of the ankle plantarflexors. Do__ sessions per week.Exercise booklet for { }85 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Gastrocnemius electrical stimulation Therapist's aim To strengthen the ankle plantarflexors. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Perform skin tests. Precautions 1.

Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Therapist's instructions Position the patient on the floor in supine. Client's aim To improve your ability to stand up from the floor. 2. then side-sitting to kneeling and finally kneeling to sitting. Practice moving from supine to side-sitting. Practice getting up from the floor in one sequence. Ensure that a backwards-chaining method is used to practice each component in sequence to minimise the amount of assistance required. between supine and standing. Practice the individual components of getting up from the floor individually. Practice moving Repeat __ times.Exercise booklet for { }86 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Getting up from the floor Therapist's aim To improve the ability to stand up from the floor. Precautions 1. Client's instructions Position yourself on the floor in supine. Practice getting up from the floor without using a sturdy support surface. 3. More advanced: 1. Instruct the patient to move from supine to sidesitting. then side-sitting to kneeling and finally kneeling to sitting. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1.

Exercise booklet for { }87 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Gluteal electrical stimulation Therapist's aim To strengthen the hip extensors. Therapist's instructions Place the electrodes over the muscle belly of the hip extensors. Do__ sessions per week. Perform skin tests. Perform __ sets of __ reps. Precautions 1. Client's aim To strengthen your bottom muscles. Client's instructions Place the two electrodes over the muscle belly as shown. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right .

Ensure that the ankles are firmly pushed against the backrest of the chair. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with their legs raised up on a chair. 2. 2. Impaired or absent sensation of stretch. Hold for __ minutes. Ensure that the chair does not tip backwards. Client's aim To stretch or maintain length in the muscles at the back of your thighs and ankles. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Raise the height of the chair. Place a wedge under the feet to increase dorsiflexion. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with your legs raised up on a chair. Precautions 1.Exercise booklet for { }88 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Hamstring and ankle plantarflexor stretch in sitting Therapist's aim To stretch or maintain length of the hamstrings and ankle plantarflexors. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Lower the height of the chair. More advanced: 1. Ensure that your ankles are firmly pushed against the backrest of the chair.

Client's instructions Position yourself sitting against a wall with your legs out in front of you and your back straight. Use wraparound splints on the legs. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in long sitting against a wall. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 .Exercise booklet for { }89 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Hamstring stretch in long sitting Therapist's aim To stretch or maintain length of the hamstrings. Reach forward in this position. Ensure that their knees are kept straight and their pelvis is not posteriorly tilted. Ensure that your knees are kept straight and your feet point upright. More advanced: 1. Impaired or absent sensation of stretch. Precautions 1. Client's aim To stretch or maintain length in the muscles at the back of your thighs. Repeat __ times.

More advanced: 1. Ensure that you keep your knees straight. Hold for __ minutes. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Ensure that their lumbar spine does not flex and their knees are kept straight. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 .Exercise booklet for { }90 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Hamstring stretch in lying with legs up a wall Therapist's aim To stretch or maintain length of the hamstrings. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in lying with their legs extended above them and resting against a wall. Impaired or absent sensation of stretch. Client's aim To stretch or maintain length in the muscles at the back of your thighs. Precautions 1. Client's instructions Position yourself lying with your legs held out straight above you and resting against a wall. Position the bottom closer to the wall. Position the bottom further away from the wall.

More advanced: 1. Hold for __ minutes. Ensure that your bottom is all the way back in the chair. Client's aim To stretch or maintain length in the muscles at the back of your thighs. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Increase the height of the stool. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with one leg out straight on a stool in front of you and a pillow behind your low back. Ensure that the bottom is all the way back in the chair. Impaired or absent sensation of stretch. Precautions 1. Decrease the height of the stool. Place a sandbag on the knee. 2. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 .Exercise booklet for { }91 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Hamstring stretch in sitting Therapist's aim To stretch or maintain length of the hamstrings. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with one leg extended on a stool in front of them and a pillow behind their lumbar spine.

2. Impaired or absent sensation of stretch. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. a pillow behind their lumbar spine and a sandbag weight on their knee. Decrease the height of the stool. Precautions 1. Ensure that your bottom is all the way back in the chair. Client's aim To stretch or maintain length in the muscles at the back of your thighs. Increase the height of the stool. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with one leg extended on a stool in front of them. Hold for __ minutes. a pillow behind your low back and a sandbag weight on your knee. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with one leg out straight on a stool in front of you. More advanced: 1. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Ensure that the bottom is all the way back in the chair.Exercise booklet for { }92 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Hamstring stretch in sitting with weight on knee Therapist's aim To stretch or maintain length of the hamstrings. Remove the sandbag on the knee.

Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Impaired or absent sensation of stretch. Decrease the height of the stool. Instruct the patient to lean forwards at their hips. Ensure that you keep your back straight. Ensure that their back is kept straight. More Hold for __ minutes. Increase forwards lean.Exercise booklet for { }93 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Hamstring stretch in standing using a wall and stool Therapist's aim To stretch or maintain length of the hamstrings. Client's aim To stretch or maintain length in the muscles at the back of your thighs. advanced: 1. 2. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Decrease forwards lean. Lean forwards at your hips. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing against a wall with one leg extended in front of them on a stool. Precautions 1. Client's instructions Position yourself standing against a wall with one leg out straight in front of you on a stool. 2. Increase the height of the stool.

Adjust the axis of the device in alignment with the hip. Add counterweights then the stretch weight. Adjust the axis of the device in alignment with your hip. Add counterweights then the stretch weight. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your back.Exercise booklet for { }94 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Hamstring stretch in supine using standardised torque Therapist's aim To stretch or maintain length of the hamstrings. Client's aim To stretch or maintain length in the muscles at the back of your thigh. Impaired or absent sensation of stretch. Precautions 1. Hold for __ minutes. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in supine.

Impaired or absent sensation of stretch. thumb webspace and wrist flexors. More advanced: 1. Precautions 1.Exercise booklet for { }95 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Hand webspace stretch Therapist's aim To stretch or maintain length of the long finger flexors. Client's aim To stretch or maintain range in your hand. Decrease the size of the cup. Hold for __ minutes. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Therapist's instructions Position the patient with their hand around a large cup. Increase the size of the cup. Client's instructions Position your hand around a large cup. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1.

Client's aim To improve your ability to walk with your feet closer together. Ensure that the feet do not step off the line. advanced: 1. 2. Use a thicker line to walk on. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing on a line with one leg directly in front of the other. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Provide hand support for balance. 2.Exercise booklet for { }96 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Heel/toe walking on a line Therapist's aim To improve the ability to walk with a smaller base of support. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Ensure that your feet do not step off the line. Use a thinner line to walk on. Client's instructions Position yourself standing on a line with one leg directly in front of the other. More Repeat __ times. Add a concurrent task. Practice walking along the line by placing one foot straight in front of the other. Instruct the patient to walk along the line by placing one foot straight in front of the other.

Do__ Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. the hip and knee remain extended and the foot points forwards (i.e. do not allow external rotation of the hip). Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . More advanced: 1. Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your side with your back and legs against a wall. Ensure that the leg remains against the wall.Exercise booklet for { }97 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Hip abductor strengthening in sidelying against a wall Therapist's aim To strengthen the hip abductors. Instruct the patient to abduct their top leg to a target on the wall. Start with your top leg resting on the lower leg. Finish with your leg away from the bed to touch the target. Progress using strength training principles. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sidelying with their shoulders. hips and feet against a wall and their lower leg bent. Decrease duration of leg elevation. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the side of your hip. 2. Perform __ sets of __ reps. Ensure that your whole leg remains against the wall and your foot points forwards. of leg elevation. Increase duration sessions per week.

Start with your leg beside your body. Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your side with a pulley attached to your ankle. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Progressions and variations More advanced: 1. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the side and back of your hip. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sidelying with a pulley attached to their foot. Finish with your leg away from your body. Progress using strength training principles.Exercise booklet for { }98 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Hip abductor strengthening in sidelying using pulleys Therapist's aim To strengthen the hip abductors. Perform __ sets of __ reps. Do__ sessions per week. Instruct the patient to abduct their hip.

Do__ sessions per week. Fri Right Left Right Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu . Ensure that you keep your hip and knee straight and your foot pointing forwards. Start with your top leg resting on the bed. Progressions and variations More advanced: 1. Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your side with a weight on your ankle.Exercise booklet for { }99 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Hip abductor strengthening in sidelying using sandbag weights Therapist's aim To strengthen the hip abductors. Ensure that the knee and hip remain extended and the foot points forwards. Perform __ sets of __ reps. Finish with your leg away from the bed. Instruct the patient to abduct their top leg. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sidelying with their knee extended and a weight around their ankle. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the side of your hip. Progress using strength training principles.

Downgrade the colour of the theraband. colour of the theraband. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the side of your hip. Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your side. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Ensure that your hip and knee are kept straight and your foot points forwards.Exercise booklet for { }100 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Hip abductor strengthening in sidelying using theraband Therapist's aim To strengthen the hip abductors. Do__ sessions per week. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sidelying. Upgrade the Perform __ sets of __ reps. Adjust the theraband so that the direction of pull opposes hip abduction. Adjust the theraband so that the direction of pull is away from the floor. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Finish with your leg away from the bed. Ensure that the hip and knee remain extended and the foot points forwards. Instruct the patient to abduct their top leg. Start with your top leg resting on the bed. More advanced: 1.

Ensure that the hip and knee remain extended and the foot points forwards. More advanced: 1. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Perform __ sets of __ reps. Finish with your leg away from the bed. Increase duration of leg elevation. Do__ sessions per week. Ensure that your hip and knee are kept straight and your foot points forwards. 2. Instruct the patient to abduct their top leg. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Fri Right . Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sidelying. Progress using strength training principles. Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your side. Position the patient in quarter off supine.Exercise booklet for { }101 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Hip abductor strengthening in sidelying without weights Therapist's aim To strengthen the hip abductors. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the side of your hip. 2. Position the patient with their back against a wall for feedback about lower limb alignment. Start with your top leg resting on the bed.

Less advanced: 1. Provide hand support for balance. Ensure that your feet point forwards.Exercise booklet for { }102 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Hip abductor strengthening in standing against a wall Therapist's aim To strengthen the hip abductors. Finish with your leg away from your body by sliding your heel along the wall. More advanced: 1. Progress using strength training principles. Client's instructions Position yourself standing with your shoulders and heels against a wall and your hips slightly forward. Ensure that the feet point forwards. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Start with your leg beside your body. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the side of your hip. Progressions and variations Repeat __ times. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with their shoulders and heels against a wall and hips slightly forward. Instruct the patient to abduct their hip by sliding their heel along the wall.

Do__ sessions per week. Finish with your leg away from your body. Perform __ sets of __ reps. Client's instructions Position yourself standing next to the pulleys. Adjust the pulley system so that the direction of pull opposes hip abduction. Provide hand support for balance. More advanced: 1. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Instruct the patient to abduct their hip. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Progress using strength training principles.Exercise booklet for { }103 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Hip abductor strengthening in standing using pulleys Therapist's aim To strengthen the hip abductors. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing next to the pulleys. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the side of your hip. Start with your leg beside your body.

Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Progress using strength training principles. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with a weight attached around their ankle.Exercise booklet for { }104 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Hip abductor strengthening in standing using sandbag weights Therapist's aim To strengthen the hip abductors. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the side of your hip. Do__ sessions per week. Finish with your leg away from your body. Start with your leg beside your body. Client's instructions Position yourself standing with a weight around your ankle. Instruct the patient to abduct their leg. Perform __ sets of __ reps. Progressions and variations More advanced: 1.

Do__ sessions per week. Start with your leg beside your body. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Perform __ sets of __ reps. Instruct the patient to abduct their hip.Exercise booklet for { }105 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Hip abductor strengthening in standing using theraband Therapist's aim To strengthen the hip abductors. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. 2. Adjust the theraband so that the direction of pull opposes hip abduction. Downgrade the colour of the theraband. Provide hand support for balance. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the side of your hip. Client's instructions Position yourself standing side on to the theraband. Finish with your leg away from your body. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with their hip adducted. Upgrade the colour of the theraband. More advanced: 1.

Start with your leg beside your body. Finish with your leg away from your body. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the side of your hip. Do__ sessions per week. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Progress using strength training principles. Instruct the patient to abduct their hip. Provide hand support for balance. Perform __ sets of __ reps.Exercise booklet for { }106 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Hip abductor strengthening in standing without weights Therapist's aim To strengthen the hip abductors. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with their feet together. Client's instructions Position yourself standing with their feet together. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. More advanced: 1.

Ensure that the knee remains extended and the toes point upwards. Do__ Less advanced: 1. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Therapist's instructions Position the patient in supine with slings under their knee and foot and two targets on either side of their ankle. More advanced: 1. distance to the targets. Progressions and variations Perform __ sets of __ reps. Progress using strength training principles.Exercise booklet for { }107 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Hip abductor strengthening using slings Therapist's aim To strengthen the hip abductors. Practice opening and closing your leg to touch the targets with your ankle. 2. Increase the sessions per week. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the side of your hip. Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your back with slings under your knee and foot and targets on either side of your ankle. Instruct the patient to abduct and adduct their leg to touch the targets. Decrease the distance to the targets. Ensure that your knee remains straight and your toes point upwards.

Progressions and variations More advanced: 1.Exercise booklet for { }108 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Hip abductor/adductor strengthening in supine without weights Therapist's aim To strengthen the hip abductors and adductors. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in supine with their legs adducted. Start with your leg parallel to your other leg. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the side and on the inside of your hip. Instruct the patient to abduct and adduct their leg. Perform __ sets of __ reps. Finish with your leg out to the side. Ensure that the foot remains vertical. Ensure that your foot is kept vertical. Progress using strength training principles. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Do__ sessions per week. Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your back.

Ensure that the foot remains vertical. Do__ sessions per week. Ensure that your foot is kept vertical. More advanced: 1. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1.Exercise booklet for { }109 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Hip abductor/adductor strengthening using a skateboard in supine Therapist's aim To strengthen the hip abductors and adductors. Instruct the patient to abduct and then adduct the leg. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in supine with their leg adducted and resting on a skateboard. Start with your leg parallel to your other leg. Perform __ sets of __ reps. Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your back with your leg on a skateboard. Fri Right Left Right Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu . Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the side and on the inside of your hip. Position the skateboard over a firm surface to reduce friction. Progress using strength training principles. Finish with your leg out to the side.

Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the inside of your thigh. Ensure that the knee and hip remain extended and the foot points forwards.Exercise booklet for { }110 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Hip adductor strengthening in sidelying using pulleys Therapist's aim To strengthen the hip adductors. Instruct the patient to adduct their top leg. Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your side. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sidelying. Ensure that your hip and knee are kept straight and your foot points forwards. Start with your top leg away from the bed. Finish with your legs together. Adjust the pulley so that the direction of pull opposes hip adduction. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Do__ sessions per week. Perform __ sets of __ reps. Adjust the pulley so the direction of pull is downwards from the attachment.

Downgrade the colour of the theraband. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Upgrade the colour of the theraband. Instruct the patient to adduct their leg. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sidelying with their hip abducted. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Client's aim To strengthen the muscles on the inside of your thigh. Start with your leg away from your body.Exercise booklet for { }111 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Hip adductor strengthening in sidelying using theraband Therapist's aim To strengthen the hip adductors. Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your side with theraband attached to your ankle. Finish with your leg beside your body. More advanced: 1. Adjust the theraband so that the direction of pull opposes hip adduction. Do__ sessions per week. Perform __ sets of __ reps.

Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing next to the pulleys. Do__ sessions per week. Client's instructions Position yourself standing beside the pulley with the pulley attached to your ankle. Perform __ sets of __ reps. Finish with your leg beside your body. Adjust the pulley system so that the direction of pull opposes hip adduction. Progressions and variations More advanced: 1. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles on the inside of your thigh. Progress using strength training principles.Exercise booklet for { }112 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Hip adductor strengthening in standing using pulleys Therapist's aim To strengthen the hip adductors. Start with your leg away from your body. Instruct the patient to adduct their leg. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right .

Instruct the patient to adduct their leg. Perform __ sets of __ reps. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Adjust the theraband so that the direction of pull opposes hip adduction. Client's instructions Position yourself standing beside the theraband with the theraband attached to your ankle. Upgrade the colour of the theraband.Exercise booklet for { }113 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Hip adductor strengthening in standing using theraband Therapist's aim To strengthen the hip adductors. More advanced: 1. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles on the inside of your thigh. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Downgrade the colour of the theraband. Start with your leg away from your body. Do__ sessions per week. Finish with your leg beside your body. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing.

Client's aim To stretch or maintain range in your hips. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Precautions 1. Ensure that their ankles are supported in 90 degrees dorsiflexion and their heels are lifted off the mattress.Exercise booklet for { }114 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Hip adductor stretch in supine using wedge Therapist's aim To stretch or maintain length of the hip adductors. More advanced: 1. Place a rolled towel between the knees. Less advanced: 1. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in supine with an abductor wedge placed between their thighs. Ensure that your ankles are supported in an upright position and your heels are lifted off the mattress. Place the wedge higher up between the thighs. Impaired or absent sensation of stretch. Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your back with a triangular wedge placed between your thighs. Progressions and variations Hold for __ minutes.

Place their legs in a `froggie` position with their hips abducted and externally rotated. Place your legs in a `froggie` position with your feet up near your bottom. Increase the weight on the knees. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your back. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in supine. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Place a weight over your knees. Precautions 1. Place a weight over their knees. Hold for __ minutes. More advanced: 1.Exercise booklet for { }115 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Hip adductor stretch in supine using weights Therapist's aim To stretch or maintain length of the hip adductors. Client's aim To stretch or maintain range in your hips. Impaired or absent sensation of stretch. Place a rolled up towel under the knees for support.

Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with their knees flexed. Place a rolled up towel under the knees for support.Exercise booklet for { }116 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Hip adductor stretch in unsupported sitting Therapist's aim To stretch or maintain length of the hip internal rotators and hip adductors. Push your knees gently towards the floor with your elbows. More advanced: 1. Client's aim To stretch or maintain range in your hips. Hold for __ minutes. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Impaired or absent sensation of stretch. Place a weight on the knees. Precautions 1. Instruct the patient to push their knees gently towards the floor with their elbows. Progressions and variations More advanced: 1. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with your hips and knees bent to each side and your feet together. hips abducted and externally rotated and their feet together.

Progressions and variations Perform exercise for __ minutes. Precautions 1. Use larger propulsion strokes with the arms. Use the lower limbs to push off from a wall. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Ensure that the hands are kept away from the wheels. Practice propelling yourself along the floor using your arms. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in prone on a scooterboard. Ensure that their legs or chest don`t touch the floor. Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your stomach on a scooterboard.Exercise booklet for { }117 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Hip and back extensor strengthening using a scooterboard Therapist's aim To strengthen the hip and back extensors. Instruct the patient to hold their head up and propel themselves along the floor using their arms. More advanced: 1. Ensure that you hold your head up and your legs or chest don`t touch the floor. Client's aim To strengthen your hip and back muscles. Less advanced: 1.

Client's aim To stretch or maintain range in your hips and knees. Increase the tautness of the strap. More advanced: 1. Place a weight on the extended knee and a strap around the bed and over the bent knee. Decrease the tautness of the strap. Impaired or absent sensation of stretch. Hold for __ minutes. Precautions 1. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in supine with one leg bent up towards their chest. Place a weight on your extended knee and a strap around the bed up over your bent knee.Exercise booklet for { }118 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Hip and knee extensor stretch in supine using a strap Therapist's aim To stretch or maintain length of the hip and knee extensors. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your back with one leg bent up towards your chest.

2. Practice in standing without using the wall.Exercise booklet for { }119 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Hip extension in standing against a wall Therapist's aim To improve the ability to extend the hips in standing. bottom and ankles against a wall. Client's instructions Position yourself standing with your shoulders. Ensure that the knees remain extended and the shoulders and feet remain against the wall. Instruct the patient to extend their hips to take their bottom away from the wall. Ensure that your knees remain straight and your shoulders and feet remain against the wall. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with their shoulders. Rest hands against the wall for support. bottom and ankles against a wall. amount of weight borne through the affected leg. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Client's aim To improve your ability to straighten your hips in standing. Practice moving your bottom away from the wall. More advanced: 1. Increase the Repeat __ times. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1.

Ensure that the top knee is kept straight. More advanced: 1. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Perform __ sets of __ reps. Fri Right .Exercise booklet for { }120 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Hip extensor and flexor strengthening in sidelying using a skateboard Therapist's aim To strengthen the hip extensors and flexors. Do__ sessions per week. Position the skateboard over a firm surface to reduce friction. Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your side with your top leg resting on a skateboard. Progress using strength training principles. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sidelying with their top leg resting on a skateboard. Instruct the patient to move the skateboard forwards and backwards by flexing and extending the hip. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the back and front of your hip. Apply a splint if necessary. Ensure that you keep your top knee straight. Practice moving the skateboard forwards and backwards by bending and straightening your hip.

Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sidelying with their top leg resting on a slideboard and their hip and knee extended. Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your side with your top leg resting on a slideboard and your hip and knee straight. Do__ Less advanced: 1. mid range.Exercise booklet for { }121 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Hip extensor and flexor strengthening in sidelying using a slideboard Therapist's aim To strengthen the hip extensors and flexors. Add resistance in sessions per week. Progress using strength training principles. Increase range of motion. 3. Ensure that you keep your top knee straight. Practice in inner range. Instruct the patient to flex and extend their hip. Increase speed of task. Practice moving your leg forwards and backwards by bending and straightening your hip. Ensure that the top knee is kept straight. Progressions and variations Perform __ sets of __ reps. 5. Apply a splint to keep the leg straight. 2. 4. More advanced: 1. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the back and front of your hip. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 .

Start with your hip bent forwards. Progress using strength training principles. Ensure that the knee remains bent. Do__ sessions per week. Fri Right Left Right Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu . Progressions and variations More advanced: 1. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sidelying with their hip and knee flexed and slings under their uppermost knee and ankle. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the back and front of your hip. Instruct the patient extend and flex their hip. Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your side with your hip and knee bent and slings under your uppermost knee and ankle. Ensure that your knee remains bent. Perform __ sets of __ reps. Finish with your hip straightened backwards.Exercise booklet for { }122 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Hip extensor and flexor strengthening in sidelying using slings Therapist's aim To strengthen the hip extensors and flexors.

Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sidelying with slings from their ankle and knee attached to a point over their hip. Progress using strength training principles. Do__ remains straight. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. 5. sessions per week. Instruct the patient to flex and extend their hip to touch the targets. Decrease the distance to the targets. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Ensure that the knee remains extended. Increase the distance to the targets. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the front and back of your hip. Practice in inner range. Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your side with slings from your ankle and knee attached to a point over your hip and two targets on either side of your ankle. Practice moving your leg forwards and backwards to touch the targets with your ankle. Ensure that your knee Perform __ sets of __ reps. Increase speed of task. Add resistance in mid range. More advanced: 1.Exercise booklet for { }123 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Hip extensor and flexor strengthening in sidelying using slings and targets Therapist's aim To strengthen the hip extensors and flexors. Place two targets on either side of their ankle which require a small movement in mid range. 4. 2. Apply a splint to keep the knee straight. 2. 3.

Start with your leg on the bed. Do__ sessions per week. Progress using strength training principles. Perform __ sets of __ reps. Adjust the pulley system so that the direction of pull opposes hip extension. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in prone facing away from the pulleys. Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your stomach with your ankle attached to the pulley. Instruct the patient to extend their hip.Exercise booklet for { }124 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Hip extensor strengthening in prone using pulleys Therapist's aim To strengthen the hip extensors. Lift your whole leg off the bed. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Progressions and variations More advanced: 1. Finish with your leg off the bed. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the back of your hip.

Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Start with your leg on the bed. Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your stomach with your ankle attached to the theraband. Do__ sessions per week. Perform __ sets of __ reps. Downgrade the colour of the theraband. Finish with your leg off the bed. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in prone with their hip and knee extended.Exercise booklet for { }125 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Hip extensor strengthening in prone using theraband Therapist's aim To strengthen the hip extensors. Instruct the patient to extend their hip. Lift your whole leg off the bed. Adjust the theraband so that the direction of pull opposes hip extension. More advanced: 1. Upgrade the colour of the theraband. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the back of your hip.

Exercise booklet for {

}126

Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi {

}

Hip extensor strengthening in prone using weights
Therapist's aim To strengthen the hip extensors. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the back of your hip. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in prone with their hip and knee extended and a weight around their ankle. Instruct the patient to extend their hip. Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your stomach with a weight on your ankle. Start with your leg on the bed. Finish with your leg off the bed. Progressions and variations More advanced: 1. Progress using strength training principles. Perform __ sets of __ reps. Do__ sessions per week. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right

Exercise booklet for {

}127

Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi {

}

Hip extensor strengthening in prone without weights
Therapist's aim To strengthen the hip extensors. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the back of your hip. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in prone. Instruct the patient to extend their hip. Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your stomach. Start with your leg on the bed. Finish with your leg off the bed. Progressions and variations More advanced: 1. Progress using strength training principles.

Perform __ sets of __ reps. Do__ sessions per week. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right

Exercise booklet for {

}128

Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi {

}

Hip extensor strengthening in standing
Therapist's aim To strengthen the hip extensors. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the back of your hip. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with their hands resting on a table in front of them. Instruct the patient to extend their hip while keeping their knee extended. Client's instructions Position yourself standing with your hands resting on a table in front of you. Start with your hip straight beside your other leg. Finish with your hip extended behind. Ensure that your knee is kept straight. Progressions and variations More advanced: 1. Progress using strength training principles. Perform __ sets of __ reps. Do__ sessions per week. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right

Exercise booklet for {

}129

Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi {

}

Hip extensor strengthening in standing using sandbag weights
Therapist's aim To strengthen the hip extensors. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the back of your hip. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with their hands resting on a table in front of them and a sandbag weight around their ankle. Instruct the patient to extend their hip while keeping their knee extended. Client's instructions Position yourself standing with your hands resting on a table in front of you and a sandbag weight around your ankle. Start with your hip straight beside your other leg. Finish with your hip extended behind. Ensure that your knee is kept straight. Progressions and variations Perform __ sets of __ reps. Do__ More advanced: 1. Progress using strength training principles. sessions per week. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right

Exercise booklet for {

}130

Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi {

}

Hip extensor stretch in supine
Therapist's aim To stretch or maintain length of the hip extensors. Client's aim To stretch or maintain range in your hip. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in supine with one leg on a stool. Place a weight over the ankle on the stool. Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your back with one leg on a stool. Place a weight over your ankle on the stool. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Position the stool further away from the hips to decrease hip flexion. More advanced: 1. Position the stool closer to the hips to increase hip flexion. Hold for __ minutes. Precautions 1. Impaired or absent sensation of stretch. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7

Exercise booklet for {

}131

Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi {

}

Hip extensor/flexor strengthening in sidelying using a slideboard
Therapist's aim To strengthen the hip extensors and flexors. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the back and front of your hip. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sidelying with a slideboard under their leg. Instruct the patient to extend and flex their hip. Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your side with a slideboard under your leg. Start with your foot in front of your hip. Finish with your foot behind your hip. Ensure that your knee is kept straight. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Use talcum powder on the slideboard to reduce friction. More advanced: Perform __ sets of __ reps. Do__ 1. Progress using strength training principles. sessions per week. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right

Exercise booklet for {

}132

Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi {

}

Hip extensor/flexor strengthening in sidelying without weights
Therapist's aim To strengthen the hip extensors and flexors. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the back and front of your hip. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sidelying. Instruct the patient to extend their hip. Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your side. Start with your foot in front of your hip. Finish with your foot behind your hip. Progressions and variations More advanced: 1. Progress using strength training principles.

Perform __ sets of __ reps. Do__ sessions per week. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right

Exercise booklet for {

}133

Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi {

}

Hip external rotator and abductor stretch in long sitting
Therapist's aim To stretch or maintain length of the hip external rotators and abductors. Client's aim To stretch or maintain range in your hips. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in long sitting with one leg crossed over the other and their opposite elbow on the outside of their crossed knee. Instruct the patient to rotate their trunk to look behind them. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with one leg crossed over the other and your opposite elbow on the outside of your crossed knee. Rotate your trunk to look behind you. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Decrease trunk rotation. More advanced: 1. Increase trunk rotation. Hold for __ minutes. Precautions 1. Impaired or absent sensation of stretch. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7

Exercise booklet for {

}134

Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi {

}

Hip external rotator and abductor stretch in supine
Therapist's aim To stretch or maintain length of the hip external rotators and abductors. Client's aim To stretch or maintain range in your hips. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in supine with their knees bent up on the bed and rotated to one side. Place a belt around the pelvis to keep it flat against the bed and place a weight on top of the knees. Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your back with your knees bent up on the bed and rotated to one side. Place a belt around your pelvis to keep it flat against the bed and place a weight on top of your knees. Progressions and variations Hold for __ minutes. Less advanced: 1. Decrease the weight on the knees. More advanced: 1. Increase the weight on the knees. Precautions 1. Impaired or absent sensation of stretch. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7

Exercise booklet for {

}135

Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi {

}

Hip external rotator strengthening in sidelying without weights
Therapist's aim To strengthen the hip external rotators. Client's aim To strengthen your hip muscles. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sidelying with their hips and knees flexed. Instruct the patient to lift their top knee upwards while keeping their ankles together. Ensure that their knees remain flexed. Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your side with your hips and knees bent. Practice lifting your top knee upwards while keeping your ankles together. Ensure that your knees remain bent. Progressions and variations More advanced: 1. Progress using strength training principles. Perform __ sets of __ reps. Do__ sessions per week. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right

Exercise booklet for {

}136

Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi {

}

Hip external rotator strengthening in sitting using pulleys
Therapist's aim To strengthen the hip external rotators. Client's aim To strengthen your hip muscles. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting perpendicular to the pulleys. Adjust the pulley system so that the direction of pull opposes hip external rotation. Instruct the patient to externally rotate their hip. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with your legs over the side of a bed. Adjust the pulley system so that the direction of pull is toward your opposite leg. Start with your feet apart. Finish with your feet together. Ensure that you keep your thighs apart. Progressions and variations More advanced: 1. Progress using strength training principles.

Perform __ sets of __ reps. Do__ sessions per week. Fri Right Left Right

Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left

Tue Right Left

Wed Right Left

Thu

Adjust the theraband so that the direction of pull is towards your opposite leg. Finish with your feet together. Start with your feet apart. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with your legs over the side of a bed.Exercise booklet for { }137 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Hip external rotator strengthening in sitting using theraband Therapist's aim To strengthen the hip external rotators. Downgrade the colour of the theraband. Upgrade the Perform __ sets of __ reps. More advanced: 1. Client's aim To strengthen your hip muscles. Do__ sessions per week. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with their legs over the side of a bed. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. colour of the theraband. Instruct the patient to externally rotate their hip. Adjust the theraband so that the direction of pull opposes hip external rotation. Ensure that you keep your thighs apart.

Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Perform __ sets of __ reps. Client's aim To strengthen your hip muscles. Progressions and variations More advanced: 1. Progress using strength training principles. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with a weight attached to their ankle. Instruct the patient to externally rotate their hip. Start with your feet apart. Do__ sessions per week. Ensure that you keep your thighs apart.Exercise booklet for { }138 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Hip external rotator strengthening in sitting using weights Therapist's aim To strengthen the hip external rotators. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with your legs over the side of a bed and a weight around your ankle. Finish with your feet together.

Progressions and variations More advanced: 1.Exercise booklet for { }139 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Hip external rotator strengthening in sitting without weights Therapist's aim To strengthen the hip external rotators. Progress using strength training principles. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with your legs over the side of a bed. Perform __ sets of __ reps. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Client's aim To strengthen your hip muscles. Ensure that you keep your thighs apart. Instruct the patient to externally rotate their hip. Do__ sessions per week. Finish with your feet together. Start with your feet apart.

Precautions 1. Tie the ankles closer to the chair legs. Tie your ankles to the front chair legs. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 .Exercise booklet for { }140 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Hip external rotator stretch in sitting Therapist's aim To stretch or maintain length of the hip external rotators. Client's aim To stretch or maintain range in your hips. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with their knees held together with a belt. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with your knees held together with a belt. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Tie the ankles looser. More advanced: 1. Internally rotate their hips and tie their ankles to the front chair legs. Impaired or absent sensation of stretch. Hold for __ minutes.

Exercise booklet for { }141 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Hip flexor strengthening . Progress using strength training principles. Finish with your hip bent upwards and your knee bent. Start with your hip straight and knee bent. Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your back with one leg over the side of the bed. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Repeat __ times. Place a block under the foot to raise it of the floor. Fri Right . Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the front of your hip. Ensure that you keep your knee bent throughout. Instruct the patient to flex their hip while keeping their knee bent. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in supine with one leg over the side of the bed and their knee bent.lifting the foot while keeping the knee bent Therapist's aim To strengthen the hip flexors. More advanced: 1. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1.

Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with both feet on the floor. Finish with your hip bent forwards. Perform the task using a cue to limit knee extension. More advanced: 1. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with their feet flat on the floor. Strap a weight around the ankle or knee. Do__ sessions per week. Do__ Less advanced: 1. 2. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right Hip flexor strengthening in sitting Therapist's aim To strengthen the hip flexors. Instruct the patient to flex their hip. Start with your knee bent and foot on the floor. Adjust the theraband so that the direction of pull opposes hip flexion. Perform __ sets of __ reps. Downgrade the colour of the theraband. Attach some theraband to your thigh so that the direction of pull is from behind you. slideboard to reduce friction. Start with your hip straight behind. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the front of your hip. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sidelying with their leg resting on a slideboard and their hip and knee extended. Instruct the patient to lift their foot off the floor by flexing at their hip. Progressions and variations More advanced: 1. Upgrade the colour of the theraband.Exercise booklet for { }142 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Hip flexor strengthening in sidelying using a slideboard and theraband Therapist's aim To strengthen the hip flexors. Progressions and variations Perform __ sets of __ reps. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the front of your hip. Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your side with your leg resting out straight on a slideboard. Finish with your knee bent and foot off the floor. 2. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Use talcum powder on the sessions per week.

More advanced: 1. Ensure that you don`t knock the ball. Strap a weight to the knee. Instruct the patient to lift their leg up by flexing at their hip. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the front of your hip. Perform __ sets of __ reps. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with a ball placed in front of their foot. Ensure that the ball is not knocked. Do__ sessions per week. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Practice lifting your leg up by bending at your hip. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with a ball placed in front of your foot.Exercise booklet for { }143 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Hip flexor strengthening in sitting using a ball as a cue Therapist's aim To strengthen the hip flexors. Perform the task without using the cue.

Exercise booklet for {

}144

Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi {

}

Hip flexor strengthening in sitting using scales
Therapist's aim To strengthen the hip flexors. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the front of your hip. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with their foot on a set of scales. Instruct the patient to lift up their foot to decrease the amount of weight shown on the scales. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with your foot on a set of scales. Practice lifting up your foot to decrease the amount of weight shown on the scales. Progressions and variations More advanced: 1. Lift the foot entirely up off the scales. 2. Progress using strength training principles. Perform __ sets of __ reps. Do__ sessions per week. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right

Exercise booklet for {

}145

Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi {

}

Hip flexor strengthening in sitting using weights
Therapist's aim To strengthen the hip flexors. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the front of your hip. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with their feet flat on the floor and a weight around their ankle. Instruct the patient to lift their foot off the floor by flexing at their hip. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with both feet on the floor and a weight around your ankle. Start with your knee bent and foot on the floor. Finish with your knee bent and foot off the floor. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Perform the task using a cue to limit knee extension. More advanced: 1. Progress using strength training principles. Perform __ sets of __ reps. Do__ sessions per week. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right

Exercise booklet for {

}146

Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi {

}

Hip flexor strengthening in standing using pulleys
Therapist's aim To strengthen the hip flexors. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the front of your hip. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing facing away from the pulleys. Adjust the pulley system so that the direction of pull opposes hip flexion. Instruct the patient to flex their hip. Client's instructions Position yourself standing facing away from the pulley. Adjust the pulley so that the direction of pull is upwards from the floor. Start with your hip straight. Finish with your hip bent. Progressions and variations More advanced: 1. Progress using strength training principles. Perform __ sets of __ reps. Do__ sessions per week. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right

Exercise booklet for {

}147

Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi {

}

Hip flexor strengthening in standing using theraband
Therapist's aim To strengthen the hip flexors. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the front of your hip. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with their hip and knee extended. Adjust the theraband so the direction of pull opposes hip flexion. Instruct the patient to flex their hip. Client's instructions Position yourself standing facing away from the theraband. Adjust the theraband so the direction of pull is upwards from the floor. Start with your hip straight. Finish with your hip bent. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Downgrade the colour of the theraband. More advanced: 1. Upgrade the Perform __ sets of __ reps. Do__ colour of the theraband. sessions per week. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right

Exercise booklet for {

}148

Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi {

}

Hip flexor strengthening in standing using weights
Therapist's aim To strengthen the hip flexors. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the front of your hip. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with a weight around their ankle. Instruct the patient to flex their hip. Client's instructions Position yourself standing with a weight around your ankle. Start with your hip straight. Finish with your hip bent. Progressions and variations More advanced: 1. Progress using strength training principles. Perform __ sets of __ reps. Do__ sessions per week. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right

Exercise booklet for {

}149

Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi {

}

Hip flexor strengthening in standing without weights
Therapist's aim To strengthen the hip flexors. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the front of your hip. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing. Instruct the patient to flex their hip. Client's instructions Position yourself standing with your feet together. Start with your hip straight. Finish with your hip bent. Progressions and variations More advanced: 1. Progress using strength training principles.

Perform __ sets of __ reps. Do__ sessions per week. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right

Exercise booklet for {

}150

Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi {

}

Hip flexor strengthening in supine
Therapist's aim To strengthen the hip flexors. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the front of your hip. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in supine. Instruct the patient to flex their hip and slide their foot towards their bottom. Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your back. Start with your knee straight. Finish with your knee bent. Ensure that you slide your foot along the bed. Progressions and variations More advanced: 1. Progress using strength training principles. Perform __ sets of __ reps. Do__ sessions per week. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right

Exercise booklet for {

}151

Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi {

}

Hip flexor strengthening in supine
Therapist's aim To strengthen the hip flexors. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the front of your hip. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in supine. Instruct the patient to flex their hip. Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your back. Start with your hip straight. Finish with your hip bent. Progressions and variations More advanced: 1. Progress using strength training principles.

Perform __ sets of __ reps. Do__ sessions per week. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right

Exercise booklet for {

}152

Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi {

}

Hip flexor strengthening in supine using pulleys
Therapist's aim To strengthen the hip flexors. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the front of your hip. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in supine facing away from the pulleys. Adjust the pulley system so that the direction of pull opposes hip flexion. Instruct the patient to flex their hip. Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your back with the pulley attached to your ankle. Start with your hip straight. Finish with your hip bent. Progressions and variations More advanced: 1. Progress using strength training principles. Perform __ sets of __ reps. Do__ sessions per week. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right

Exercise booklet for {

}153

Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi {

}

Hip flexor strengthening in supine using theraband
Therapist's aim To strengthen the hip flexors. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the front of your hip. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in supine with their hip and knee extended. Adjust the theraband so the direction of pull opposes hip flexion. Instruct the patient to flex their hip. Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your back with the theraband attached to your ankle. Start with your hip straight. Finish with your hip bent. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Downgrade the colour of the theraband. More advanced: 1. Upgrade the colour of the theraband. Perform __ sets of __ reps. Do__ sessions per week. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right

Exercise booklet for {

}154

Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi {

}

Hip flexor strengthening in supine using weights
Therapist's aim To strengthen the hip flexors. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the front of your hip. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in supine with a weight on their ankle. Instruct the patient to flex their hip. Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your back with a weight around your ankle. Start with your hip straight. Finish with your hip bent. Progressions and variations More advanced: 1. Progress using strength training principles. Perform __ sets of __ reps. Do__ sessions per week. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right

Precautions 1. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . More advanced: 1. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in half-kneeling with one knee bent in front of them. 2. keeping the trunk and head upright. Instruct the patient to lean forwards at the hips. Impaired or absent sensation of stretch. Client's aim To stretch or maintain range in your hips. Increase forwards lean at the hips. Client's instructions Position yourself kneeling on one knee with your other knee bent in front of you. Provide hand support for balance. Lean forwards at your hips. Decrease forwards lean at the hips. Hold for __ minutes. keeping your trunk and head upright. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1.Exercise booklet for { }155 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Hip flexor stretch in half-kneeling Therapist's aim To stretch or maintain length of the hip flexors.

Decrease the number of pillows under the chest and knees.Exercise booklet for { }156 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Hip flexor stretch in prone Therapist's aim To stretch or maintain length of the hip flexors. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . More advanced: 1. Hold for __ minutes. Impaired or absent sensation of stretch. Increase the number of pillows under the chest and knees. Precautions 1. Client's aim To stretch or maintain range in your hips. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in prone on a plinth with pillows under their chest and knees. Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your stomach with pillows under your chest and knees.

More advanced: 1. Place elbows up on small stools. Precautions 1. Place pillows under chest. Client's aim To stretch or maintain range in your hips and trunk. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in prone with their upper-body supported through their elbows. 2. Hold for __ minutes.Exercise booklet for { }157 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Hip flexor stretch in prone through lifting up onto elbows Therapist's aim To stretch or maintain length of the hip flexors and anterior trunk. 3. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your stomach with your upper-body supported through your elbows. Position the patient in prone only. Use overhead slings to support upper trunk weight. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Transfer weight onto one elbow and lift other arm off the bed. 2. Impaired or absent sensation of stretch.

Position the upright knee further away from the chest.Exercise booklet for { }158 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Hip flexor stretch in supine Therapist's aim To stretch or maintain length of the hip flexors. Place a belt over the pelvis to stabilise it and a weight on the over-hanging knee. Position the upright knee closer to the chest. Decrease the weight on the over-hanging knee. Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your back with one knee bent up and your other knee hanging over the edge of a bed. Impaired or absent sensation of stretch. Less advanced: 1. Increase the height of the bed to raise the heel of the over-hanging leg off the floor. Place a belt over your pelvis to stabilise it and a weight on your over-hanging knee. Progressions and variations Hold for __ minutes. 2. Precautions 1. 2. 3. Client's aim To stretch or maintain range in your hip. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Increase the weight on the overhanging knee. More advanced: 1. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in supine with one knee bent up and the other knee hanging over the edge of a bed.

2. Client's aim To stretch or maintain range in your hip. Impaired or absent sensation of stretch. Hold for __ minutes. Position leg on a stool rather than on the chest. Place a weight on the opposite knee. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in supine with one knee on their chest. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Precautions 1. Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your back with one knee on your chest.Exercise booklet for { }159 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Hip flexor stretch in supine by holding onto knee Therapist's aim To stretch or maintain length of the hip flexors. Position knee further away from chest. More advanced: 1. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1.

Increase the height of the stool. Client's aim To stretch or maintain range in your hip. Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your back with your legs hanging over the edge of the bed. Place one leg on a stool to stabilise the pelvis. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Place one leg on a stool so that your hip is flexed. More advanced: 1. Impaired or absent sensation of stretch. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in supine with their legs hanging over the edge of the bed. Decrease the height of the stool. Hold for __ minutes.Exercise booklet for { }160 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Hip flexor stretch in supine over edge of plinth Therapist's aim To stretch or maintain length of the hip flexors. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Precautions 1.

Ensure that only the hip rotates. Practice moving your ankle from side to side to touch some targets by rotating your hip. Ensure that your thigh remains vertical. Client's aim To strengthen your hip muscles. Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your back with your hip and knee bent and some slings under your knee and foot. Increase the distance to the targets. More advanced: 1. Instruct the patient to move their ankle from side to side and touch the targets by rotating at their hip. Place two targets on either side of their ankles. Do__ Progressions and variations sessions per week. Less advanced: 1.Exercise booklet for { }161 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Hip internal rotator strengthening in lying using slings Therapist's aim To strengthen the hip internal rotators. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Therapist's instructions Position the patient in supine with their hip and knee flexed and some slings under their knee and foot. Perform __ sets of __ reps. Decrease the distance to the targets.

Progress using strength training principles. Finish with your feet apart by rotating at your hip. Progressions and variations Perform __ sets of __ reps. Client's aim To strengthen your hip muscles. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . sessions per week. Start with your feet together. Do__ More advanced: 1.Exercise booklet for { }162 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Hip internal rotator strengthening in sitting using pulleys Therapist's aim To strengthen the hip internal rotators. Adjust the pulley system so that the direction of pull opposes hip internal rotation. Instruct the patient to internally rotate their hip. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting perpendicular to the pulleys. Adjust the pulley system so that the direction of pull is sideways away from your opposite leg. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with your legs over the side of a bed.

colour of the theraband. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Upgrade the Perform __ sets of __ reps. Client's aim To strengthen your hip muscles. More advanced: 1. Adjust the theraband so that the line of pull is sideways away from your opposite leg. Finish with your feet apart by rotating your hip. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with your legs over the side of a bed. Downgrade the colour of the theraband.Exercise booklet for { }163 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Hip internal rotator strengthening in sitting using theraband Therapist's aim To strengthen the hip internal rotators. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Adjust the theraband so that the direction of pull opposes hip internal rotation. Therapist's instructions Place the patient in sitting with their legs over side of a bed. Instruct the patient to internally rotate their hip. Do__ sessions per week. Start with your feet together.

Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with your legs over the side of a bed and a weight around your ankle. Instruct the patient to internally rotate their hip. Client's aim To strengthen your hip muscles. Progress using strength training principles. Progressions and variations More advanced: 1. Do__ sessions per week. Finish with your feet apart by rotating your hip.Exercise booklet for { }164 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Hip internal rotator strengthening in sitting using weights Therapist's aim To strengthen the hip internal rotators. Perform __ sets of __ reps. Start with your feet together. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with their legs over the side of a bed and a weight around their ankle. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right .

Start with your feet together. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Perform __ sets of __ reps. Progress using strength training principles. Progressions and variations More advanced: 1. Do__ sessions per week. Client's aim To strengthen your hip muscles. Instruct the patient to internally rotate their hip. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with your legs over the side of a bed.Exercise booklet for { }165 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Hip internal rotator strengthening in sitting without weights Therapist's aim To strengthen the hip internal rotators. Finish with your foot out to the side by rotating your hip. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with legs over the side of a bed.

Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Start with your knees and ankles together and a target on one side. Use a slide sheet under the leg. Ensure that your knees remain together and only your Perform __ sets of __ reps. Client's aim To strengthen your hip muscles. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Instruct the patient to slide their closer ankle outwards to touch the target by rotating their hip.Exercise booklet for { }166 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Hip internal rotator strengthening in supine using a stool Therapist's aim To strengthen the hip internal rotators. 2. sessions per week. Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your back with your hips bent and your lower legs resting on a stool. Decrease the distance to the target. More advanced: Increase the distance to the target. Position their knees and ankles together and a target on one side. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in supine with their hips flexed and lower legs resting on a stool. Finish with your closer ankle touching the target. Do__ closer leg moves. Ensure that the knees remain together and only the closer leg moves.

Place your foot on your opposite leg. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in long sitting with their knee in flexion and hip in external rotation. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Place their foot on their opposite leg.Exercise booklet for { }167 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Hip internal rotator stretch in long sitting Therapist's aim To stretch or maintain length of the hip internal rotators. Impaired or absent sensation of stretch. Client's aim To stretch or maintain range in your hip. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with one leg out straight in front of you and your other knee bent so that it points out to the side. Precautions 1. Hold for __ minutes.

Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with one leg on your opposite knee. Place a weight on the knee. Place leg on stool rather than knee. Impaired or absent sensation of stretch. Precautions 1. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with one leg on their opposite knee. 2.Exercise booklet for { }168 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Hip internal rotator stretch in sitting Therapist's aim To stretch or maintain length of the hip internal rotators. More advanced: 1. Ensure that the chair does not tip backwards. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Hold for __ minutes. Client's aim To stretch or maintain range in your hip.

Exercise booklet for { }169 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Hopping forwards over lines Therapist's aim To improve the ability to run or hop. Decrease the distance between the lines. Hop on the spot. 2. Client's instructions Position yourself standing on one leg with horizontal lines placed evenly on the floor in front of you. Practice hopping forwards over the lines. 2. More advanced: 1. Increase the distance between the lines. Client's aim To improve your ability to run or hop. Ensure that your knee bends when landing and your other leg does not touch the ground. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing on one leg with horizontal lines placed evenly on the floor in front of them. Increase speed of task. Progressions and variations Repeat __ times. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Instruct the patient to hop forwards over the lines. Less advanced: 1. Ensure that their knee flexes when landing.

3. Alter the target pattern of hopping. Practice hopping from one target to another while facing in the same direction. Hop sideways and backwards. 2. run and jump. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Hop in one direction only. Client's aim To improve your ability to hop. More advanced: 1. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with some targets placed on the floor in front of them. 3. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Client's instructions Position yourself standing with some targets placed on the floor in front of you.Exercise booklet for { }170 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Hopping in different directions Therapist's aim To improve the ability to hop. Decrease the distance Repeat __ times. Hop on the spot. Increase the distance between the targets. Instruct the patient to hop from one target to another while facing in the same direction. 2. Ensure that your knee bends when landing. Ensure that their knee flexes when landing. run and jump. between the targets.

More advanced: 1. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing on one leg. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Add a concurrent task. Ensure that their trunk is erect and their knee is slightly bent on impact. Hop in different directions. Instruct the patient to hop up and down on the spot. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . 2. Jump on the spot. Practice hopping up and down on the spot. Client's instructions Position yourself standing on one leg. Client's aim To improve your ability to run or jump. Ensure that your shoulders remain over your hips and your knee is slightly bent on impact.Exercise booklet for { }171 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Hopping on the spot Therapist's aim To improve the ability to run or jump. Repeat __ times.

Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with their fingers placed over their larynx (Adam`s apple). Progressions and variations More advanced: 1. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Instruct the patient to swallow again while feeling the larynx elevate and attempt to maintain the elevated position by tensing the muscles of their neck and squeezing with their tongue.Exercise booklet for { }172 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Hyolaryngeal excursion (Mendelsohn manoeuvre) Therapist's aim To improve the ability to protect the airway when swallowing through increasing hyolaryngeal excursion. Sustain the position for increasing periods of time. the muscles of your neck and squeezing with your tongue. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with your fingers placed over your Adam`s apple. Repeat __ times. Practice swallowing again while feeling your Adam`s apple elevate and attempt to maintain the elevated position by tensing Hold for __ seconds. Client's aim To improve your ability to swallow and maintain an oral diet. Instruct the patient to swallow while feeling their larynx elevate. Practice swallowing while feeling your Adam`s apple elevate.

Ensure that your knees remain bent. Instruct the patient to lift their top ankle upwards while keeping their knees together. Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your side with your hips and knees bent. Progress using strength training principles. Progressions and variations More advanced: 1. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Practice lifting your top ankle upwards while keeping your knees together. Perform __ sets of __ reps. Do__ sessions per week. Ensure that the knees remain flexed.Exercise booklet for { }173 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Internal hip rotator strengthening in sidelying without weights Therapist's aim To strengthen the hip internal rotators. Client's aim To strengthen your hip muscles. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sidelying with their hips and knees flexed.

Increase knee height. 2. More advanced: 1. Decrease knee height. Decrease speed of task.Exercise booklet for { }174 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Jogging on a mini-trampoline Therapist's aim To improve the ability to run. Instruct the patient to jog on the spot. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Increase speed of task. Client's aim To improve your ability to run. Client's instructions Position yourself standing on a mini-trampoline. Ensure that your knees are lifted up to the same height and your arms swing (like when running). Practice jogging on the spot. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing on a mini-trampoline. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Ensure that both hips are flexed equally and reciprocal arm swing is achieved. 2. Repeat __ times.

6. 5. 4. Hop on one leg. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with some hoops on the floor in front of them. Instruct the patient to jump from one hoop to another sequentially. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . 2. Jump on the spot in one hoop. Add a concurrent task. More advanced: 1. Client's instructions Position yourself standing with some hoops on the floor in front of you. Client's aim To improve your ability to run and jump. Hop between the hoops. 3. Progressions and variations Repeat __ times. Less advanced: 1. Jump facing one direction. Practice jumping from one hoop to another. Ensure that both feet leave and land on the floor at the same time. Increase speed of task. Increase number of hoops.Exercise booklet for { }175 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Jumping between hoops with feet together Therapist's aim To improve the ability to run and jump. Ensure that both feet leave and land on the floor at the same time.

2. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Instruct the patient to jump forwards over the lines. Increase the distance between the lines.Exercise booklet for { }176 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Jumping forwards over lines Therapist's aim To improve the ability to jump forwards. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with their feet shoulder width apart and horizontal lines placed evenly on the floor in front of them. 2. Client's instructions Position yourself standing with your feet shoulder width apart and horizontal lines placed evenly on the floor in front of you. Decrease the distance between the lines. Less advanced: 1. Increase speed of task. Jump on the spot. Progressions and variations Repeat __ times. Ensure that their knees flex when landing. Ensure that your knees bend when landing. Client's aim To improve your ability to jump forwards. Practice jumping forwards over the lines. More advanced: 1.

Exercise booklet for { }177 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Jumping from side to side Therapist's aim To improve the ability to jump sideways. Increase height of jump. Ensure that their knees flex when landing. Increase speed of task. 3. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Repeat __ times. Jump on the spot. Jump further. Decrease speed of task. Practice jumping sideways over the line and back again. 2. 2. Fri Right . Client's aim To improve your ability to jump sideways. Instruct the patient to jump sideways over the line and then jump back again. More advanced: 1. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing next to a line on the floor. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Client's instructions Position yourself standing next to a line on the floor. Ensure that your knees bend when landing.

Ensure that their feet do not touch the lines and both feet leave and land on the floor at the same time. 2.Exercise booklet for { }178 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Jumping in different directions Therapist's aim To improve the ability to run or jump. Less advanced: 1. More advanced: 1. Hop on one leg. Jump sideways only. Practice jumping from one quarter to another sequentially. 2. Instruct the patient to jump from one quarter to another sequentially. Add a concurrent task. Ensure that your feet do not touch the lines and both feet leave and land on the floor at the same time. Client's aim To improve your ability to run or jump. Progressions and variations Repeat __ times. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing next to a cross on the floor. Client's instructions Position yourself standing next to a cross on the floor. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Jump forwards or backwards only.

Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Practice jumping off the block onto the floor. More advanced: 1. Increase the distance of the jump. Take off and land with one leg leading. 2. Instruct the patient to jump off the block onto the floor. Ensure that both knees flex during landing. Progressions and variations Repeat __ times. Decrease the height of the block. Increase the height of the block. taking off and landing with the feet together. Client's aim To improve your ability to jump. Ensure that your feet land on the floor at the same time and both knees flex during landing. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with their feet together on a block or step. 2. Client's instructions Position yourself standing with your feet together on a block or step.Exercise booklet for { }179 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Jumping off a low object Therapist's aim To improve the ability to jump. Less advanced: 1.

Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Leap off the minitrampoline. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing on a mini-trampoline with their feet together. More advanced: 1.Exercise booklet for { }180 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Jumping off a mini-trampoline Therapist's aim To improve the ability to run or jump. Ensure that both feet land on the floor at the same time and both knees are slightly bent on impact. Ensure that both of your feet land on the floor at the same time and both knees are slightly bent on impact. Practice jumping off the mini-trampoline onto the floor. Progressions and variations Repeat __ times. Client's aim To improve your ability to run or jump. Jump up and down on the floor. Less advanced: 1. Instruct the patient to jump off the mini-trampoline onto the floor. Client's instructions Position yourself standing on a mini-trampoline with your feet together.

Jump on the spot on the floor. Ensure that both feet leave and return to the minitrampoline at the same time.Exercise booklet for { }181 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Jumping on a mini-trampoline Therapist's aim To improve the ability to run or jump. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Ensure that both feet leave and return to the mini-trampoline at the same time. Practice jumping up and down on the mini-trampoline. More advanced: 1. Jump from the minitrampoline onto the floor. Client's aim To improve your ability to run or jump. Progressions and variations Repeat __ times. Hop on the mini-trampoline. Client's instructions Position yourself standing on a mini-trampoline with your feet together. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing on a mini-trampoline with their feet together. 2. Instruct the patient to jump up and down on the mini-trampoline. Less advanced: 1.

Client's aim To improve your ability to run or jump. Less advanced: 1. 2. Instruct the patient to jump up and down on the spot. Position a soft object above the head to set the target height. Ensure that both feet leave and land on the floor at the same time and the knees flex during landing. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with their feet shoulder width apart. Increase jump height. Provide hand support for balance. More advanced: 1. Practice jumping up and down on the spot. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 .Exercise booklet for { }182 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Jumping on the spot Therapist's aim To improve the ability to run or jump. Progressions and variations Repeat __ times. Ensure that both feet leave and land on the floor at the same time and your knees bend during landing. Client's instructions Position yourself standing with your feet shoulder width apart.

Kick a heavier ball. Therapist's instructions Position the patient standing with a ball placed on the floor in front of them. Client's aim To improve your ability to move your leg in different directions when standing. Kick a light-weight ball. Instruct the patient to step forwards and kick the ball with their affected leg. 3.Exercise booklet for { }183 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Kicking a ball Therapist's aim To improve the ability to move the leg in different directions when standing. Kick the ball a longer distance. More advanced: 1. Provide hand support for balance. Practice stepping forwards to kick the ball with your affected leg. Fri Right . 2. 2. Kick the ball a shorter distance. Client's instructions Position yourself standing with a ball placed on the floor in front of you. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Repeat __ times.

Client's instructions Position yourself standing with your back against a wall and your unaffected foot on a stool in front of you. Practice bending and Repeat __ times. More advanced: 1. 2. Client's aim To improve the ability to stand or walk. Ensure that most of the weight is borne through the affected leg. Ensure that most of your weight is borne through your affected leg. Provide hand support for balance. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Place the supporting stool further away. Instruct the patient to flex and extend their affected knee to touch the stool. Place another stool in front of their affected knee. the affected knee does not hyper-extend and the feet point forwards. Place another stool in front of your affected knee. Place the supporting stool closer. Place the stool further away from the knee. straightening your affected knee to touch the stool. Place the stool closer to the knee. 3.Exercise booklet for { }184 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Knee control in standing Therapist's aim To improve the ability to stand or walk. . 2. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with their back against a wall and their unaffected foot on a stool in front of them. your affected knee does not lock back past straight and both your feet point forwards. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1.

Use a softer piece of foam. Client's aim To improve your ability to stand or walk. 2. Use a denser piece of foam. Progressions and variations Repeat __ times. More advanced: 1. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Practice straightening your knee to squash the foam against the bed.Exercise booklet for { }185 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Knee extension in standing Therapist's aim To improve the ability to stand or walk. Client's instructions Position yourself standing in front of a bed with your knee slightly bent and a piece of foam placed between your knee and the bed. Instruct the patient to straighten their knee to squash the foam against the plinth. Less advanced: 1. Provide hand support for balance. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing in front of a plinth with their knee slightly bent and a piece of foam placed between their knee and the plinth.

Ensure that the hip remains still. More advanced: 1. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sidelying with one sling attached from their ankle to a point over their knee and one sling from mid thigh attached vertically above. Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your side with one sling attached from your ankle to a point over your knee and one sling from your thigh attached vertically above. Instruct the patient to flex and extend their knee to touch the targets with their ankle.Exercise booklet for { }186 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Knee extensor and flexor strengthening in sidelying using slings and targets Therapist's aim To strengthen the knee extensors and flexors. sessions per week. Ensure that your hip remains still. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the front and back of your knee. Place two targets on either side of your ankle. Do__ your ankle. Decrease the distance to the targets. Place two targets on either side of their ankle which require a small movement in mid range. Increase the distance to the targets. Practice bending and straightening your knee to touch targets with Perform __ sets of __ reps. 2. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Progress using strength training principles.

Precautions 1.Exercise booklet for { }187 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Knee extensor electrical stimulation Therapist's aim To strengthen the knee extensors. Therapist's instructions Place the electrodes over the muscle belly of the knee extensors. Client's instructions Place the two electrodes over the muscle belly as shown. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the front of your thigh. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Perform __ sets of __ reps. Do__ sessions per week. Perform skin tests.

Practice straightening your knee. Adjust the theraband so that the direction of pull is from above your knee. Adjust the theraband so that the direction of pull opposes knee extension. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1.Exercise booklet for { }188 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Knee extensor strengthening at end of range using theraband Therapist's aim To strengthen the knee extensors. More advanced: 1. Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your back with some theraband under your knee. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the front of your thigh. Upgrade the Perform __ sets of __ reps. colour of the theraband. Do__ sessions per week. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in supine with some theraband under their knee. Downgrade the colour of the theraband. Instruct the patient to extend their knee.

Practice pushing down with your knee until the monitor pressure reaches the target pressure. Increase the target pressure on the monitor. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in supine or long sitting with a blood pressure cuff underneath their knee. 2. Do__ Less advanced: 1. Lift the heel up off the bed when performing sessions per week. Progressions and variations Perform __ sets of __ reps. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Instruct the patient to extend their knee until the monitor pressure reaches the target pressure. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the front of your thigh. Decrease the target pressure on the monitor. More advanced: 1.Exercise booklet for { }189 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Knee extensor strengthening in long sitting using biofeedback Therapist's aim To strengthen the knee extensors. the exercise. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with your legs out straight in front of you and a blood pressure cuff underneath your knee.

Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the front of your thigh. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with some theraband attached to your ankle. Start with your knee bent. Instruct the patient to extend their knee. Adjust the theraband so that the direction of pull is from behind you. colour of the theraband. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1.Exercise booklet for { }190 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Knee extensor strengthening in sitting using theraband Therapist's aim To strengthen the knee extensors. Do__ sessions per week. Finish with your knee straight. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with some theraband attached to their ankle. Adjust the theraband so that the line of pull opposes knee extension. Upgrade the Perform __ sets of __ reps. Downgrade the colour of the theraband. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . More advanced: 1.

Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Do__ sessions per week. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the front of your thigh. Progress using strength training principles. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with their legs over the side of a bed and a weight around their ankle. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with your legs over the side of a bed and a weight around your ankle. Perform __ sets of __ reps. Start with your knee bent. Instruct the patient to extend their knee.Exercise booklet for { }191 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Knee extensor strengthening in sitting using weights Therapist's aim To strengthen the knee extensors. Progressions and variations More advanced: 1. Finish with your knee straight.

Exercise booklet for { }192 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Knee extensor strengthening in sitting without weights Therapist's aim To strengthen the knee extensors. Instruct the patient to extend their knee. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the front of your thigh. Do__ sessions per week. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with your legs over the side of a bed or chair. Progressions and variations More advanced : 1. Perform __ sets of __ reps. Place a sandbag weight around the ankle. 2. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Finish with your knee straight. Start with your knee bent. Progress using strength training principles. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with their legs over the side of a bed or chair.

Finish with your knee straight. Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your back with a rolled up towel under your knee and a weight around your ankle. Do__ sessions per week.Exercise booklet for { }193 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Knee extensor strengthening in supine using weights Therapist's aim To strengthen the knee extensors. Instruct the patient to extend their knee. Progress using strength training principles. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Progressions and variations More advanced: 1. Start with your knee bent. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the front of your thigh. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in supine or long-sitting with a rolled up towel under their knee and a weight around their ankle. Perform __ sets of __ reps.

Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your back with a rolled towel under your knee. Start with your knee bent.Exercise booklet for { }194 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Knee extensor strengthening in supine without weights Therapist's aim To strengthen the knee extensors. Progressions and variations More advanced: 1. Progress using strength training principles. Do__ sessions per week. Finish with your knee straight. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the front of your thigh. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Perform __ sets of __ reps. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in supine or long sitting with a rolled towel under their knee. Instruct the patient to extend their knee.

More advanced: 1. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the back and front of your thigh. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Perform __ sets of __ reps. Decrease the spacing of the markers. Do__ sessions per week. Increase the spacing of the markers. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Instruct the patient to flex and extend their knee to move the skateboard along the floor to touch the markers. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with a skateboard under their foot and some markers on the floor.Exercise booklet for { }195 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Knee flexor and extensor strengthening in sitting using a skateboard Therapist's aim To strengthen the knee flexors and extensors. Practice bending and straightening your knee to slide the skateboard along the floor to touch the markers. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with a skateboard under your foot and some markers on the floor. Fri Right .

Precautions 1. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Perform __ sets of __ reps.Exercise booklet for { }196 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Knee flexor electrical stimulation Therapist's aim To strengthen the knee flexors. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the back of your thigh. Client's instructions Place the two electrodes over the muscle belly as shown. Perform skin tests. Therapist's instructions Place the electrodes over the muscle belly of the knee flexors. Do__ sessions per week.

Start with your knee straight and leg resting on the bed. Adjust the pulley system so that the direction of pull opposes knee flexion.Exercise booklet for { }197 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Knee flexor strengthening in prone using pulleys Therapist's aim To strengthen the knee flexors. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the back of your thigh. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Progressions and variations More advanced: 1. Instruct the patient to flex their knee. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in prone facing away from the pulleys. Do__ sessions per week. Progress using strength training principles. Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your stomach. Adjust the pulley system so that the direction of pull is towards the top of the bed. Finish with your knee bent. Perform __ sets of __ reps.

Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your stomach. sessions per week.Exercise booklet for { }198 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Knee flexor strengthening in prone using theraband Therapist's aim To strengthen the knee flexors. Do__ colour of the theraband. Upgrade the Perform __ sets of __ reps. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the back of your thigh. Start with your knee straight and leg resting on the bed. Finish with your knee bent. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in prone with their knee extended. Instruct the patient to flex their knee. Downgrade the colour of the theraband. Adjust the theraband so that the direction of pull opposes knee flexion. Adjust the theraband so that the direction of pull is towards the top of the bed. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. More advanced: 1.

Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the back of your thigh. Do__ sessions per week. Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your stomach with a weight around your ankle. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in prone with their hip and knee extended and a weight around their ankle. Start with your knee straight. Progress using strength training principles. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Perform __ sets of __ reps. Finish with your knee bent. Progressions and variations More advanced: 1. Instruct the patient to flex their knee.Exercise booklet for { }199 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Knee flexor strengthening in prone using weights Therapist's aim To strengthen the knee flexors.

Ensure that you bend your knee a small amount only. Finish with your knee bent. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Instruct the patient to flex their knee 30 degrees. Do__ sessions per week.Exercise booklet for { }200 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Knee flexor strengthening in prone using weights Therapist's aim To strengthen the knee flexors. Progressions and variations More advanced: 1. Perform __ sets of __ reps. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in prone with their hip and knee extended and a weight around their ankle. Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your stomach with a weight around your ankle. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the back of your thigh. Progress using strength training principles. Start with your knee straight.

Start with your knee straight. Instruct the patient to flex their knee. Perform __ sets of __ reps. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in prone. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the back of your thigh. Finish with your knee bent.Exercise booklet for { }201 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Knee flexor strengthening in prone without weights Therapist's aim To strengthen the knee flexors. Do__ sessions per week. Progress using strength training principles. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your stomach. Progressions and variations More advanced: 1.

Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your stomach.Exercise booklet for { }202 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Knee flexor strengthening in prone without weights Therapist's aim To strengthen the knee flexors. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the back of your thigh. Progress using strength training principles. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in prone. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Instruct the patient to flex their knee. Progressions and variations More advanced: 1. Finish with your knee bent. Perform __ sets of __ reps. Start with your knee straight. Do__ sessions per week.

Place a shoe on the foot. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the back of your thigh. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with your feet on the floor. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right .Exercise booklet for { }203 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Knee flexor strengthening in sitting using slidesheet Therapist's aim To strengthen the knee flexors. More advanced: 1. Start with your foot in front of your knee. Perform __ sets of __ reps. Do__ sessions per week. Instruct the patient to flex and extend their knee while keeping their foot on the floor. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting. Finish with your foot behind your knee. Place a towel or slidesheet under the foot. Ensure that you keep your foot on the floor. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1.

Upgrade the Perform __ sets of __ reps. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with their knee extended and some theraband attached to their ankle. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Adjust the theraband so that the direction of pull is from in front of you. colour of the theraband.Exercise booklet for { }204 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Knee flexor strengthening in sitting using theraband Therapist's aim To strengthen the knee flexors. Start with your knee as straight as possible. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the back of your thigh. Adjust the theraband so that the direction of pull opposes knee flexion. Do__ sessions per week. Finish with your knee bent. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with some theraband attached to your ankle. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Instruct the patient to flex their knee. Downgrade the colour of the theraband. More advanced: 1.

Start with your knee straight. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing facing the pulleys. Adjust the pulley system so that the direction of pull opposes knee flexion. Do__ sessions per week. Ensure that you keep your hip straight.Exercise booklet for { }205 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Knee flexor strengthening in standing using pulleys Therapist's aim To strengthen the knee flexors. Perform __ sets of __ reps. Finish with your knee bent. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the back of your thigh. Fri Right Left Right Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu . Instruct the patient to flex their knee while keeping their hip extended. Client's instructions Position yourself standing with one foot behind the other and a pulley attached to your ankle. Progress using strength training principles. Progressions and variations More advanced: 1.

More advanced: 1. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with their knee extended. Do__ sessions per week.Exercise booklet for { }206 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Knee flexor strengthening in standing using theraband Therapist's aim To strengthen the knee flexors. colour of the theraband. Ensure that you keep your hip straight. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the back of your thigh. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Upgrade the Perform __ sets of __ reps. Adjust the theraband so that the direction of pull opposes knee flexion. Finish with your knee bent. Downgrade the colour of the theraband. Client's instructions Position yourself standing facing the theraband with the theraband attached to your ankle. Instruct the patient to flex their knee while maintaining hip extension. Start with your knee straight.

Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with a weight around their ankle. Perform __ sets of __ reps. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the back of your thigh. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Progress using strength training principles. Client's instructions Position yourself standing with your feet together and a weight around your ankle. Do__ sessions per week. Progressions and variations More advanced: 1. Instruct the patient to flex their knee while keeping their hip extended. Ensure that you keep your hip straight.Exercise booklet for { }207 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Knee flexor strengthening in standing using weights Therapist's aim To strengthen the knee flexors. Start with your knee straight. Finish with your knee bent.

Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the back of your thigh. More advanced: 1. Remove the Repeat __ times. Place your foot on a skateboard. 2. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Instruct the patient to flex and extend their knee to move the skateboard backwards and forwards. Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your back with one leg over the side of the bed. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in supine with one leg over the side of the bed and their knee bent.Exercise booklet for { }208 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Knee flexor strengthening in supine using skateboard Therapist's aim To strengthen the knee flexors. Practice bending and straightening your knee to move the skateboard backwards and forwards. Place their foot on a skateboard. skateboard to increase resistance. Place targets on the floor for feedback. Progress using strength training principles.

Start with your knee straight. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the back of your thigh. Instruct the patient to flex their knee while keeping their hip extended. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with their hands resting on a table in front of them. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Progressions and variations More advanced: 1. Progress using strength training principles.Exercise booklet for { }209 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Knee flexor strengthening in supported standing without weights Therapist's aim To strengthen the knee flexors. Finish with your knee bent. Do__ sessions per week. Ensure that your hip is kept straight. Client's instructions Position yourself standing with your hands resting on a table in front of you. Perform __ sets of __ reps.

Finish with your knee bent. Progressions and variations More advanced: 1.Exercise booklet for { }210 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Knee flexor strengthening in unsupported standing without weights Therapist's aim To strengthen the knee flexors. Ensure that your hip is kept straight. Instruct the patient to flex their knee while keeping their hip extended. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the back of your thigh. Client's instructions Position yourself standing with your feet together. Do__ sessions per week. Start with your knee straight. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing. Perform __ sets of __ reps. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Progress using strength training principles.

Perform __ sets of __ reps. Adjust the theraband so that the direction of pull opposes knee flexion. colour of the theraband. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the back of your thigh. Do__ Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in supine with their knee hanging over the edge of a bed and their other leg resting on a stool. Start with your knee as straight as possible. Downgrade the colour of the theraband.Exercise booklet for { }211 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Knee flexor strengthening over the edge of a bed using theraband Therapist's aim To strengthen the knee flexors. More advanced: 1. Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your back with your knee hanging over the edge of a bed and your other leg on a stool. Upgrade the sessions per week. Finish with your knee bent under the bed. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Instruct the patient to flex their knee. Attach some theraband to your ankle and adjust the theraband so that the direction of pull is from in front of you.

Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your side with pillows and a slideboard supporting your leg. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the back and front of your thigh. Progress using strength training principles. More advanced: 1. 2. Instruct the patient to flex and extend their knee. Perform __ sets of __ reps.Exercise booklet for { }212 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Knee flexor/extensor strengthening in sidelying using slideboard Therapist's aim To strengthen the knee flexors and extensors. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sidelying with pillows and a slideboard supporting their leg. Bend and straighten your knee. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Use talcum powder on the slideboard to reduce friction. Place a slidesheet on the slideboard. Do__ sessions per week.

More advanced: 1. Ensure that your hips remain straight and the movement is performed slowly and smoothly. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 .Exercise booklet for { }213 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Leaning forwards on a large ball in kneeling Therapist's aim To strengthen the shoulder and trunk muscles. 2. Decrease the distance the ball is rolled. Instruct the patient to roll the ball forwards while leaning and weight-bearing on the ball. Practice rolling the ball forwards while leaning and weight-bearing on the ball. Ensure that their hips remain extended and the movement is performed slowly and smoothly. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in kneeling with their hands on a large ball. Client's instructions Position yourself kneeling with your hands on a large ball. Client's aim To strengthen your shoulder and trunk muscles. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. distance the ball is rolled. Add side to side ball movement. Increase the Repeat __ times.

Progressions and variations Repeat __ times. Less advanced: 1. both feet flat on the floor. Practice moving to your affected side. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with your thighs supported. Client's aim To improve your ability to sit unsupported. place their affected arm gently on the pillow and then sit upright again. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . a pillow on their affected side and their affected arm supported. Decrease the amount of thigh support ensuring that weight is borne through the leg in the direction of the movement. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with their thighs supported. placing your affected arm gently on the pillow and then sitting upright again. Instruct the patient to move to their affected side. both feet flat on the floor. a pillow on your affected side and your affected arm supported. More advanced: 1. Position two or more pillows on the affected side to decrease the amount of sideways lean.Exercise booklet for { }214 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Leaning to the side in sitting Therapist's aim To improve the ability to sit unsupported.

Decrease the distance to the target line. Practice leaping forwards off your affected leg and landing with both feet in front of the target line. 2. Land on the affected leg only.Exercise booklet for { }215 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Leaping from a standing start and landing on both legs Therapist's aim To improve the ability to run or jump. Progressions and variations Repeat __ times. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . More advanced: 1. 2. Instruct the patient to leap forwards off their affected leg and land with both feet in front of the target line. Hop forwards repeatedly. Less advanced: 1. 3. Client's aim To improve your ability to run or jump. Client's instructions Position yourself standing with your affected foot on a line and your other leg behind you. Jump on the spot. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with their affected foot on a line and their other leg behind them. Increase the distance to the target line.

2. 2. Less advanced: 1. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 .Exercise booklet for { }216 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Leaping from a standing start and landing on one leg Therapist's aim To improve the ability to run or jump. Increase the distance between the lines. Progressions and variations Repeat __ times. Ensure that your knee bends when landing. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with their affected foot on a line and their unaffected leg behind them. Hop on the spot. Client's aim To improve your ability to run or jump. Practice leaping off your affected leg so that you land on it in front of the target line. More advanced: 1. Ensure that their knee flexes when landing. Hop forwards on the affected leg over consecutive lines. Client's instructions Position yourself standing with your affected foot on a line and your unaffected leg behind you. Decrease the distance between the lines. Instruct the patient to leap off their affected leg and land on it in front of the target line.

Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . 2. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Client's aim To improve your ability to run. Ensure that there is a flight phase. Place the line further away from the block. Practice leaping forwards off the block. and their knee flexes as their leading foot lands. your leading foot lands in front of the line on the floor. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing on a block with a line across the floor in front of them. Instruct the patient to leap forwards off the block. their leading foot lands in front of the line on the floor. More advanced: 1.Exercise booklet for { }217 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Leaping off a block Therapist's aim To improve the ability to run. Ensure that both feet are off the ground during the middle of the leap. Place the line closer to the block. leading with one leg. your knee bends as your leading foot lands. Client's instructions Position yourself standing on a block with a line across the floor in front of you. Increase the height of the block. leading with one leg. 2. Decrease the height of the block. and Repeat __ times.

3. Leap off a block. Ensure that there is a flight phase and their knee flexes as their leading foot lands. leading with one leg. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Place a line on the Repeat __ times. Increase the leaping distance. Ensure that both feet are off the ground during the middle of the leap and your knee bends as your leading foot lands. Decrease the leaping distance. Client's aim To improve your ability to run or jump. 2. More advanced: 1. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing on a mini-trampoline. Client's instructions Position yourself standing on a mini-trampoline. Practice leaping forwards off the trampoline. floor to leap past. Instruct the patient to leap forwards off the trampoline. leading with one leg. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 .Exercise booklet for { }218 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Leaping off a mini-trampoline Therapist's aim To improve the ability to run or jump.

More advanced: 1. Decrease step length. 2. 2. Client's aim To improve your ability to run. Practice leaping sideways. Ensure that both feet are off the ground during the middle of the leap and your body and feet face forwards. Instruct the patient to leap sideways. Ensure that there is a flight phase and their trunk and feet face forwards. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Decrease speed of task. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Repeat __ times. Increase speed of task. Fri Right . Increase step length.Exercise booklet for { }219 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Leaping sideways Therapist's aim To improve the ability to run. Client's instructions Position yourself standing with your feet together. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with their feet together.

Position the object on a small block so that it is higher. 2. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with an object on the floor on your affected side and a table nearby. Instruct the patient to reach down and pick up the object with either hand and place it on the table. 3. affected side.Exercise booklet for { }220 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Lifting an object from the floor to the table Therapist's aim To improve the ability to sit and reach for an object. More advanced: 1. 2. Ensure that the affected knee remains over a flat foot so that weight is borne through the affected side. Client's aim To improve your ability to sit and reach for an object. Position the object and table further away. Ensure that your affected knee remains over your foot so that you weight-bear through your Repeat __ times. Practice reaching down to pick up the object with either hand and placing it on the table. Position the object and table closer. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with an object on the floor on their affected side and a table nearby. Position the object on the unaffected side or in front. Use objects that require accuracy of manipulation. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1.

Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Angle the head of the plinth upwards to position the patient in a semiinclined position. More advanced: 1. Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your side on a plinth with your affected side uppermost and your head resting on a pillow. from supine. Client's aim To improve your ability to move from lying to sitting. Instruct the patient to laterally flex their neck.Exercise booklet for { }221 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Lifting the head sideways Therapist's aim To improve the ability to move from lying to sitting. Practice sitting up Repeat __ times. Practice sitting up from sidelying 2. Ensure that the patient does not turn their head. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sidelying on a plinth with their affected side uppermost and their head on a pillow. Practice lifting your head up sideways from the pillow. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 .

More advanced: 1.Exercise booklet for { }222 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Lifting the leg sideways onto a block Therapist's aim To strengthen the hip abductors and improve the ability to stand unsupported. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the side of your hip and improve your ability to stand unsupported. Wear a backpack with weights in it. Finish with your leg away from your body. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Repeat __ times. Fri Right . Provide hand support for balance. Step sideways onto the step. Client's instructions Position yourself standing beside a step. Decrease the height of the step. 2. Increase the height of the step. Start with your leg beside your body. 2. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with a step beside them. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Instruct the patient to step sideways onto the step.

Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with an object on a table in front of them. Use a smaller lifting height. Practice lifting the object off the table. Ensure that the elbow is extended. Don`t hold an object in the hand. More advanced: 1. Client's aim To improve your ability to reach. 2. Use a larger lifting Repeat __ times. Apply and elbow splint to keep the elbow extended. Instruct the patient to lift the object off the table. 3.Exercise booklet for { }223 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Lifting up an object Therapist's aim To improve the ability to reach. 2. height. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with an object on a table in front of you. Lift heavier objects. Ensure that your elbow stays straight. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1.

Less advanced: 1. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with your arm supported on a table and extended in front of you. Instruct the patient to lift their arm off the table to the target. Client's aim To improve your ability to reach. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Practice lifting your arm off the table to reach the target. More advanced: 1. Therapist's aim To improve the ability to reach. Progressions and variations Repeat __ times. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with their arm supported on a table and extended in front of them.Exercise booklet for { }224 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Lifting up the arm in sitting. Ensure that your shoulder does not raise and your elbow remains straight. Increase lifting height and weight. Ensure that the shoulder does not elevate and the elbow remains extended. Apply an elbow splint to keep the elbow extended.

Use a mirror for visual feedback. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting on a chair.Exercise booklet for { }225 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Lip strengthening .alternating between pursing the lips and smiling Therapist's aim To increase strength in the lip muscles and improve the ability to speak clearly and seal the lips when eating. Repeat __ Less advanced: 1. Practice pursing your lips and then stretching your mouth into a smile to reveal their teeth. Instruct the patient to purse their lips and then stretch their mouth into a smile to reveal their teeth. Progressions and variations Hold for __ seconds. 2. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Use a finger to help push up the times. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting. Client's aim To increase strength in the lip muscles and improve your ability to speak clearly and seal the lips when eating. weak side.

Turn the trunk in different directions. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with your thighs supported on a bed. Provide support for balance. 2. Client's aim To improve your ability to sit unsupported. More advanced: 1. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. 2.Exercise booklet for { }226 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Looking up and down in sitting Therapist's aim To improve the ability to sit unsupported. Increase the amount of head movement. different directions. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with their thighs and feet supported and their hands in their lap. Decrease the amount of head movement. Instruct the patient to look up and then look down. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Turn the head in Repeat __ times. your feet on the floor and your hands in your lap. Practice looking up and down. 3.

Ensure that their knees and hips are extended. Client's aim To stretch or maintain range in your lower limbs. Use a tilt table and/or no wedge under the feet. Use a larger wedge under the feet. Use knee extension splints in the parallel bars. 2. Hold for __ minutes. 2. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in a standing frame with a wedge under their feet. 3. Patients with loss of passive hip extension and paralysis of hip and trunk extensors will need to rely on their upper limbs to hold their trunk upright. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1.Exercise booklet for { }227 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Lower limb stretch in standing using standing frame Therapist's aim To stretch or maintain length of the lower limb muscles. Client's instructions Position yourself standing in a standing frame with a wedge under your feet. Ensure that your knees and hips are kept straight. Precautions 1. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Ensure all screws are tightened before use. More advanced: 1. Increase the tautness of the hip strap.

Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Increase the angle of the wedge. Client's aim To stretch or maintain range in your lower limbs. Decrease the angle of the tilt table. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing on a tilt table with a wedge under their feet and straps over their knees. More advanced: 1.Exercise booklet for { }228 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Lower limb stretch in standing using tilt table Therapist's aim To stretch or maintain length of the lower limb muscles. 2. 3. Decrease the angle of the wedge. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Impaired or absent sensation of stretch. Precautions 1. Hold for __ minutes. hips and chest. Increase the angle of the tilt table. Client's instructions Position yourself standing on a tilt table with a wedge under your feet and straps over your knees. hips and chest. 2. Place unaffected foot on a chair in front.

Client's aim To improve your ability to stand. Instruct the patient to lower and raise their unaffected heel to touch the foam cup by slowly flexing and extending their affected knee. Wear a backpack with weights in it. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Practice lowering and raising your unaffected heel to touch the foam cup by bending and straightening your affected knee. More advanced: 1. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing on a block with a foam cup placed on the floor in front of them. walk or walk up stairs. both Repeat __ times. Provide hand support for balance. Ensure that the shoulders remain over the hips.Exercise booklet for { }229 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Lowering and raising from a block Therapist's aim To improve the ability to stand. Ensure that your shoulders remain over your hips. 2. Decrease the height of the step. walk or walk up stairs. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. 2. Increase the height of the step. both feet point forwards and the unaffected leg does not squash the foam cup. feet point forwards and your unaffected leg does not squash the foam cup. Client's instructions Position yourself standing on a block with a foam cup placed on the floor in front of you.

Client's instructions Position yourself standing with one foot a large step-length in front of your other foot. Finish with your knees bent by lowering your back knee towards the floor. Raise the back knee higher off the floor. 2. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with one foot a large step-length in front of the other foot. Less advanced: 1. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles that straighten your leg. Start with your knees straight. More advanced: 1. Ensure that both feet point forwards. Wear a backpack with weights in it. Instruct the patient to lunge by lowering the back knee towards the floor. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Progressions and variations Repeat __ times. Lower the back knee closer to the floor.Exercise booklet for { }230 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Lunge Therapist's aim To strengthen the leg extensors. Ensure that both of your feet point forwards.

Less advanced: 1. Position the patient closer to the chair. 4. More advanced: 1. Ensure that both feet point forward. 2. Increase speed of task. Decrease the height of the chair. Client's aim To improve your ability to run. Increase the height of the chair. Practice taking a large step forward with your affected leg to weight-bear on the front of the chair. Progressions and variations Repeat __ times. 3. Ensure that both feet point forward. Client's instructions Position yourself standing with a chair in front of you. Instruct the patient to take a large step forward with their affected leg to weight-bear on the front of the chair. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with a chair in front of them.Exercise booklet for { }231 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Lunging forwards to a chair Therapist's aim To improve the ability to run. 2. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Position the patient further away from the chair. Add reciprocal arm swing.

Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with a fork on a table in front of you. on the tweezers with your ring and little fingers to hold the coin. Instruct the patient to squeeze on the tweezers with their ring and little fingers to grasp the coin. Instruct the patient to pronate their forearm then increase the amount of wrist flexion without dropping the coin. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with a fork on a table in front of them. Ensure that the interphalangeal joints of the index finger remains extended. Practice stabbing food with the same setup. Tape some plastic tweezers to the end of the fork as shown. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Ensure that your index finger is kept straight. Practice with tweezers only. then practice bending your wrist with your wrist turned over. Tape some plastic tweezers to the end of the fork as shown in the insert and hold a small coin in between the end of the tweezers. Practice turning your wrist over without dropping the coin. Place a coin in between the end of the tweezers and squeeze Repeat __ times. Client's aim To improve your ability to use a fork.Exercise booklet for { }232 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Maintaining grasp of a fork using tweezers and a coin Therapist's aim To improve the ability to use a fork. More advanced: 1. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1.

Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with some plastic tweezers in their hand as shown. Instruct the patient to hold a coin in between the end of the tweezers by squeezing with their ring and little fingers. Client's aim To improve your ability to hold onto a fork. Practice with tweezers taped to the end of a fork. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . then Repeat __ times. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with some plastic tweezers in your hand as shown. Place a coin in between the end of the tweezers and squeeze on the tweezers with your ring and little fingers to hold the coin.Exercise booklet for { }233 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Maintaining grasp using tweezers and a coin Therapist's aim To improve the ability to hold onto and use a fork. practice bending your wrist with your wrist turned over. Progressions and variations More advanced: 1. Instruct the patient to pronate their forearm without dropping the coin and then maintain pronation while gradually increasing wrist flexion. Practice turning your wrist over without dropping the coin.

Exercise booklet for { }234 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Maintaining single-leg stance while kicking a ball Therapist's aim To improve the ability to weight-bear through the leg. Provide hand support for balance. Kick a light-weight ball. Therapist's instructions Position the patient standing with a ball placed on the floor in front of them. Instruct the patient to step forwards and kick the ball with their unaffected leg. More advanced: 1. 2. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. 3. Kick a heavier ball. Practice stepping forwards to kick the ball with your unaffected leg. Kick the ball a shorter distance. Fri Right . 2. Client's aim To improve your ability to weight-bear through your leg. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Repeat __ times. Kick the ball a longer distance. Client's instructions Position yourself standing with a ball placed on the floor in front of you.

Progressions and variations Repeat __ times. 4. 2. More advanced: 1. Client's instructions Position yourself standing with a chair placed in front of you. Less advanced: 1. Add reciprocal arm swing. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with a chair placed in front of them. Position the patient closer to the chair. Client's aim To improve your ability to weight-bear through your leg. Position the patient further away from the chair. Ensure that both feet point forward.Exercise booklet for { }235 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Maintaining single-leg stance while lunging forwards Therapist's aim To improve the ability to weight-bear through the leg. Decrease the height of the chair. 2. Practice taking a large step forward with your unaffected leg to weight-bear on the front of the chair. Ensure that both feet point forward. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Instruct the patient to take a large step forward with their unaffected leg to weight-bear on the front of the chair. Increase speed of task. Increase the height of the chair. 3.

Client's aim To improve your ability to weight-bear through your leg. Decrease distance to the targets. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing on one leg with targets placed in a circle on the floor around them. Client's instructions Position yourself standing on one leg with targets placed in a circle on the floor around you. More advanced: 1. Ensure that your foot only lightly touches the targets. Ensure that the foot only lightly touches the targets.Exercise booklet for { }236 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Maintaining single-leg stance while moving the other foot to targets in a circle Therapist's aim To improve the ability to weight-bear through the leg. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Increase distance to the targets. Practice moving your other foot from one target to another. 2. Instruct the patient to move their other foot from one target to another. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Repeat __ times. Provide hand support for balance.

Increase distance to the targets. Ensure that the unaffected foot only lightly touches the targets. Practice moving your unaffected foot from one target to another. 2. Instruct the patient to move their unaffected foot from one target to another. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Client's aim To improve your ability to weight-bear through your affected leg. Ensure that your unaffected foot only lightly touches the targets. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing on their affected leg with targets placed in a semi-circle on the floor in front of them. Provide hand support for balance. Decrease distance to the targets. Client's instructions Position yourself standing on your affected leg with targets placed in a semi-circle on the floor in front of you. Repeat __ times. More advanced: 1. Place the targets in a full circle around the patient.Exercise booklet for { }237 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Maintaining single-leg stance while moving the other foot to targets in a semi-circle Therapist's aim To improve the ability to weight-bear through the affected leg. 2.

Change the direction of roll frequently. Roll the ball in smaller circles without an obstacle. More advanced: 1. 2. Instruct the patient to roll the ball in circles around an obstacle on the floor with their unaffected foot. 2.Exercise booklet for { }238 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Maintaining single-leg stance while rolling a ball around an obstacle Therapist's aim To improve the ability to weight-bear through the leg. 3. Client's instructions Position yourself standing on your affected leg with your unaffected foot resting on a ball in front of you. Provide hand support for balance. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing on their affected leg with their unaffected foot resting on a ball in front of them. Roll the ball in larger circles. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Client's aim To improve your ability to weight-bear through your leg. Practice rolling the ball in circles around an obstacle on the floor with your unaffected foot. Less advanced: 1. Increase speed of task. Progressions and variations Repeat __ times.

2. Roll the ball in larger circles. Ensure that most of the weight is borne through the affected leg. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing on their affected leg with their unaffected foot resting on a ball in front of them. Repeat __ times. 2. Client's instructions Position yourself standing on your affected leg with your unaffected foot resting on a ball in front of you. Instruct the patient to roll the ball around in circles on the floor with their unaffected foot. More advanced: 1. Practice rolling the ball around in circles on the floor with your unaffected foot. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Client's aim To improve your ability to weight-bear through your leg. Increase speed of task.Exercise booklet for { }239 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Maintaining single-leg stance while rolling the other foot on a ball Therapist's aim To improve the ability to weight-bear through the leg. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Provide hand support for balance. Roll the ball in smaller circles.

Step down from a single block. More advanced: 1. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Place their affected foot on the first step and the unaffected foot on the second step. Provide hand support for balance. 3. Client's aim To improve your ability to weight-bear through your leg. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. both feet point forwards and the affected knee flexes before the unaffected foot contacts the floor. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing facing downwards on the first step of a set of stairs. Ensure that the shoulders remain over the hips. Client's instructions Position yourself standing facing downwards on the first step of a set of stairs. Step down stairs with a larger tread height. 2. step again. both feet point forwards and your affected knee bends before the unaffected foot contacts the floor. not forefoot) on the ground. Touch the unaffected heel only (ie. Place your affected foot on the first step and your unaffected foot on the second step. Instruct the patient to step down onto the floor with the unaffected foot and then move it back up to the second step again. Ensure that your shoulders remain over your hips.Exercise booklet for { }240 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Maintaining single-leg stance while stepping Therapist's aim To improve the ability to weight-bear through the leg. Step down stairs with a lower tread height. 2. Wear a backpack with weights in it. Practice stepping down onto the floor with your unaffected foot then moving it back up to the second Repeat __ times. 3.

More advanced: 1. Practice stepping backwards to pass the rear line with your unaffected leg. Ensure that both feet point forwards and the weight is transferred backwards. Ensure that both feet point forwards. Position the lines further apart to increase step length. Instruct the patient to step backwards to pass the rear line with their unaffected leg. Client's instructions Position yourself standing with two lines behind you.Exercise booklet for { }241 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Maintaining single-leg stance while stepping backwards with the other leg Therapist's aim To improve the ability to weight-bear through the leg. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with two lines behind them. Client's aim To improve your ability to weight-bear through your leg. Position the lines closer together to decrease step length. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . 2. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Provide Repeat __ times. hand support for balance.

Increase the height of the step. Provide hand support for balance. Less advanced: 1. Client's aim To improve your ability to weight-bear through your leg. 2. Wear a backpack with weights in it. More advanced: 1. Practice stepping down from the block with your unaffected leg using your affected leg to lower yourself down slowly. Ensure that the shoulders remain over the hips and both feet point forwards. 2. Decrease the height of the step. Progressions and variations Repeat __ times. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 .Exercise booklet for { }242 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Maintaining single-leg stance while stepping from a block Therapist's aim To improve the ability to weight-bear through the leg. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing on a block. Instruct the patient to step down from the block with the unaffected leg by lowering themselves slowly from the affected leg. Ensure that your shoulders remain over your hips and both of your feet point forwards. Client's instructions Position yourself standing on a block.

3. 2. 2. Ensure that your weight is borne through your affected leg. Increase the height of the block. the shoulders remain over the hips and the feet point forwards.Exercise booklet for { }243 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Maintaining single-leg stance while touching the other foot on a block Therapist's aim To improve the ability to weight-bear through the leg. Practice lifting your unaffected leg forwards and placing it gently on the block. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Provide hand support for balance. Wear a backpack with weights in it. More advanced: 1. Instruct the patient to lift their unaffected leg forwards and place it gently on the block. forwards. Decrease the height of the block. your shoulders remain over your hips and your feet point Repeat __ times. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with a block on the floor in front of them. Client's aim To improve your ability to weight-bear through your leg. Ensure that the weight is borne through the affected leg. Place a foam cup on the block and instruct the patient to gently place their foot on the cup without squashing it. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Client's instructions Position yourself standing with a block on the floor in front of you.

Exercise booklet for { }244 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Maintaining single-leg support while stepping up and down stairs Therapist's aim To improve the ability to walk up stairs and weight-bear through the leg. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing at the bottom of a set of stairs with their affected foot placed on the first step. Decrease the height of the steps. Provide hand support for balance. More advanced: 1. Instruct the patient to step up onto the second step with their unaffected foot and then move it back to the floor again. moving this foot back to the floor again. Practice stepping up onto the second step with your unaffected foot then Repeat __ times. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Wear a backpack with weights in it. 2. 2. Ensure that your affected foot is kept on the first step and your affected hip and knee straighten fully before placing your unaffected foot on the second step. Client's instructions Position yourself standing at the bottom of a set of stairs with your affected foot placed on the first step. Ensure that the affected foot is kept on the first step and the affected hip and knee extend fully before placing the unaffected foot on the second step. Increase the height of the steps. Client's aim To improve your ability to walk up stairs and weight-bear through your leg.

2. More advanced: 1. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Practice marching on the spot. Increase hip flexion. Remove hand support. Instruct the patient to march on the spot. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Client's instructions Position yourself standing with a table nearby for support.Exercise booklet for { }245 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Marching on the spot Therapist's aim To improve the ability to walk. Ensure that your legs lift up an equal amount. Repeat __ times. Use cues for feedback about hip flexion. Client's aim To improve your ability to walk. Ensure that the legs lift up an equal amount. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with a table nearby for support.

Do__ sessions per week. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the side of your shoulder. Perform skin tests. Perform __ sets of __ reps.Exercise booklet for { }246 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Middle deltoid electrical stimulation Therapist's aim To strengthen the shoulder abductors. Therapist's instructions Place the electrodes over the muscle belly of the middle deltoids. Precautions 1. Client's instructions Place the two electrodes over the muscle belly as shown. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right .

Push the fork up and down to the height of the lines with the targets closer together. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting at a table with their index finger resting on the prongs of a fork and two targets on either side of the end of the fork with a line drawn on them. More advanced: 1. Move the targets further apart. Tape a small weight to the end of the fork. Instruct the patient to push down on the fork prongs so that the other end of the fork lifts up to the height of the drawn lines. Place two Repeat __ times. Move the targets closer together. extension.Exercise booklet for { }247 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Moving a fork sideways to targets using the fingertips Therapist's aim To improve the ability to control index finger flexion. 3. Ensure that the interphalangeal joints of the index finger remain extended and the forearm and wrist do not move. Ensure that your index finger is kept straight and your forearm and wrist are kept still. Push down with different fingers. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. targets on either side of the end of the fork with a line on them. Instruct the patient to then move the end of the fork between the targets to touch the lines. Client's aim To improve your ability to control your fingers. 2. then moving the end of the fork between the targets to touch the lines. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting at a table with your finger resting on the prongs of a fork. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . 4. Practice pushing down on the fork prongs so that the other end of the fork lifts up to the height of the lines. abduction and adduction force.

Practice pushing down through your feet and lifting your bottom up off the bed. More advanced: 1.Exercise booklet for { }248 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Moving across the bed Therapist's aim To improve the ability to move in bed. Practice then moving your shoulders across the bed. moving it sideways then lowering it down to the bed again. lift their bottom up off the bed. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. bottom only. Instruct the patient to push down through their feet. Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your back with your knees bent. Position the patient on a soft mattress. Instruct the patient to then move their shoulders across the bed. Client's aim To improve your ability to move in bed. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Therapist's instructions Position the patient in supine with their hips and knees flexed. Practice lifting Repeat __ times. move it sideways and then lower it down to the bed again. 2. Provide assistance to hold the affected foot on the bed.

Instruct the patient to rotate their body and kneel on all fours then return to side-sitting. to stand up from the floor and to strengthen the shoulders. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting on your side. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Move back into four-point kneeling and then return to initial start position. Client's aim To improve your ability to move on the floor. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in side-sitting. to stand up from the floor and to strengthen your shoulder muscles. Progressions and variations More advanced: 1.Exercise booklet for { }249 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Moving between side-sitting and four-point kneeling Therapist's aim To improve the ability to move on the floor. From four-point kneeling continue to rotate body to the other side-sitting Repeat __ times. position. Practice rotating your body to a four-point kneeling (crawl) position then lowering yourself back to side-sitting.

the feet point forwards and the shoulders remain over the hips. Instruct the patient to extend their affected hip behind them to touch the block with their heel. Less advanced: 1. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . 2.Exercise booklet for { }250 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Moving foot backwards to a block Therapist's aim To improve the ability to stand or walk. More advanced: 1. Client's aim To improve your ability to stand or walk. Ensure that your knee stays relatively straight. Place the block closer. your feet point forwards and your shoulders remain over your hips. Provide hand support for balance. Client's instructions Position yourself standing with a block behind you. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with a block behind them. Practice straightening your affected hip behind you to touch the block with your heel. Ensure that the knee stays relatively straight. Place the block further away. Progressions and variations Repeat __ times.

Provide hand support for balance. Practice moving one leg forward to position yourself in half-kneeling. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in kneeling with their knees slightly apart.Exercise booklet for { }251 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Moving from kneeling to half-kneeling Therapist's aim To improve the ability to stand up from the floor. Client's aim To improve your ability to stand up from the floor. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Client's instructions Position yourself kneeling with your knees slightly apart. Repeat __ times. Instruct the patient to move one leg forward to position themselves in half-kneeling.

Decrease the amount of sideways movement. More advanced: 1. Practice moving from side to side and then sitting upright again. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with your thighs supported. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with their thighs supported.Exercise booklet for { }252 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Moving from side to side in sitting Therapist's aim To improve the ability to sit unsupported. both feet flat on the floor and hands resting on their thighs. Client's aim To improve your ability to sit unsupported. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Decrease the amount of thigh support ensuring that weight is borne through the leg in the Repeat __ times. direction of the movement Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Instruct the patient to press down through each buttock in turn. both feet flat on the floor and your hands on your thighs.

More advanced: 1. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with their feet shoulder width apart.Exercise booklet for { }253 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Moving from the heels to the toes in standing Therapist's aim To improve the ability to dorsiflex and plantarflex the ankles. Instruct the patient to dorsiflex the ankle to stand on their heels. Practice standing on your heels then standing on your toes. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Repeat __ times. then plantarflex the ankles to stand on their toes. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Wear a backpack with weights in it. Client's aim To improve your ability to lift up and point your toes. Provide hand support for balance. Client's instructions Position yourself standing with your feet shoulder width apart.

2. Pick up the objects with different fingers. 4.Exercise booklet for { }254 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Moving objects between two containers Therapist's aim To improve the ability to manipulate objects with the hand. Less advanced: 1. 3. Pick up larger objects. Pick up several objects. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with some small objects and two containers on a table in front of you. Use a container with a smaller diameter. Instruct the patient to pick up an object from one container carry it to the other container without dropping it. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with some small objects and two containers on a table in front of them. Use a container with a larger diameter. keeping them in the hand as the next object is picked up. Client's aim To improve your ability to manipulate objects with your hand. Pick up smaller objects. Practice picking up an object from one container carrying it to the other container without dropping it. and then release them into the other container one at a time. 2. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . More advanced: 1. Progressions and variations Repeat __ times.

2. Decrease distance to the targets. More advanced: 1. Increase distance to the targets. Client's instructions Position yourself standing on your unaffected leg with targets placed in a semi-circle on the floor in front of you. Provide hand support for balance.Exercise booklet for { }255 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Moving the affected leg to targets in a semi-circle Therapist's aim To improve the ability to move the affected leg when standing. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing on their unaffected leg with targets placed in a semi-circle on the floor in front of them. Place the targets in a full circle around the patient. Repeat __ times. Ensure that the affected foot only lightly touches the targets. 2. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Practice moving your affected foot from one target to another. Ensure that your affected foot only lightly touches the targets. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Instruct the patient to move their affected foot from one target to another. Client's aim To improve your ability to move your affected leg when standing.

Therapist's instructions Position the patient in supine with their arm raised up vertically. Ensure that your elbow is kept straight. Repeat __ times. Instruct the patient to move their wrist from one target to another by flexing and extending their shoulder.Exercise booklet for { }256 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Moving the extended arm between two targets Therapist's aim To improve the ability to flex and extend the shoulder. Ensure that the elbow is kept straight. Place two targets slightly apart on a stand at wrist level. Client's instructions Position yourself lying down with your arm raised up vertically in between two targets. Increase distance between the targets. More advanced: 1. Move your wrist from one target to another by moving your arm back and forth. Client's aim To improve your ability to move your arm. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Decrease distance between the targets. Place the arm in an airsplint. 2. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1.

both feet point forwards and your affected knee bends after making contact with the floor. Provide hand support for balance. Ensure that the shoulders remain over the hips. Client's instructions Position yourself standing facing downwards on the first step of a set of stairs with your unaffected foot on the first step and your affected foot on the second step behind you. Practice stepping down onto the floor with your affected foot then moving it back up to the Repeat __ times. Step down stairs with a lower tread height. Client's aim To improve your ability to descend stairs. second step again. More advanced: 1. Instruct the patient to step down onto the floor with their affected foot and then move it back up to the second step again. Step down stairs with a larger tread height. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Step down from a single block. both feet point forwards and the affected knee flexes after making contact with the floor. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. 2.Exercise booklet for { }257 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Moving the leg back and forth while stepping Therapist's aim To improve the ability to descend stairs. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing facing downwards on the first step of a set of stairs with their unaffected foot on the first step and their affected foot on the second step behind them. Wear a backpack with weights in it. keeping your unaffected foot on the first step. 3. Ensure that your shoulders remain over your hips. 2.

3. keeping their unaffected foot on the block. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Stand on a flight of stairs with the unaffected foot on the bottom step and the affected foot moving from the second step to the floor. Ensure that the shoulders remain over the hips. keeping your unaffected foot on the block. More advanced: 1. Ensure that your shoulders remain over your hips. both feet point forwards and the affected knee flexes after making contact with the floor. affected knee bends after making contact with the floor. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing on a block. Practice stepping down from the block with your affected leg then moving it back up onto the block. both feet point forwards and your Repeat __ times. Increase the height of the block. Wear a backpack with weights in it. Client's aim To improve your ability to walk or descend stairs. Decrease the height of the block.Exercise booklet for { }258 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Moving the leg back and forth while stepping off a block Therapist's aim To improve the ability to walk or descend stairs. Provide hand support for balance. 2. Client's instructions Position yourself standing on a block. Instruct the patient to step down from the block with their affected leg and then move it back up onto the block. 2.

More advanced: 1. Provide hand support for balance.Exercise booklet for { }259 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Moving the leg back and forth while stepping up and down stairs Therapist's aim To improve the ability to walk up stairs and move the leg back and forth. step and both of your feet point forwards. Ensure that your unaffected foot is kept on the first Repeat __ times. Increase the height of the steps. Wear a backpack with weights in it. Client's instructions Position yourself standing at the bottom of a set of stairs with your unaffected foot placed on the first step. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. 2. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing at the bottom of a set of stairs with their unaffected foot placed on the first step. Client's aim To improve your ability to walk up stairs and move your leg back and forth. Decrease the height of the steps. 2. Practice stepping up onto the second step with your affected foot then moving this foot back to the floor again. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Instruct the patient to step up onto the second step with their affected foot and then move this foot back to the floor again. Ensure that the unaffected foot is kept on the first step and both feet point forwards.

Client's aim To improve your ability to stand up from sitting. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with a table placed in front of you at chest height. Position the table further away. the ankles are dorsiflexed and weight is borne through the affected leg. Position the table closer. 1. Instruct the patient to flex their hips to touch the table with their chest. More advanced: 1. Ensure that your trunk does not bend. your toes are aligned under your knees and you weight-bear through your affected leg. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Repeat __ times.Exercise booklet for { }260 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Moving the shoulders forwards in sitting to a target Therapist's aim To improve the ability to stand up from sitting. Progressions and variations Less advanced. Practice bending your hips and moving your chest forwards to touch the table. Ensure that the trunk does not flex. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with a table placed in front of them at chest height.

Place the target closer to the table. your toes are aligned under your knees and you weight-bear Repeat __ times.Exercise booklet for { }261 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Moving the shoulders forwards in sitting using a moving table Therapist's aim To improve the ability to stand up from sitting. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Instruct the patient to flex their hips and push the table forwards to touch the target. through your affected leg. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with your forearms resting on a moveable table in front of you. Client's aim To improve your ability to stand up from sitting. the ankles are dorsiflexed and weight is borne through the affected leg. Ensure that the trunk does not flex. More advanced: 1. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with their forearms resting on a moveable table in front of them. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Practice bending your hips and pushing the table forwards to touch a target. Ensure that your trunk does not bend. Place a target object in front of the table. Place the target further away from the table.

Use a flatter spoon.Exercise booklet for { }262 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Moving water between two containers Therapist's aim To improve the ability to manipulate objects with the hand. Use a deeper spoon. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Client's aim To improve your ability to manipulate objects with your hand. Transport a larger quantity of water. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with two cups filled with water on a table in front of them. Instruct the patient to fill a spoon with water from one cup and carry it to the other cup without spilling it. 2. 2. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Repeat __ times. More advanced: 1. Transport a smaller quantity of water. Practice filling a spoon with water from one cup and carrying it to the other cup without spilling it. Fri Right . Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with two cups filled with water on a table in front of you.

Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with someone`s hand on your forehead. Seek medical clearance for patients with recent injuries. Perform __ sets of __ reps.Exercise booklet for { }263 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Neck protractor strengthening in sitting Therapist's aim To strengthen the neck protractors. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with your hand on their forehead. Do__ sessions per week. Instruct the patient to protract their neck. Push your forehead into their hand. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the front of your neck. Precautions 1. Apply resistance.

Do__ sessions per week. Perform __ sets of __ reps. Seek medical clearance for patients with recent injuries. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the back of your neck.Exercise booklet for { }264 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Neck retractor strengthening Therapist's aim To strengthen the neck retractors. Apply resistance. Push your head backwards into their hand. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with someone`s hand behind your head. Precautions 1. Instruct the patient to retract their neck. Ensure that you tuck your chin in. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with your hand behind their head.

Practice turning the dials of the combination lock to correspond with the written codes. Practice holding the lock and turning the dials with the affected hand only.Exercise booklet for { }265 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Opening a combination lock Therapist's aim To improve the ability to manipulate objects with the hand. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with a combination lock and a list of four digit codes on a table in front of you. Client's aim To improve your ability to manipulate objects with your hand. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with a combination lock and a list of four digit codes on a table in front of them. Instruct the patient to turn dials of the combination lock to correspond with the written codes. Progressions and variations Repeat __ times. More advanced: 1.

Change the fit of the lid. Repeat __ times. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting while holding a plastic container with the lid closed in your unaffected hand. Client's aim To improve your ability to manipulate objects with your hand. Progressions and variations Less advanced / More advanced: 1. Practice opening and closing the lid with your affected hand. Instruct the patient to open and close the lid with their affected hand. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting while holding a plastic container with the lid closed in their unaffected hand. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right .Exercise booklet for { }266 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Opening a container Therapist's aim To improve the ability to manipulate objects with the hand.

Exercise booklet for { }267 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Opening a leash clip Therapist's aim To improve the ability to flex the thumb or manipulate objects with the hand. Client's aim To improve your ability to manipulate objects with your hand. Practice opening the leash clip with your thumb. Instruct the patient to open the leash clip with their thumb. Repeat __ times. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with your affected hand grasping a leash clip. 2. Practice hooking the leash clip onto various objects. Practice opening the leash clip using different fingers. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Progressions and variations More advanced: 1. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with their affected hand grasping a leash clip.

The machine can be used to either actively or passively rotate the arms and legs. Decrease the active resistance.Exercise booklet for { }268 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Passive/active cycle for upper and/or lower limbs Therapist's aim To improve fitness and joint range. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting in your wheelchair with your hands and/or feet in the paddles of the active/passive cycle. Check for pressure marks in areas where sensation is absent or impaired. resistance. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in their wheelchair with their hands and/or feet in the paddles of the active/passive cycle. 2. Precautions 1. Increase duration. The machine can be used to either actively or passively rotate your arms and legs. Increase the active Perform exercise for __ minutes. Client's aim To improve your fitness and joint range. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . More advanced: 1.

Precautions 1. Perform skin tests.Exercise booklet for { }269 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Pectoralis electrical stimulation Therapist's aim To strengthen the shoulder horizontal adductors. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the front of your shoulder. Client's instructions Place the two electrodes over the muscle belly as shown. Do__ sessions per week. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Therapist's instructions Place the electrodes over the muscle belly of the pectoralis. Perform __ sets of __ reps.

1. Precautions Hold for __ minutes. Client's instructions Position yourself beside a doorway with your shoulder raised and your elbow and hand resting against the door frame. Lean forwards and use the doorway to apply a stretch to the muscles across the front of your chest. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right .Exercise booklet for { }270 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Pectoralis stretch against a doorway Therapist's aim To stretch or maintain length of the pectoralis. Therapist's instructions Position the patient beside a doorway with their shoulder abducted and externally rotated and their forearm resting against the doorframe. Instruct the patient to lean forwards and use the doorway to stretch their pectoralis. Impaired or absent sensation of stretch. Client's aim To stretch or maintain length in the muscles across your chest.

Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with their shoulder abducted and their hand resting on a wall. Instruct the patient to move forwards or rotate their trunk away from their hand while keeping their hand in the same position on the wall. Client's aim To stretch or maintain length in the muscles across your chest. Progressions and variations Hold for __ minutes. Impaired or absent sensation of stretch.Exercise booklet for { }271 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Pectoralis stretch in standing Therapist's aim To stretch or maintain length of the pectoralis. Decrease the amount of forwards movement or trunk rotation. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Precautions 1. Less advanced: 1. More advanced: 1. Increase the amount of forwards movement or trunk rotation. Move forwards or rotate your trunk away from your hand while keeping your hand in the same position on the wall. Client's instructions Position yourself standing with your arm out to the side and your hand resting on a wall.

Instruct the patient to swallow while squeezing very hard with their tongue and throat during the swallow. Client's aim To improve your ability to swallow and maintain an oral diet. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting. Ensure that the excess effort is visible in the neck during the swallow. Repeat __ times. Ensure that the excess effort is visible in your neck during the swallow. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting in a chair. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Practice swallowing while squeezing very hard with your tongue and throat during the swallow.Exercise booklet for { }272 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Pharyngeal strengthening (effortful swallow) Therapist's aim To increase strength of the pharyngeal muscles and improve the ability to protect the airway when swallowing through increasing hyolaryngeal excursion.

2. Position the object further away. More advanced: 1. Client's aim To improve your ability to sit and reach for an object. Instruct the patient to reach down and pick up the object with either hand.Exercise booklet for { }273 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Picking an object off the floor Therapist's aim To improve the ability to sit and reach for an object. Less advanced: 1. Position the object closer. Practice reaching down to pick up the object with either hand. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with an object placed on the floor on their affected side. 3. Use an object that requires accuracy of manipulation. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with an object placed on the floor on your affected side. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Ensure that your affected knee remains over your foot so that you weight-bear through your affected side. Progressions and variations Repeat __ times. Position the object on the unaffected side or in front. Ensure that the affected knee remains over a flat foot so that weight is borne through the affected side. Position the object on a small block so that it is higher. 2.

Exercise booklet for { }274 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Picking up a coin Therapist's aim To improve the ability to grasp and release small objects with the hand. Client's aim To improve your ability to pick up small objects with your hand. More advanced: 1. 2. Repeat __ times. Pick up several coins keeping them in the hand as the next coin is picked up. Use a larger object. Practice picking up and placing down the coin. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with a large coin on a table in front of you. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with a large coin on a table in front of them. Use a smaller coin. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Instruct the patient to pick up the coin and place it down again. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1.

Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with a small object. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with a small object. Use a longer object. Rotate the hand in various positions while holding the object. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Use a shorter object. Practice picking up the object using your thumb and the tip of your first finger and placing it down again without dropping it. up the object. Client's aim To improve your ability to manipulate objects with your hand. 3. Lift the object straight up and down. on a table in front of them. 2. Repeat using the second. such as a pen lid. More advanced: 1. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Repeat using your second. Move the object from one location to another. Instruct the patient to pick up the object using their thumb and the tip of their first finger and place it down again without dropping it. 2. such as a pen lid. Ensure that there is cupping of the medial border of the hand.Exercise booklet for { }275 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Picking up an object between the thumb and fingertips Therapist's aim To improve the ability to manipulate objects with the hand. third and fourth fingers to pick Repeat __ times. on a table in front of you. third and fourth fingers.

3. 2. Practice picking up the coins one at a time keeping them in your hand as the next coin is picked up. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . release and manipulate small objects with the hand. table one at a time. Put the coins back on the Repeat __ times. Don`t hold the coins in the hand. Pick up larger objects. Pick up smaller coins or coins of different sizes. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with some coins on a table in front of them. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with some coins on a table in front of you. Pick up the coins with different fingers. Client's aim To improve your ability to pick up and manipulate small objects with your hand. 2. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. More advanced: 1. Instruct the patient to pick up the coins one at a time keeping them in the hand as the next coin is picked up.Exercise booklet for { }276 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Picking up and holding onto coins Therapist's aim To improve the ability to grasp.

Pick up several Repeat __ times. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with some coins and a jar on a table in front of them. 2. 3. Pick up larger objects. Instruct the patient to pick up the coins one at a time using their thumb and index finger and place them in the jar. Use a jar with a larger diameter. 4. Client's aim To improve your ability to pick up and put down small objects with your hand. coins.Exercise booklet for { }277 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Picking up coins and placing them in a jar Therapist's aim To improve the ability to grasp and release small objects with the hand. More advanced: 1. 2. Use a jar with a smaller diameter. keeping them in the hand as the next coin is picked up. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with some coins and a jar on a table in front of you. Practice picking up the coins one at a time using your thumb and index finger and placing them in the jar. Pick up smaller coins. Pick up the coins with different fingers. and then release them into the jar one at a time.

2. Drop objects into a container after picking them up. Client's aim To strengthen your foot muscles. Instruct the patient to pick up the objects with their toes. Fri Right .Exercise booklet for { }278 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Picking up objects with the toes Therapist's aim To strengthen the toe flexors and intrinsic foot muscles. Practice picking up the objects with your toes. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with small objects on the floor in front of you. paper tissue). Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Repeat __ times. Use objects that are more difficult to pick up with the toes. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with small objects on the floor in front of them. More advanced: 1. Use objects that are easy to pick up with the toes (eg.

2. Do__ sessions per week.Exercise booklet for { }279 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Pincer grip strengthening Therapist's aim To strengthen the finger and thumb flexors. Client's aim To strengthen your fingers and thumb. Use pegs that are easy to open. Use pegs that are difficult to open. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with a peg held between the index finger and thumb. Practice squeezing the peg to open it. Squeeze the pegs between different fingers. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with a peg held between your index finger and thumb. Instruct the patient to squeeze the peg to open it. Perform __ sets of __ reps. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . More advanced: 1.

Impaired or absent sensation of stretch. Client's aim To stretch or maintain range in your hip. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Hold for __ minutes. Precautions 1.Exercise booklet for { }280 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Piriformis stretch Therapist's aim To stretch or maintain length of the hip internal rotators. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in supine with their hips flexed and one ankle crossed in front of the opposite knee. Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your back with your legs bent and one ankle crossed in front of the opposite knee. Instruct the patient to grasp behind their knee and pull it gently towards their chest. Grasp behind your knee and pull it gently towards your chest.

Client's aim To improve your ability to reach for objects and manipulate objects with your hand. Position the peg board further away. Instruct the patient to pick up the pegs one at a time and place them in the holes in the peg board. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Place smaller pegs in smaller holes on the peg board. Ensure that your shoulder does not hitch and your trunk does not bend to the side Repeat __ times. 2. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Place larger pegs in larger holes on the peg board. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with a peg board and some cylindrical pegs on a table in front of you. when reaching. Practice picking up the pegs one at a time and placing them in the holes in the peg board. Ensure that the shoulder does not hitch and the trunk does not flex to the side when reaching. Position the peg board closer. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with a peg board and some cylindrical pegs on a table in front of them. 2.Exercise booklet for { }281 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Placing pegs in a peg board Therapist's aim To improve the ability to reach for objects and manipulate objects with the hand. More advanced: 1.

Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 .Exercise booklet for { }282 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Popping bubble wrap between the fingers Therapist's aim To improve the ability to oppose the thumb with the fingers and to strengthen the muscles that oppose the thumb to the fingers. Repeat __ times. Practice popping the bubble wrap between each fingertip and your thumb. More advanced: 1. Increase speed of task. alternating one at a time. Depress the bubble wrap rather than popping it. alternating one at a time. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with some bubble wrap on a table in front of you. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with some bubble wrap on a table in front of them. Instruct the patient to pop the bubble wrap between each fingertip and their thumb. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Client's aim To improve your ability to touch your thumb to your fingers and to strengthen the muscles that oppose the thumb to the fingers.

Therapist's instructions Place the electrodes over the muscle belly of the posterior deltoids. Perform __ sets of __ reps.Exercise booklet for { }283 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Posterior deltoid electrical stimulation Therapist's aim To strengthen the shoulder extensors. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the back of your shoulder. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Perform skin tests. Precautions 1. Do__ sessions per week. Client's instructions Place the two electrodes over the muscle belly as shown.

Fri Right . Ensure that their arm remains horizontal. Impaired or absent sensation of stretch. Ensure that your arm stays in line with your shoulders. Instruct the patient to use their other hand to pull their arm closer to their trunk. Client's instructions Position yourself with one arm held straight across the front of you at shoulder height.Exercise booklet for { }284 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Posterior shoulder stretch Therapist's aim To stretch or maintain length of the posterior deltoids. rhomboids and shoulder capsule. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Hold for __ minutes. Precautions 1. Therapist's instructions Position the patient with one arm adducted horizontally across their body. Client's aim To stretch or maintain length in the muscles behind your shoulder. Use your other hand to pull your arm closer to you.

Hold onto a heavier object. Practice rotating your hand outwards to empty the beans onto the table. Support the forearm Repeat __ times. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . 2. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1.Exercise booklet for { }285 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Pouring beans from a cup Therapist's aim To improve the ability to supinate and pronate the forearm. Ensure that the elbow is bent at about 90 degrees to minimise shoulder rotation. Client's aim To improve your ability to rotate your forearm. Use a cup that does not deform with pressure. Instruct the patient to supinate their hand and empty the beans onto the table. with a sandbag. More advanced: 1. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting while holding a foam cup filled with beans. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting while holding a foam cup filled with beans. Ensure that you keep your elbow bent.

Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with a cup filled with beans on a table in front of them. Client's aim To improve your ability to manipulate small objects with your hand. Use a cup with a smaller diameter. Use a cup with a larger diameter. 2. Use more. Practice pouring the beans from the cup into your hand then back into the cup again. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with a cup filled with beans on a table in front of you. Instruct the patient to pour the beans from the cup into their hand then back into the cup again.Exercise booklet for { }286 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Pouring beans into a cup Therapist's aim To improve the ability to manipulate small objects with the hand. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. More advanced: 1. smaller beans. Use fewer. 2. Repeat __ times. larger beans. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right .

Use smaller diameter cups or a bottle. Ensure that the elbow remains bent at about 90 degrees to minimise shoulder rotation. Practice pouring water into each cup on the table by rotating your forearm one way and then the other. Repeat __ times. Perform the exercise without any support under the forearm. Instruct the patient to pour water into each cup on the table by pronating and supinating their forearm. 2. Support the forearm with a sandbag. Use a cup that does not deform with pressure. 2. Ensure that you keep your elbow bent. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . 3. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Client's aim To improve your ability to rotate your forearm. More advanced: 1. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with two cups on a table and holding onto a third cup filled with water. Perform the exercise without water in the cup.Exercise booklet for { }287 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Pouring water between cups Therapist's aim To improve the ability to pronate and supinate the forearm. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with two cups on a table and holding onto a third cup filled with water.

Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Use cups that do not deform with pressure.Exercise booklet for { }288 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Pouring water from one cup to another Therapist's aim To improve the ability to manipulate objects with the hand. Instruct the patient to pick up the cups and pour water from one cup to the other without spilling it. 2. 3. Practice picking up the cups and pouring water from one cup to the other without spilling it. Use a smaller diameter cup or a bottle. Ensure that the cups do not deform. More advanced: 1. water. Use a smaller quantity of Repeat __ times. Client's aim To improve your ability to manipulate objects with your hand. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Use a full cup of water. Pour while standing. Ensure that the cups do not deform. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with two foam cups on a table in front of them. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with two foam cups on a table in front of you. 2.

Practice cupping the palm of your hand and pouring water into it using your other hand. Repeat __ times. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with a water bottle and a towel on a table in front of them. Increase the amount of water poured into the hand. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with a water bottle and a towel on a table in front of you. Instruct the patient to pour the water from their cupped palm back into the bottle without spilling it. Practice pouring rice instead of water.Exercise booklet for { }289 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Pouring water into a cupped palm Therapist's aim To improve the ability to manipulate objects with the hand. Decrease the amount of water poured into the hand. Instruct the patient to cup the palm of their hand and pour water into it using their other hand. More advanced: 1. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. 2. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Practice pouring the water from your cupped palm back into the bottle without spilling it. Client's aim To improve your ability to manipulate objects with your hand.

Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Practice pressing the numbers on the phone with the other fingers. keypad. Stick the phone to the table. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. 2. More advanced: 1. Use a phone with larger numbers on the Repeat __ times. Increase speed of task. Client's aim To improve your ability to manipulate objects with your hand. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with a list of numbers and a mobile phone on the table in front of them. Instruct the patient to read the numbers from the list and press the corresponding numbers on the keypad using their index finger. Use a phone with smaller numbers on the keypad 2. 3. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with a list of numbers and a mobile phone on the table in front of them. Practice reading the numbers from the list and pressing the corresponding numbers on the keypad using your index finger.Exercise booklet for { }290 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Pressing numbers on a phone Therapist's aim To improve the ability to manipulate objects with the hand.

Client's instructions Position yourself sitting on your side while leaning on one hand. Move the hand further away from the hip. Move the hand closer to the hip. Apply an elbow splint. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in side-sitting with an arm out to their side. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Instruct the patient to weight-bear through their arm. More advanced: 1. Client's aim To strengthen your shoulder muscles and improve your ability to sit.Exercise booklet for { }291 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Propping in side-sitting Therapist's aim To strengthen the shoulder muscles and improve the ability to sit. Move from sidelying to side-sitting. Apply an elbow splint. Hold for __ minutes. 2. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Practice weight-bearing through your arm.

Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Use a mirror for visual feedback. Repeat __ air in the cheeks while pressing on the cheeks with the hands. Practice closing your lips tightly and puffing out your cheeks without letting air escape from your lips. Client's aim To increase strength in the lip muscles and improve your ability to seal your lips when eating. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Instruct patient to close their lips tightly and puff out their cheeks without letting air escape from their lips. Attempt to maintain Hold for __ seconds. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting in a chair. times. More advanced: 1.Exercise booklet for { }292 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Puffing out the cheeks Therapist's aim To increase strength in the lip muscles and improve the ability to seal the lips when eating.

Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with a set of scales placed underneath your foot.Exercise booklet for { }293 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Pushing down through the leg in sitting Therapist's aim To improve the ability to weight-bear through the leg. Use a set Repeat __ times. Push down with less force. Client's aim To improve your ability to weight-bear through your leg. 2. More advanced: 1. Ensure that your trunk remains against the backrest. Ensure that the trunk remains against the chair back. Practice pushing down with your foot using the scales as feedback. g down to 15kg on the scales. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. e. Push down with more force. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with a set of scales placed underneath their foot. of digital scales where the force reading can be viewed at eye level. g down to 5kg on the scales. e. Instruct the patient to push down with their foot using the scales for feedback.

Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. using the scales as feedback. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with a set of scales placed underneath your foot. Push down with more force. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . e. Instruct the patient to push down with their foot and then lean forwards. Practice pushing down with your foot then leaning forwards. using the scales as feedback. e. Client's aim To improve your ability to weight-bear through your leg. g down to 15kg on the scales.Exercise booklet for { }294 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Pushing down through the leg when leaning forwards Therapist's aim To improve the ability to weight-bear through the leg. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with a set of scales placed underneath their foot. g down to 5kg on the scales. Repeat __ times. Push down with less force. More advanced: 1.

Stab different objects (eg. 4. the index finger is extended and the wrist is flexed. Put the putty on a plate. Make shallower indents in the putty with the fork. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Use a knife and fork together. Instruct the patient to stab the putty with the prongs of the fork repeatedly. 2. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Repeat __ times. Ensure that the prongs of the fork push downwards without dragging across the putty. Client's aim To improve your ability to use a fork. a slice of bread). Practice stabbing the putty with the prongs of the fork repeatedly. Make deeper indents in the putty.Exercise booklet for { }295 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Pushing down with a fork Therapist's aim To improve the ability to use a fork. Use tape to position the fingers on the fork appropriately. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with a fork and some putty on a table in front of them. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with a fork and some putty on a table in front of you. More advanced: 1. Ensure that you push downwards without dragging the fork across the putty. 5. Lift the putty between different places with the fork. 2. 3.

Use a smaller glove. Instruct the patient to put the glove on their affected hand by separating their fingers and take it off again. Client's aim To improve your ability to manipulate objects with your hand. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with a glove on a table in front of them. More advanced: 1. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with a glove on a table in front of you.Exercise booklet for { }296 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Putting on a glove Therapist's aim To improve the ability to manipulate objects with the hand. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Repeat __ times. Use a larger glove. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Practice putting the glove on your affected hand by separating your fingers and taking it off again.

Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with one knee bent. Ensure that your shoulders remain over your hips. Client's instructions Position yourself standing with one knee bent. Hold for __ minutes. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Ensure that the shoulders remain over the hips. Provide hand support for balance. Hold onto the ankle of your bent knee and pull it towards your bottom. Instruct the patient to hold onto the ankle of the bent knee and pull it towards their bottom. Precautions 1. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1.Exercise booklet for { }297 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Quadriceps stretch in standing Therapist's aim To stretch or maintain length of hip flexors and knee extensors. Client's aim To stretch or maintain range in your knee and hip. Impaired or absent sensation of stretch.

Client's aim To improve your ability to stand or walk. Ensure that both feet point forward and your shoulders are over your hips. Instruct the patient to raise and lower their body so that their unaffected foot leaves and returns to the ground. Wear a backpack with weights in it. 3. 2. Provide hand support for balance. More advanced: 1. Repeat __ times. both feet point forwards and the shoulders are over the hips. 2. Practice raising and lowering your body so that your unaffected heel leaves and returns to the ground. Client's instructions Position yourself standing with your affected foot on the edge of a block beside you. Ensure that the unaffected foot only touches the ground with the heel. Decrease the height of the block.Exercise booklet for { }298 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Raising and lowering from a block Therapist's aim To improve the ability to stand or walk. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with their affected foot on the edge of a block beside them. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Increase the height of the block. Place foam or polystyrene cup under the foot.

Client's instructions Position yourself standing with your affected foot on the edge of a block beside you and a table nearby for support. Ensure that both feet point forwards and the hand support is used only if necessary. Decrease the height of the block. Increase the height of the block. More advanced: 1. Practice raising and lowering your body so that your unaffected Repeat __ times. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. both feet point forwards and the hand support is used only if necessary. Ensure that the unaffected foot only touches the ground with the heel. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 .Exercise booklet for { }299 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Raising and lowering from a block with hand support nearby Therapist's aim To improve the ability to stand or walk. Client's aim To improve your ability to stand or walk. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with their affected foot on the edge of a block beside them and a table nearby for support. 3. Wear a backpack with weights in it. 2. heel leaves and returns to the ground. Instruct the patient to raise and lower their body so that their unaffected foot leaves and returns to the ground. Remove hand support.

Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . More advanced: 1. Client's aim To improve your ability to stand. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Provide hand support for balance. Ensure that your shoulders remain over your hips and both feet point forwards. walk or walk up stairs. Repeat __ times. Increase the height of the block. Wear a backpack with weights in it. walk or walk up stairs. Ensure that the shoulders remain over the hips and both feet point forwards. 2. Instruct the patient to lift their affected leg forwards and place it on the block. 2.Exercise booklet for { }300 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Raising the leg onto a block Therapist's aim To improve the ability to stand. Practice lifting your affected leg forwards and placing it on the block. Client's instructions Position yourself standing with a block on the floor in front of you. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with a block on the floor in front of them. Decrease the height of the block.

that is easy to manipulate. Use an object Repeat __ times. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with an object obliquely in front of you. Position the object closer and at a less oblique angle. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Practice reaching forwards to pick up the object with your hand. 2. Position the object further away and at a more oblique angle. 2. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. More advanced: 1. Instruct the patient to reach and pick up the object with their hand.Exercise booklet for { }301 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Reaching diagonally in sitting Therapist's aim To improve the ability to reach. Use an object that is difficult to manipulate. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with an object obliquely in front of them. Ensure that the shoulder does not elevate or internally rotate. Ensure that you do not hitch your shoulder or move your elbow out to the side. Client's aim To improve your ability to reach.

Instruct the patient to reach forwards to touch the target. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with a target object placed in front of them. about the amount of weight borne through each foot. Position the target closer.Exercise booklet for { }302 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Reaching forward in sitting Therapist's aim To improve the ability to stand up from sitting. Ensure that your toes are aligned under your knees and you weight-bear through your affected leg. Client's aim To improve your ability stand up from sitting. Practice reaching forwards to touch the target. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . 2. More advanced: 1. Precautions 1. Provide stand-by assistance if required. Position the target further away. Ensure that the ankles are dorsiflexed and weight is borne through the affected leg. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with a target object placed in front of you. Use scales under the feet to give feedback Repeat __ times. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1.

Use a middle object that can deform. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with three objects placed slightly apart on a table in front of you. More advanced: 1. Use a middle object with a smaller diameter. Pick up a middle object that is filled with water. Place the objects closer together. reaching. Use a middle object with a larger diameter. Ensure that you shape your hand to match the middle object as you start Repeat __ times. Use a middle object that cannot deform. Ensure that pre-shaping of the hand occurs at the start of the reaching movement. Practice reaching forwards to pick up the middle object without touching the objects on either side. Instruct the patient to reach forwards and pick up the middle object without touching the objects on either side.Exercise booklet for { }303 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Reaching forward to an object Therapist's aim To improve the ability to grasp an object. 2. Place the objects further apart. 3. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with three objects placed slightly apart on a table in front of them. Client's aim To improve your ability to pick up an object. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. 2. 3. 4. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 .

Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Use a higher block. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with a block on a table in front of them. Client's aim To improve your ability to reach. Practice lifting a cup from the table to the top of the block. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. 3. Lift the hand only.Exercise booklet for { }304 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Reaching from a low surface to a high surface Therapist's aim To improve the ability to reach. 2. Add water to Repeat __ times. Use a cup that can deform. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with a block on a table in front of you. 2. More advanced: 1. Ensure that your elbow stays tucked in and your shoulder does not hitch. Use a lower block. Instruct the patient to lift a cup from the table to the top of the block. Ensure that the arm flexes forwards rather than abducts and the shoulder does not elevate. the cup.

More advanced: 1. Place the table in front so that the markers are at 120% of arm`s length. Repeat __ times. Decrease the distance that the object is moved through. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Tape some markers on a table in a semi-circle. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting in front of table with markers on it. Ensure that weight is borne through the affected leg. 2. Increase the distance that the object is moved through. Place the table in front so that the markers are at 140% of arm`s length. Client's aim To improve your ability to sit unsupported. Place the table in front so that the markers are at 100% of arm`s length. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Practice moving an object from a marker on your unaffected side to one on your affected side with either hand.Exercise booklet for { }305 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Reaching from side to side in sitting Therapist's aim To improve the ability to sit unsupported. Instruct the patient to move an object from a marker on their unaffected side to one on the affected side with either hand. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with their feet flat on the floor. 2. Ensure that you weight-bear through your affected leg.

Use an object that Repeat __ times. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with a table in front of them and another table to their side. Use an object that is easy to hold.Exercise booklet for { }306 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Reaching from side to side in standing Therapist's aim To improve the ability to hold and move an object. Practice lifting an object with your hand from one table to the other without dropping it. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . is difficult to hold. Client's aim To improve your ability to hold and move and object. Client's instructions Position yourself standing with a table in front of you and another table to your side. More advanced: 1. Instruct the patient to lift an object with their hand from one table to the other without dropping it. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1.

Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Move the Repeat __ times. Use an object that is easy to pick up. 2. More advanced: 1. Client's aim To improve your ability to reach. Practice moving an object from one marker to another with your hand. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting in front of a table that has markers on it. Use an object that is difficult to pick up. object through a larger distance. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting in front of a table with markers on it. Instruct the patient to move an object from one marker to another with their hand. 2. Move the object through a smaller distance. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1.Exercise booklet for { }307 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Reaching to different targets Therapist's aim To improve the ability to reach.

Client's aim To improve your ability to stand up or sit down. Position the object closer. Repeat __ times. Instruct the patient to reach out and pick up the object with either hand and then return to sitting. Ensure that weight is borne through the affected leg.Exercise booklet for { }308 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Reaching to the side when standing up Therapist's aim To improve the ability to stand up or sit down. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Practice reaching out to pick up the object with either hand and then returning to sitting. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with a table placed diagonally on the affected side of their body and an object on top of the table. Position the object in front rather than on the affected side. Ensure that weight is borne through your affected leg. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . More advanced: 1. 2. Position the object further away. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with a table placed diagonally on the affected side of your body and an object on top of the table.

Decrease reaching distance. Sit on different height stools. Decrease thigh support. Practice reaching for the object without using your other hand for support. 2. Client's aim To improve your ability to sit unsupported. Instruct the patient to reach for the object without using their other hand for support. 2.Exercise booklet for { }309 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Reaching while seated Therapist's aim To improve the ability to sit unsupported. 3. Ensure that the patient does not fall forwards. More advanced: 1. Increase reaching distance. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in short sitting on a plinth with an object placed on a stool obliquely in front of them. Instruct patient to move objects between their two hands. 3. 5. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Ensure thighs and feet Repeat __ times. 4. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. are well supported. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting over the edge of a plinth with an object placed on a stool in front and to the side of you. Precautions 1. Perform similar activities sitting in wheelchair. Instruct the patient to carry out different tasks.

Exercise booklet for { }310 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Rhomboids electrical stimulation Therapist's aim To strengthen the shoulder retractors. Therapist's instructions Place the electrodes over the muscle belly of the shoulder retractors. Perform __ sets of __ reps. Perform skin tests. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles between your shoulder blades. Client's instructions Place the two electrodes over the muscle belly as shown. Precautions 1. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Do__ sessions per week.

Progressions and variations More advanced: 1. Ensure that the interphalangeal joints remain extended. Practice individual finger tapping with the non-tapping fingers in flexion.Exercise booklet for { }311 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Rhythmical finger tapping Therapist's aim To improve the ability to flex and extend the fingers at the MCP joints. Practice tapping each finger up and down singly and one after the other. Repeat __ times. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Instruct the patient to rhythmically tap their fingers individually and sequentially. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with your arm resting palm-down on a table in front of you. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with their forearm pronated and resting on a table in front of them. Client's aim To improve your ability to move your fingers. Ensure that your fingers are kept straight.

2. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Practice rolling the ball back and forth over your fingertips using your thumb. Instruct the patient to roll the ball back and forth over their fingertips using their thumb. Use a smaller ball. Client's aim To improve your ability to manipulate objects with your hand. 2. More advanced: 1.Exercise booklet for { }312 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Rolling a ball between the thumb and fingertips Therapist's aim To improve the ability to manipulate objects with the hand. Move the ball through a smaller range. Ensure that there is cupping of the medial border of the hand. one ball. Use more than Repeat __ times. Move the ball through a larger range. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting while holding a small ball in between their thumb and fingertips. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. 3. Use a larger ball. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting while holding a small ball in between your thumb and fingertips.

Exercise booklet for { }313 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Rolling a ball in a circle while standing on the unaffected leg Therapist's aim To improve the ability to move the leg in different directions when standing. 3. Client's aim To improve your ability to move your leg in different directions when standing. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Roll the ball in larger circles. 2. Progressions and variations Repeat __ times. Client's instructions Position yourself standing on your unaffected leg with your affected foot resting on a ball in front of you. Change the direction of roll frequently. Practice rolling the ball in circles around an obstacle on the floor with your affected foot. Provide hand support for balance. 2. Roll the ball in smaller circles without an obstacle. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing on their unaffected leg with their affected foot resting on a ball in front of them. Increase speed of task. More advanced: 1. Less advanced: 1. Instruct the patient to roll the ball in circles around an obstacle on the floor with their affected foot.

Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. lines to use as a guide. Use a pen with ridges to increase the amount of friction. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Mark a pen with a few vertical lines along the barrel of the pen to use as feedback. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with your forearm resting on a table.Exercise booklet for { }314 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Rolling a pen within the hand Therapist's aim To improve the ability to manipulate a pen with the hand. 2. Mark a pen with a few vertical Repeat __ times. Ensure that the wrist and forearm do not move and that manipulation of the pen is performed with the thumb and fingers only. Decrease the amount that the pen is turned each time. middle finger and thumb only. Ensure that your wrist and forearm do not move and that any manipulation of the pen is performed with your thumb and fingers only. Increase the amount that the pen is turned each time. Position the pen resting against their middle finger and webspace with their index finger and thumb at the tip of the pen. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with their forearm resting on a table. shapes and slipperiness. Practice rolling the pen within your hand to uncover the next vertical line using your index finger. middle finger and thumb only. Instruct the patient to roll the pen within the hand to uncover the next vertical line using their index finger. Position the pen resting against your middle finger and the webspace of your hand with your index finger and thumb at the tip of the pen. Client's aim To improve your ability to manipulate a pen in your hand. Practice using pens of different sizes. More advanced: 1. 2.

Exercise booklet for { }315 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Rolling from side to side Therapist's aim To improve the ability to roll over. Position the objects closer. then rolling over the other way to place the object on your other side. Instruct the patient to roll to their side to pick up an object. 3. to one side only. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Practice rolling to pick up an object on one side. then roll the other way to place the object on their other side. Look at or touch the objects only. Client's instructions Position yourself lying down with target objects placed on either side. More advanced: 1. 2. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Roll Repeat __ times. Client's aim To improve your ability to roll over. Position the objects further away. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in supine with target objects placed on either side.

Therapist's instructions Position the patient in supine with their affected hip and knee flexed and their affected arm across their body. Instruct the patient to push down through their affected foot and roll their bottom over then roll their shoulders over Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your back with your affected leg bent and your affected arm across your body. Practice rolling on the spot. 2. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Place a pillow behind the back so that the patient is quarter off supine. More advanced: 1. 2. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Practice pushing down through your affected foot and rolling your bottom over then rolling your shoulders over. Position the patient on a soft mattress.Exercise booklet for { }316 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Rolling over Therapist's aim To improve the ability to roll over in order to sit up. 3. Client's aim To improve your ability to roll over in order to sit up. Position the patient in supine with their arms beside them. Repeat __ times. Provide assistance to hold the affected foot on the bed.

then rotating your trunk.Exercise booklet for { }317 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Rolling over on the spot Therapist's aim To improve the ability to roll over in bed. Less advanced: 1. Practice rolling over without staying on the same spot. Practice rolling over on the spot by firstly pushing through your affected leg and turning your hips. Progressions and variations Repeat __ times. then rotating their trunk. 2. Position the patient in supine with their arms beside them. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Client's aim To improve your ability to roll over in bed. Provide assistance to hold the affected leg in a flexed position. Position the patient on a soft mattress. Instruct the patient to roll over on the spot by firstly pushing through their affected leg and turning their hips. More advanced: 1. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in supine with their affected hip and knee flexed and their affected arm across their body. 2. Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your back with your affected leg bent and your affected arm across your body.

Roll the ball in smaller circles. Increase speed of task. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Client's aim To improve your ability to move your leg in different directions when standing. Repeat __ times.Exercise booklet for { }318 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Rolling the foot on a ball while standing Therapist's aim To improve the ability to move the leg in different directions when standing. Practice rolling the ball around in circles on the floor with your affected foot. Roll the ball in larger circles. 2. 2. Instruct the patient to roll the ball around in circles on the floor with their affected foot. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing on their unaffected leg with their affected foot resting on a ball in front of them. Client's instructions Position yourself standing on your unaffected leg with your affected foot resting on a ball in front of you. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Provide hand support for balance. More advanced: 1.

Use only one ball. Use larger balls. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with two small balls in their hand. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with two small balls in your hand. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Client's aim To improve your ability to manipulate small objects with your hand. 2. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Repeat __ times. Practice rolling the balls around in the palm of your hand using only your thumb. Instruct the patient to roll the balls around in the palm of their hand using only their thumb. More advanced: 1. Use smaller balls.Exercise booklet for { }319 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Rolling two balls around in the hand with the thumb Therapist's aim To improve the ability to manipulate small objects with the hand.

2.Exercise booklet for { }320 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Rotating the forearm to targets Therapist's aim To improve the ability to pronate and supinate the forearm. Ensure that your shoulder does not move. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Client's aim To improve your ability to rotate your forearm. Increase distance to the targets. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting in front of a table with their elbow bent. Move the ruler to touch the table (use a mark on the table as a target). Ensure that the movement does not occur at the shoulder. Instruct the patient to pronate and supinate their forearm until the ruler touches the targets. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Repeat __ times. More advanced: 1. a ruler taped to your wrist and two targets on either side of your wrist. a ruler taped to their wrist and two targets on either side of their wrist. Decrease distance to the targets. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting in front of a table with your elbow bent. Practice rotating your forearm to touch the ruler on each of the targets.

2. Increase the distance to the table. Ensure that the back is kept against the chair and the piece of paper is not dropped. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with their elbow bent at 90 degrees and a piece of paper in between their upper arm and chest. Position a table on the outside of the patient and place a cup of water in their hand.Exercise booklet for { }321 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Rotating the shoulder outwards while holding a cup Therapist's aim To improve the ability to reach. Practice moving a cup of water outwards to a table beside you without spilling it. Rotate the shoulder outwards without holding onto the cup. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Ensure that your back is kept against the Repeat __ times. chair and the piece of paper is not dropped. Decrease the distance to the table. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with your elbow bent at right angles and a piece of paper in between your upper arm and the side of your chest. Instruct the patient to move the cup outwards to the table without spilling the water. Client's aim To improve your ability to reach. More advanced: 1.

not dropped. Client's aim To improve your ability to reach for objects. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with their elbow bent at 90 degrees and a piece of paper in between their upper arm and chest. Decrease the distance to the table. Practice moving your hand outwards to a table beside you.Exercise booklet for { }322 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Rotating the shoulder to a target Therapist's aim To improve the ability to reach for objects. More advanced: 1. Instruct the patient to move their hand outwards to the table. Ensure that the back is kept against the chair and the piece of paper is not dropped. Increase the distance to the table. Ensure that your back is kept against the chair and the piece of paper is Repeat __ times. Position a table slightly to the side of the patient. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with your elbow bent at right angles and a piece of paper in between your upper arm and the side of your chest. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1.

Place obstacles further apart. Client's instructions Position yourself standing with obstacles placed on the floor in front of you. 2. Practice running around the obstacles without touching them. More advanced: 1. Instruct the patient to run around the obstacles without touching them. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with obstacles placed on the floor in front of them. Add a concurrent task. Client's aim To improve your ability to run. folded cardboard) to reduce the risk of falling if obstacle contacted.Exercise booklet for { }323 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Running around obstacles Therapist's aim To improve the ability to run. Fri Right . Use flexible obstacles (eg. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Repeat __ times. Place obstacles closer together. 2.

Increase the width of the lines. Client's instructions Position yourself standing with two lines on the floor in front of you. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with two lines on the floor in front of them. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Instruct the patient to run in between the lines without touching them. Practice running in between the lines without touching them. Client's aim To improve your ability to run with your feet closer together. 2. More advanced: 1. Decrease the width of the lines. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Repeat __ times.Exercise booklet for { }324 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Running between lines Therapist's aim To improve the ability to run with a smaller base of support. Add a concurrent task.

Add a concurrent task. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with lines evenly spaced across the floor in front of them. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Client's instructions Position yourself standing with lines evenly spaced across the floor in front of you. Decrease the distance between the lines. Ensure that each heel lands on the floor in front of the line. More advanced: 1. Ensure that heel strike occurs in front of the lines.Exercise booklet for { }325 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Running forwards over lines Therapist's aim To improve the ability to run. Less advanced: 1. Progressions and variations Repeat __ times. Practice running forwards over the lines without stepping on them. Client's aim To improve your ability to run. Instruct the patient to run forwards over the lines. 2. Increase the distance between the lines.

lifting their knees to touch the rope or tape. Increase the Repeat __ times. lifting your knees to touch the rope or tape. Client's aim To improve your ability to run.Exercise booklet for { }326 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Running on the spot Therapist's aim To improve the ability to run. Increase speed of task. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing between two tables with a rope or tape stretched between them. More advanced: 1. Decrease the height of the rope or tape. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Ensure that your knees are lifted up to the same height and your arms swing (like when running). Client's instructions Position yourself standing between two tables with a rope or tape stretched between them. Ensure that both hips flex equally and reciprocal arm swing is achieved. 2. height of the rope or tape. Practice running on the spot. Instruct the patient to run on the spot.

Exercise booklet for { }327 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Seated walking Therapist's aim To strengthen the knee flexors. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting on a seat with wheels. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the back of your thigh. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Practice walking the seat across the floor. Instruct the patient to walk the seat across the floor. Repeat __ times. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting on a seat with wheels. Ensure that the seat does not tip. Precautions 1.

Instruct the patient to move the pen up and down using their index finger. Client's aim To improve your ability to manipulate a pen in your hand. Ensure that the wrist and forearm do not move and that manipulation of the pen is performed with the thumb and fingers only. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with their forearm resting on a table. Ensure that your wrist and forearm are kept still and that the manipulation of the pen is performed with your thumb and fingers only. Position the pen resting against your middle finger and the webspace of your hand with your index finger and thumb on top of the pen. More advanced: 1. middle finger and thumb. Decrease the distance that the pen moves up and down. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . middle finger and thumb only.Exercise booklet for { }328 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Shifting a pen up and down within the hand (Caterpillar) Therapist's aim To improve the ability to manipulate a pen with the hand. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Increase the distance that the pen moves up and down. the barrel to use as feedback. Practice moving the pen up and down using only your index finger. Position the pen resting against their middle finger and webspace with their index finger and thumb on top of the pen. Mark a pen with lines around the barrel to use as feedback. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with your forearm resting on a table. Mark a pen with lines around Repeat __ times.

Decrease the distance to the targets. Increase the distance to the targets. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Place two targets on either side of their hand which require a small movement in mid range. Place two targets on either side of their hands. Ensure that the elbow remains extended. 2. Ensure that Perform __ sets of __ reps. Instruct the patient to abduct and adduct their shoulder to touch the targets. sessions per week.Exercise booklet for { }329 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Shoulder abductor and adductor strengthening in supine using slings Therapist's aim To strengthen the shoulder abductors and adductors. More advanced: 1. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in supine with slings from their elbow and hand attached to a point above their shoulder. Practice taking your arm away from you and back again to touch the targets with your hand. Do__ your elbow remains straight. Apply a splint to keep the arm straight 2. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the side and top of your shoulder. Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your back with slings from your elbow and hand attached to a point above your shoulder. Progress using strength training principles.

Finish with your arm above your head. Ensure that you keep your elbow straight. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with their shoulder adducted. Fri Right Left Right Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu . Progress using strength training principles. Perform __ sets of __ reps. Precautions 1. Start with your arm down beside your body. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the side and top of your shoulder.Exercise booklet for { }330 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Shoulder abductor strengthening in sitting using free weights Therapist's aim To strengthen the shoulder abductors. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting in a chair. Progressions and variations More advanced: 1. Instruct the patient to abduct their shoulder with their elbow extended. Do__ sessions per week. Ensure that the chair does not tip backwards.

Ensure that you keep your elbow straight. Instruct the patient to abduct their shoulder with their elbow extended. Adjust the pulley so that the direction of pull opposes shoulder abduction. Progressions and variations Perform __ sets of __ reps. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Do__ More advanced: 1. sessions per week. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting perpendicular to the pulleys.Exercise booklet for { }331 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Shoulder abductor strengthening in sitting using pulleys Therapist's aim To strengthen the shoulder abductors. Finish with your arm out to the side. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the side and top of your shoulder. Progress using strength training principles. Start with your arm beside your body. Precautions 1. Adjust the pulley so that the direction of pull is upwards from the floor. Ensure that the chair does not tip backwards. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting side-on to the pulley.

Adjust the theraband so that the direction of pull opposes shoulder abduction. Do__ sessions per week.Exercise booklet for { }332 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Shoulder abductor strengthening in sitting using theraband Therapist's aim To strengthen the shoulder abductors. Adjust the theraband so that the direction of pull is upwards from the floor. Downgrade the colour of the theraband. Finish with your arm out to the side. Precautions 1. colour of the theraband. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the side and top of your shoulder. Ensure that the chair does not tip backwards. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting side-on to the theraband. More advanced: 1. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Upgrade the Perform __ sets of __ reps. Start with your arm beside your body. Instruct the patient to abduct their shoulder while maintaining elbow extension. Ensure that you keep your elbow straight. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with their shoulder adducted.

Do__ sessions per week. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1.Exercise booklet for { }333 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Shoulder abductor strengthening in standing using theraband Therapist's aim To strengthen the shoulder abductors. Client's instructions Position yourself standing side-on to the theraband. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with their shoulder adducted. Finish with your arm out to the side. colour of the theraband. Start with your arm beside your body. Instruct the patient to abduct their shoulder while maintaining elbow extension. Adjust the theraband so that the direction of pull is diagonally up from your opposite side. Downgrade the colour of the theraband. Ensure that you keep your elbow straight. Upgrade the Perform __ sets of __ reps. Adjust the theraband so that the direction of pull opposes shoulder abduction. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the side and top of your shoulder. More advanced: 1.

Adjust the theraband so that the direction of pull is from the bottom of the bed. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Instruct the patient to abduct their shoulder while maintaining elbow extension. Finish with your arm away from your body. colour of the theraband. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in supine with their shoulder adducted. Adjust the theraband so that the direction of pull opposes shoulder abduction. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the side and top of your shoulder. Upgrade the Perform __ sets of __ reps.Exercise booklet for { }334 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Shoulder abductor strengthening in supine using theraband Therapist's aim To strengthen the shoulder abductors. More advanced: 1. Do__ sessions per week. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Start with your arm beside your body. Ensure that you keep your elbow straight. Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your back. Downgrade the colour of the theraband.

Perform __ sets of __ reps. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Finish with your arms out from your body. Progressions and variations More advanced: 1. Ensure that the chair does not tip backwards. 1. Progress using strength training principles. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting facing the frame of the Uppertone with their elbows under the abductor pads.Exercise booklet for { }335 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Shoulder abductor strengthening using Uppertone Therapist's aim To strengthen the shoulder abductors. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting facing the frame of the Uppertone with your elbows under the pads. Instruct the patient to abduct their shoulders. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the side and top of your shoulder. Do__ Precautions sessions per week. Start with your elbows tucked in beside your body.

Instruct the patient to abduct their shoulder with their elbow extended. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Progress using strength training principles. Finish with your arm above your head. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in supine with their shoulder adducted and a weight around their wrist. Do__ sessions per week. Progressions and variations More advanced: 1.Exercise booklet for { }336 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Shoulder abductor/adductor strengthening in supine using free weights Therapist's aim To strengthen the shoulder abductors and adductors. Start with your arm down beside your body. top and inside of your shoulder. Perform __ sets of __ reps. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the side. Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your back with a weight around your wrist. Ensure that you keep your elbow straight.

sessions per week. Ensure that the chair does not tip backwards. Finish with your arm beside your body.Exercise booklet for { }337 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Shoulder adductor strengthening in sitting using pulleys Therapist's aim To strengthen the shoulder adductors. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting perpendicular to the pulleys. Start with your arm out to the side. Precautions 1. Do__ More advanced: 1. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting side-on to the pulleys. Adjust the pulley system so that the direction of pull opposes shoulder adduction. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Ensure that you keep your elbow straight. Progress using strength training principles. Instruct the patient to adduct their shoulder with their elbow extended. Progressions and variations Perform __ sets of __ reps. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles in the front of your chest. Adjust the pulley system so that the direction of pull is downwards from the ceiling.

Finish with your arm beside your body. Instruct the patient to adduct their shoulder while maintaining elbow extension. colour of the theraband. Precautions 1. Downgrade the colour of the theraband. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting side-on to the theraband. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Upgrade the Perform __ sets of __ reps. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Start with your arm out to the side. Adjust the theraband so that the direction of pull is downwards from the ceiling. Ensure that you keep your elbow straight.Exercise booklet for { }338 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Shoulder adductor strengthening in sitting using theraband Therapist's aim To strengthen the shoulder adductors. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles in the front of your chest. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with their shoulder abducted. Ensure that the chair does not tip backwards. Adjust the theraband so that the direction of pull opposes shoulder adduction. More advanced: 1. Do__ sessions per week.

Finish with your elbows tucked in beside your body. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles in the front of your chest. Progressions and variations More advanced: 1.Exercise booklet for { }339 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Shoulder adductor strengthening in sitting using Uppertone Therapist's aim To strengthen the shoulder adductors. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Perform __ sets of __ reps. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting facing the frame of the Uppertone with their elbows on the adductor pads. Instruct the patient to adduct their shoulders. Fri Right . Start with your arms out from your body. Precautions 1. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting facing the frame of the Uppertone with your elbows on the pads. Do__ sessions per week. Progress using strength training principles. Ensure that the chair does not tip backwards.

Client's instructions Position yourself standing side-on to the theraband. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the front and side of your chest. Ensure that you keep your elbow straight.Exercise booklet for { }340 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Shoulder adductor strengthening in standing using theraband Therapist's aim To strengthen the shoulder adductors. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Start with your arm out to the side. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with their shoulder abducted. Adjust the theraband so that the direction of pull is diagonally downwards towards your side. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Instruct the patient to adduct their shoulder while maintaining elbow extension. Upgrade the Perform __ sets of __ reps. colour of the theraband. Adjust the theraband so that the direction of pull opposes shoulder adduction. More advanced: 1. Downgrade the colour of the theraband. Finish with your arm beside your body. Do__ sessions per week.

Finish with your arm beside your body. Ensure that you keep your elbow straight. Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your back. Adjust the theraband so that the direction of pull is from the top of the bed. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles in the front of your chest. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in supine with their shoulder abducted.Exercise booklet for { }341 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Shoulder adductor strengthening in supine using theraband Therapist's aim To strengthen the shoulder adductors. Downgrade the colour of the theraband. Upgrade the Perform __ sets of __ reps. Instruct the patient to adduct their shoulder while maintaining elbow extension. Start with your arm away from your body. More advanced: 1. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. colour of the theraband. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Adjust the theraband so that the direction of pull opposes shoulder adduction. Do__ sessions per week.

Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with your arm resting on a table beside you. Instruct the patient to depress their shoulder while keeping their elbow and hand on the table. Practice depressing the shoulder then lifting the elbow off the table. Client's aim To improve your ability to reach for objects. Practice depressing the shoulder then lifting the elbow and hand off the table. Practice lowering your shoulder while keeping your elbow and hand on the table. Progressions and variations More advanced: 1. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with their shoulder abducted approximately 90 degrees.Exercise booklet for { }342 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Shoulder depression with arm in abduction Therapist's aim To improve the ability to reach for objects. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Repeat __ times. their elbow bent and their forearm resting on a table beside them. 2. your shoulder out to the side and your elbow bent.

Do__ sessions per week. Perform __ sets of __ reps. Start with your shoulders elevated. Progress using strength training principles. Ensure that the chair does not tip backwards. Precautions 1. Instruct the patient to depress their shoulders. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with slings supporting their elbows. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with slings supporting your elbows.Exercise booklet for { }343 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Shoulder depressor strengthening in sitting using slings Therapist's aim To strengthen the shoulder depressors. Finish with your shoulders lowered. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles that lower your shoulder girdle. Progressions and variations More advanced: 1. Thu Fri Right Left Right Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left .

Instruct the patient to depress their shoulders while keeping their elbows extended. 1. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting facing the Uppertone with their hands in the slings. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles that lower your shoulder girdle.Exercise booklet for { }344 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Shoulder depressor strengthening in sitting using Uppertone Therapist's aim To strengthen the shoulder depressors. Progress using strength training principles. Start with your shoulders raised. Ensure that you keep your elbows straight. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Ensure that the chair does not tip backwards. Finish with your shoulders lowered. Do__ Precautions sessions per week. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting facing the Uppertone with your hands in the slings. Perform __ sets of __ reps. Progressions and variations More advanced: 1.

elbow flexors and forearm pronators. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with their arms supported on a table. Lower the height of the tables. Place a weight over your wrist. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Impaired or absent sensation of stretch. Increase the weight on the wrist. 2.Exercise booklet for { }345 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Shoulder extensor and forearm pronator stretch Therapist's aim To stretch or maintain length of the shoulder extensors. Position your arms out in front of your body with your elbow straight and your palms facing upwards. 2. arms and wrists. forearms in supination and elbows in extension. Precautions 1. Shoulder pain. Increase the height of the tables. Client's aim To stretch or maintain range in your shoulders. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with your arms supported on a table. More advanced: 1. Hold for __ minutes. Place a weight over their wrist. Position their shoulders in 90 degrees flexion.

Do__ sessions per week. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with their arm beside their body. Perform __ sets of __ reps. Progress using strength training principles. Finish with your arm behind your body. Precautions 1. Fri Right Left Right Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu . Client's instructions Position yourself sitting in a chair. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the back of your shoulder. Ensure that the chair does not tip backwards.Exercise booklet for { }346 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Shoulder extensor strengthening in sitting using free weights Therapist's aim To strengthen the shoulder extensors. Start with your arm beside your body. Progressions and variations More advanced: 1. Instruct the patient to extend their shoulder. Ensure that you keep your elbow straight.

Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with an airsplint around their elbow and a pulley around their wrist. Start with your arm in front of your body. sessions per week. Progressions and variations Perform __ sets of __ reps. Adjust the pulley so that the direction of pull is downwards from the ceiling. Do__ More advanced: 1. Finish with your arm beside your body. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the back of your shoulder. Adjust the pulley so that the direction of pull opposes shoulder extension.Exercise booklet for { }347 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Shoulder extensor strengthening in sitting using pulleys Therapist's aim To strengthen the shoulder extensors. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Progress using strength training principles. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with an airsplint around your elbow and a pulley around your wrist. Instruct the patient to extend their shoulder.

Do__ More advanced: 1. Adjust the pulley system so that the direction of pull is in alignment with the height of your shoulder. Instruct the patient to extend their shoulder with their elbow extended. Ensure that you keep your elbow straight. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the back of your shoulder. Precautions 1. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting facing the pulleys. Adjust the pulley system so that the direction of pull opposes shoulder extension. sessions per week. Finish with your arm beside your body. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 .Exercise booklet for { }348 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Shoulder extensor strengthening in sitting using pulleys Therapist's aim To strengthen the shoulder extensors. Ensure that the chair does not tip backwards. Progressions and variations Perform __ sets of __ reps. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting facing the pulleys. Progress using strength training principles. Start with your arm out in front of you.

Progress using strength training principles. Do__ More advanced: 1. Precautions 1. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting facing the pulleys. Progressions and variations Perform __ sets of __ reps.Exercise booklet for { }349 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Shoulder extensor strengthening in sitting using pulleys Therapist's aim To strengthen the shoulder extensors. Finish with your elbow tucked beside your body and your elbow bent. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting facing the pulleys. sessions per week. Start with your arm out in front of you and your elbow straight. Adjust the pulley system so that the direction of pull opposes shoulder extension. Ensure that the chair does not tip backwards. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the back of your shoulder. Adjust the pulley system so that the direction of pull is in alignment with the height of your elbow. Instruct the patient to extend their shoulder and flex their elbow.

Adjust the pulley system so that the direction of pull opposes shoulder extension. Do__ More advanced: 1. Precautions 1. Instruct the patient to extend their shoulder with their elbow extended. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting facing away from the pulley. Ensure that the chair does not tip backwards. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting facing away from the pulleys. Progressions and variations Perform __ sets of __ reps.Exercise booklet for { }350 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Shoulder extensor strengthening in sitting using pulleys Therapist's aim To strengthen the shoulder extensors. Progress using strength training principles. sessions per week. Ensure that you keep your elbow straight. Adjust the pulley so that the direction of pull is downwards from the ceiling. Start with your arm in front of your body. Finish with your arm down beside your body. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the back of your shoulder.

Adjust the theraband so that the direction of pull opposes shoulder extension. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with their shoulder flexed. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting facing the theraband. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Precautions 1. colour of the theraband. Upgrade the Perform __ sets of __ reps. Instruct the patient to extend their shoulder while maintaining elbow extension. Start with your arm out in front of you. Downgrade the colour of the theraband. More advanced: 1. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Ensure that the chair does not tip backwards.Exercise booklet for { }351 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Shoulder extensor strengthening in sitting using theraband Therapist's aim To strengthen the shoulder extensors. Adjust the theraband so that the direction of pull is downwards from the ceiling. Finish with your arm down beside your body. Ensure that you keep your elbow straight. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the back of your shoulder. Do__ sessions per week.

Ensure that the chair does not tip backwards. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Adjust the theraband so that the direction of pull opposes shoulder extension. Downgrade the colour of the theraband. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting facing the theraband.Exercise booklet for { }352 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Shoulder extensor strengthening in sitting using theraband Therapist's aim To strengthen the shoulder extensors. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Instruct the patient to extend their shoulder and flex their elbow. Precautions 1. Do__ sessions per week. More advanced: 1. colour of the theraband. Upgrade the Perform __ sets of __ reps. Finish with your elbow bent and tucked in beside your body. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with their shoulder flexed. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the back of your shoulder. Start with your arm out in front of you. Adjust the theraband so that the direction of pull is aligned with your shoulder.

Instruct the patient to extend their shoulder while maintaining elbow extension. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with their shoulder flexed. Precautions 1. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Upgrade the Perform __ sets of __ reps. Ensure that the chair does not tip backwards. Finish with your arm down beside your body. Adjust the theraband so that the direction of pull opposes shoulder extension. Adjust the theraband so that the direction of pull is downwards from the ceiling. More advanced: 1. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Downgrade the colour of the theraband. colour of the theraband. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the back of your shoulder. Ensure that you keep your elbow straight. Start with your arm in front of your body. Do__ sessions per week. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting facing away from the theraband.Exercise booklet for { }353 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Shoulder extensor strengthening in sitting using theraband Therapist's aim To strengthen the shoulder extensors.

Progress using strength training principles. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting facing the frame of the Uppertone with their hands wedged in the Uppertone handles. Start with your arms out straight in front of you. Instruct the patient to extend their shoulders. Finish with your elbows tucked beside your body. Progressions and variations More advanced: 1. Do__ Precautions sessions per week. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the back of your shoulder. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting facing the frame of the Uppertone with your hands wedged in the Uppertone handles. 1. Ensure that the chair does not tip backwards.Exercise booklet for { }354 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Shoulder extensor strengthening in sitting using Uppertone Therapist's aim To strengthen the shoulder extensors. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Perform __ sets of __ reps.

More advanced: 1. Start with your arm in front of your body. colour of the theraband. Ensure that you keep your elbow straight. Upgrade the sessions per week. Perform __ sets of __ reps. Client's instructions Position yourself standing facing towards the theraband. Finish with your arm behind your body. Downgrade the colour of the theraband.Exercise booklet for { }355 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Shoulder extensor strengthening in standing using theraband Therapist's aim To strengthen the shoulder extensors. Instruct the patient to extend their shoulder while maintaining elbow extension. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with their shoulder flexed. Do__ Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the back of your shoulder. Adjust the theraband so that the direction of pull is at wrist level and opposes shoulder extension. Adjust the theraband so that the direction of pull is from in front of you at the level of your wrist.

Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Upgrade the Perform __ sets of __ reps. Do__ colour of the theraband. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the back of your shoulder. Adjust the theraband so that the direction of pull is from the top of the bed. Finish with your arm beside your body. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in supine with their shoulder flexed. Ensure that you keep your elbow straight. Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your back. sessions per week. More advanced: 1. Downgrade the colour of the theraband.Exercise booklet for { }356 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Shoulder extensor strengthening in supine using theraband Therapist's aim To strengthen the shoulder extensors. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Instruct the patient to extend their shoulder. Adjust the theraband so that the direction of pull opposes shoulder extension. Start with your arm above your head and your elbow straight.

Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your stomach with your arm over the edge of the bed. Finish with your arm beside your body. Progress using strength training principles. Instruct the patient to extend their shoulder while maintaining elbow extension. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Perform __ sets of __ reps. Progressions and variations More advanced: 1. Do__ sessions per week. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in prone with their arm over the edge of the bed and their shoulder flexed. Start with your arm above your head.Exercise booklet for { }357 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Shoulder extensor/flexor strengthening in prone using free weights Therapist's aim To strengthen the shoulder flexors/extensors. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the front and back of your shoulder. Ensure that you keep your elbow straight.

Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your stomach with your upper arm supported on the bed. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Do__ sessions per week. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in prone with their upper arm supported on the bed. Progress using strength training principles. Instruct the patient to externally rotate their shoulder. Client's aim To strengthen your shoulder muscles. Progressions and variations More advanced: 1. Ensure that you keep you elbow bent. Start with your hand down towards the floor. Perform __ sets of __ reps.Exercise booklet for { }358 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Shoulder external rotator strengthening in prone using free weights Therapist's aim To strengthen the shoulder external rotators. Finish with your hand up towards the bed.

Client's aim To strengthen your shoulder muscles. Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your side. Perform __ sets of __ reps. Do__ sessions per week. Progressions and variations More advanced: 1. Start with your top elbow bent with your hand across your body.Exercise booklet for { }359 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Shoulder external rotator strengthening in sidelying using free weights Therapist's aim To strengthen the shoulder external rotators. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sidelying with their elbow flexed. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Finish with your hand away from your body. Instruct the patient to externally rotate their shoulder. Progress using strength training principles. Ensure that you keep your elbow bent and tucked in beside your body.

Ensure that the chair does not tip backwards. Start with your hand pointing towards the floor. Finish with your hand pointing towards the ceiling. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Perform __ sets of __ reps. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with your arm out to the side and your elbow bent. Instruct the patient to externally rotate their shoulder. Fri Right . Precautions 1. More advanced: 1. Client's aim To strengthen your shoulder muscles. Progress using strength training principles. Do__ sessions per week. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with their shoulder abducted and elbow flexed.Exercise booklet for { }360 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Shoulder external rotator strengthening in sitting using free weights Therapist's aim To strengthen the shoulder external rotators. Support the upper arm on a table. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1.

Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with their shoulder abducted and supported on a table.Exercise booklet for { }361 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Shoulder external rotator strengthening in sitting using free weights with arm supported Therapist's aim To strengthen the shoulder external rotators. Do__ 1. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with your arm out to the side supported on a table and your elbow bent. Finish with your hand pointing towards the ceiling. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Increase the amount of upper arm support on the table. Progress using strength training principles. Instruct the patient to externally rotate their shoulder. Start with your hand pointing towards the floor. sessions per week. More advanced: Perform __ sets of __ reps. Client's aim To strengthen your shoulder muscles.

Do__ Progressions and variations sessions per week. Adjust the pulley system so that the direction of pull is in alignment with the height of your elbow. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting perpendicular to the pulleys. Support the elbow on a table. Progress using strength training principles. Instruct the patient to externally rotate their shoulder with their elbow flexed 90 degrees. Ensure that the chair does not tip backwards. Perform __ sets of __ reps.Exercise booklet for { }362 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Shoulder external rotator strengthening in sitting using pulleys Therapist's aim To strengthen the shoulder external rotators. Ensure that you keep your elbow bent and tucked in beside your body. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Start with your far hand across your chest and your elbow bent. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting side-on to the pulleys. Less Advanced: 1. More advanced: 1. Client's aim To strengthen your shoulder muscles. Adjust the pulley system so that the direction of pull opposes shoulder external rotation. Finish with your hand out to the side. Precautions 1.

Downgrade the colour of the theraband. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting side-on to the theraband. Perform __ sets of __ reps. Client's aim To strengthen your shoulder muscles. Adjust the theraband so that the direction of pull is in alignment with the height of your elbow. Ensure that the chair does not tip backwards. Precautions 1. Instruct the patient to externally rotate their shoulder while maintaining elbow flexion at 90 degrees. More advanced: 1. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with their elbow flexed. Adjust the theraband so that the direction of pull opposes shoulder external rotation. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . colour of the theraband. Upgrade the sessions per week.Exercise booklet for { }363 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Shoulder external rotator strengthening in sitting using theraband Therapist's aim To strengthen the shoulder external rotators. Ensure that you keep your elbow bent and tucked in beside your body. Start with your far hand across your body and your elbow bent. Do__ Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Finish with your hand out to the side.

Ensure that the chair does not tip backwards. Finish with your hand away from your body. Start with your hand across your body.Exercise booklet for { }364 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Shoulder external rotator strengthening in sitting using Uppertone Therapist's aim To strengthen the shoulder external rotators. Precautions 1. Progressions and variations More advanced: 1. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting adjacent to the frame of the Uppertone with the back of their hand under the lever arm. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Hold for __ minutes. Client's aim To strengthen your shoulder muscles. Instruct the patient to externally rotate their shoulder. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting adjacent to the frame of the Uppertone with the back of your hand under the lever arm. Progress using strength training principles.

Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with their elbow flexed. Downgrade the colour of the theraband. Ensure that you keep your elbow bent and tucked in beside your body. Start with your far hand across your body and your elbow bent.Exercise booklet for { }365 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Shoulder external rotator strengthening in standing using theraband Therapist's aim To strengthen the shoulder external rotators. Do__ Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Upgrade the sessions per week. Client's instructions Position yourself standing side-on to the theraband. Client's aim To strengthen your shoulder muscles. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Adjust the theraband so that the direction of pull opposes shoulder external rotation. Perform __ sets of __ reps. Finish with your hand out to the side. More advanced: 1. Instruct the patient to externally rotate their shoulder while maintaining elbow flexion at 90 degrees. colour of the theraband. Adjust the theraband so that the direction of pull is at the level of your elbow.

Instruct the patient to externally rotate their shoulder. Perform __ sets of __ reps. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in supine with their shoulder abducted and internally rotated and their elbow flexed. Finish with your hand pointing towards the ceiling. Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your back with your arm out to the side of your body and your elbow bent. Do__ sessions per week. Fri Right Left Right Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu . More advanced: 1. Increase the amount of upper arm support on the plinth. Start with your hand pointing towards the floor.Exercise booklet for { }366 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Shoulder external rotator strengthening in supine using free weights Therapist's aim To strengthen the shoulder external rotators. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Progress using strength training principles. Client's aim To strengthen your shoulder muscles.

Therapist's instructions Position the patient in supine with their shoulder adducted and internally rotated and their elbow flexed. Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your back. More advanced: 1. Start with your elbow bent and your hand across your body. Adjust the theraband so that the direction of pull is in alignment with your elbow. Ensure that you keep your elbow bent and Perform __ sets of __ reps. Adjust the theraband so that the direction of pull opposes shoulder external rotation. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Downgrade the colour of the theraband. sessions per week. Client's aim To strengthen your shoulder muscles. Instruct the patient to externally rotate their shoulder while maintaining elbow flexion at 90 degrees. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Do__ tucked in beside your body. Upgrade the colour of the theraband.Exercise booklet for { }367 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Shoulder external rotator strengthening in supine using theraband Therapist's aim To strengthen the shoulder external rotators. Finish with your hand away from your body.

Add resistance in mid range. 3. Instruct the patient to externally rotate and internally rotate their shoulder to move their hand to touch the targets. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your back with your shoulder out to the side and your elbow bent Perform __ sets of __ reps. Practice in inner range. Increase the distance to the targets. handle to a spring and adjust the stretch on the spring so that your forearm is held vertically. 4. Decrease the distance to the targets. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in supine with their shoulder abducted to 45 degrees and their elbow bent to 90 degrees. Position a handle in your hand and fasten using a bandage. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Ensure that your elbow remains bent. Do__ to 90 degrees. 5. Attach the handle to a spring and adjust the stretch on the spring so that the forearm is held vertically. Increase speed of task. Practice moving your hand to touch the targets by rotating your shoulder inwards and outwards. Attach the sessions per week. More advanced: 1. 2. Ensure that the elbow remains bent.Exercise booklet for { }368 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Shoulder external/internal rotator strengthening in supine using springs Therapist's aim To strengthen the shoulder internal and external rotators. Place two targets on either side of their forearm which require a small movement in mid range. Progress using strength training principles. Position a handle in their hand and fasten using a bandage. Client's aim To strengthen your shoulder muscles. Place targets on either side of your forearm.

sessions per week. Instruct the patient to flex their shoulder while keeping their elbow extended. Ensure that the chair does not tip backwards. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Progressions and variations More advanced: 1. Precautions Perform __ sets of __ reps. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the front of your shoulder.Exercise booklet for { }369 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Shoulder flexor strengthening in sitting using free weights Therapist's aim To strengthen the shoulder flexors. Finish with your arm above your head. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting in a chair. Progress using strength training principles. Ensure that you keep your elbow straight. Start with your arm down beside your body. Do__ 1. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with their elbow and shoulder extended.

Instruct the patient to flex their shoulder with their elbow extended. Ensure that you keep your elbow straight. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Client's instructions Position yourself sitting facing away from the pulley. sessions per week. Ensure that the chair does not tip backwards. Adjust the pulley system so that the direction of pull is upwards from the floor. Start with your arm down beside your body. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting facing away from the pulley. Do__ More advanced: 1. Precautions 1. Progressions and variations Perform __ sets of __ reps. Finish with your arm above your head.Exercise booklet for { }370 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Shoulder flexor strengthening in sitting using pulleys Therapist's aim To strengthen the shoulder flexors. Adjust the pulley system so that the direction of pull opposes shoulder flexion. Progress using strength training principles. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the front of your shoulder.

Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the front of your shoulder. Ensure that the chair does not tip backwards. Adjust the theraband so that the direction of pull opposes shoulder flexion. Downgrade the colour of the theraband. Adjust the theraband so that the direction of pull is upwards from the floor. colour of the theraband. Finish with your arm above your head. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Precautions 1. More advanced: 1. Instruct the patient to flex their shoulder while maintaining elbow extension. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with their shoulder and elbow extended. Start with your arm down beside your body. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting facing away from the theraband. Upgrade the Perform __ sets of __ reps. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1.Exercise booklet for { }371 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Shoulder flexor strengthening in sitting using theraband Therapist's aim To strengthen the shoulder flexors. Do__ sessions per week. Ensure that you keep your elbow straight.

Do__ More advanced: 1. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting facing away from the frame of the Uppertone with their hands wedged in the Uppertone handles. Precautions 1. Ensure that the chair does not tip backwards. Progress using strength training principles. Finish with your arm arms out straight in front of you. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting facing away from the frame of the Uppertone with your hands wedged in the Uppertone handles. Instruct the patient to flex their shoulders and extend their elbows. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the front of your chest and shoulder. Progressions and variations Perform __ sets of __ reps. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 .Exercise booklet for { }372 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Shoulder flexor strengthening in sitting using Uppertone Therapist's aim To strengthen the shoulder adductors and flexors. sessions per week. Start with your hands to the side of your chest.

Start with your arm down beside your body. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the front of your shoulder. Downgrade the colour of the theraband. Instruct the patient to flex their shoulder while maintaining elbow extension. Adjust the theraband so that the direction of pull is at the level of your wrist. Upgrade the Perform __ sets of __ reps. Adjust the theraband so that the direction of pull opposes shoulder flexion. Client's instructions Position yourself standing facing away from the theraband. Ensure that you keep your elbow straight. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1.Exercise booklet for { }373 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Shoulder flexor strengthening in standing using theraband Therapist's aim To strengthen the shoulder flexors. More advanced: 1. Do__ sessions per week. colour of the theraband. Finish with your arm in front of you. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with their shoulder and elbow extended.

Progress using strength training principles. Instruct the patient to flex their shoulder.Exercise booklet for { }374 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Shoulder flexor strengthening in supine using free weights Therapist's aim To strengthen the shoulder flexors. Finish with your arm at 90 degrees to your body. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the front of your shoulder. Progressions and variations More advanced: 1. Start with your arm beside your body. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in supine with their elbow extended. Do__ sessions per week. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Perform __ sets of __ reps. Ensure that you keep your elbow straight. Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your back.

Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Upgrade the Perform __ sets of __ reps. Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your back. Ensure that you keep your elbow straight. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in supine with their shoulder and elbow extended. Start with your arm beside your body on the bed. Finish with your arm above your body. colour of the theraband. Adjust the theraband so that the direction of pull opposes shoulder flexion. Downgrade the colour of the theraband. More advanced: 1. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the front of your shoulder. Do__ sessions per week. Adjust the theraband so that the direction of pull is from the bottom of the bed.Exercise booklet for { }375 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Shoulder flexor strengthening in supine using theraband Therapist's aim To strengthen the shoulder flexors. Instruct the patient to flex their shoulder while maintaining elbow extension. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right .

Finish with your arm out in front of your body. More advanced: Perform __ sets of __ reps. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sidelying with their uppermost arm extended in an elbow splint and a slideboard under their arm. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the front and back of your shoulder. sessions per week. Use talcum powder on the slideboard to reduce friction.Exercise booklet for { }376 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Shoulder flexor/extensor strengthening in sidelying using a slideboard Therapist's aim To strengthen the shoulder flexors and extensors. Progress using strength training principles. Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your side with a splint on your uppermost arm and a slideboard under your arm. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Instruct the patient to flex and extend their shoulder. Do__ 1. Start with your arm down beside your body.

Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your side with slings supporting your arm. Do__ sessions per week. Perform __ sets of __ reps. Start with your arm beside your body. Progress using strength training principles. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the front and back of your shoulder. Finish with your arm out in front of your body. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right .Exercise booklet for { }377 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Shoulder flexor/extensor strengthening in sidelying using slings Therapist's aim To strengthen the shoulder flexors/extensors. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sidelying with slings supporting their arm in shoulder flexion and elbow extension. Progressions and variations More advanced: 1. Instruct the patient to flex and extend their shoulder. Ensure that you keep your elbow straight.

Do__ arm remains straight. sessions per week. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the front and back of your shoulder. Decrease the distance to the targets. Increase speed of task. 5. Ensure that the elbow remains extended. Add resistance in mid range. Progress using strength training principles. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sidelying with slings from their elbow and hand attached to a point above their shoulder. 3. Increase the distance to the targets. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your side with slings from your elbow and hand attached to a point above your shoulder. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. 4. 2. Place two targets on either side of your hand. Place two targets on either side of their hand which require a small movement in mid range. Practice moving your shoulder forward and backward to touch the targets with your hand. Instruct the patient to flex and extend their shoulder to touch the targets.Exercise booklet for { }378 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Shoulder flexor/extensor strengthening using slings and targets in sidelying Therapist's aim To strengthen the shoulder flexors and extensors. More advanced: 1. Ensure that your Perform __ sets of __ reps. Practice in inner range.

Finish with your arm out to the side of your body. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting perpendicular to the pulley. Ensure that the chair does not tip backwards. Precautions 1. Do__ Progressions and variations sessions per week. Adjust the pulley so that the direction of pull opposes shoulder horizontal abduction. Ensure that you keep your elbow straight. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the back of your shoulder. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting perpendicular to the pulley.Exercise booklet for { }379 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Shoulder horizontal abductor strengthening in sitting using pulleys Therapist's aim To strengthen the shoulder horizontal abductors. Start with your far arm across your body. Progress using strength training principles. Perform __ sets of __ reps. Adjust the pulley so that the direction of pull is in alignment with the height of your shoulder. Instruct the patient to horizontally abduct their shoulder with their elbow extended. More advanced: 1.

Adjust the theraband so that the direction of pull is in alignment with the height of your shoulder. colour of the theraband. Ensure that the chair does not tip backwards. Adjust the theraband so that the direction of pull opposes horizontal shoulder abduction. More advanced: 1. Finish with your arm out to the side of your body.Exercise booklet for { }380 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Shoulder horizontal abductor strengthening in sitting using theraband Therapist's aim To strengthen the shoulder horizontal abductors. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with their shoulder horizontally adducted. Instruct the patient to horizontally abduct the shoulder while maintaining elbow extension. Do__ Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the back of your shoulder. Downgrade the colour of the theraband. Start with your far arm across your body. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Perform __ sets of __ reps. Precautions 1. Upgrade the sessions per week. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting side-on to the theraband. Ensure that you keep your elbow straight.

Ensure that you keep your elbow straight. Progress using strength training principles. Start with your arm pointed down towards the floor.Exercise booklet for { }381 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Shoulder horizontal abductor strengthening using free weights Therapist's aim To strengthen the shoulder horizontal abductors. Progressions and variations More advanced: 1. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in prone with their arm over the edge of the bed and their shoulder horizontally adducted. Finish with your arm out to the side. Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your stomach with your arm over the edge of the bed. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the back of your shoulder. Fri Right Left Right Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu . Do__ sessions per week. Perform __ sets of __ reps. Instruct the patient to horizontally abduct their shoulder with their elbow extended.

Ensure that the chair does not tip backwards. Perform __ sets of __ reps. Start with your arms in front of your body. Do__ sessions per week. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the front and back of your shoulders. Progressions and variations More advanced: 1. Progress using strength training principles. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with slings supporting their arms in shoulder abduction and elbow extension. Thu Fri Right Left Right Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left . Precautions 1. Instruct the patient to horizontally adduct and abduct their shoulder. More advanced: 1.Exercise booklet for { }382 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Shoulder horizontal abductor/adductor strengthening using slings Therapist's aim To strengthen the shoulder abductors/adductors. Finish with your arms out to the side. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with slings supporting your arms.

Precautions 1. Finish with your arm across your body. Ensure that the chair does not tip backwards. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . More advanced: 1. Perform __ sets of __ reps. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting side-on to the pulleys. Instruct the patient to horizontally adduct their shoulder with their elbow extended.Exercise booklet for { }383 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Shoulder horizontal adductor strengthening in sitting using pulleys Therapist's aim To strengthen the shoulder horizontal adductors. Do__ Progressions and variations sessions per week. Progress using strength training principles. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting perpendicular to the pulleys. Ensure that you keep your elbow straight. Adjust the pulley system so that the direction of pull opposes shoulder horizontal adduction. Start with your near arm out to the side of your body. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the front of your shoulder and chest. Adjust the pulley system so that the direction of pull is in alignment with the height of your shoulder.

Precautions 1. Ensure that the chair does not tip backwards. Start with your near arm out to the side of your body. Finish with your arm across your body. Instruct the patient to horizontally adduct their shoulder while maintaining elbow extension. Adjust the theraband so that the direction of pull is in alignment with the height of your shoulder. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Client's instructions Position yourself sitting side-on to the theraband. Ensure that you keep your elbow straight. Perform __ sets of __ reps. Upgrade the sessions per week. Downgrade the colour of the theraband.Exercise booklet for { }384 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Shoulder horizontal adductor strengthening in sitting using theraband Therapist's aim To strengthen the shoulder horizontal adductors. colour of the theraband. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with their shoulder horizontally abducted. Adjust the theraband so that the direction of pull opposes horizontal shoulder adduction. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the front of your shoulder and chest. Do__ Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. More advanced: 1.

Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your back. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the front of your shoulder and chest. Finish with your arm across your body. Progressions and variations More advanced: 1. Ensure that you keep your elbow straight. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in supine with their shoulder flexed and horizontally abducted. Do__ sessions per week. Perform __ sets of __ reps. Start with your arm out to the side. Progress using strength training principles. Instruct the patient to horizontally adduct their shoulder with their elbow extended.Exercise booklet for { }385 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Shoulder horizontal adductor strengthening in supine using free weights Therapist's aim To strengthen the shoulder horizontal adductors.

Ensure that you keep your elbow bent and tucked in beside your body. Finish with your hand across your body. Instruct the patient to internally rotate their bottom shoulder. Start with your bottom elbow bent and hand rotated towards the floor. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sidelying with their elbow flexed. Client's aim To strengthen your shoulder muscles. Perform __ sets of __ reps. Progressions and variations More advanced: 1.Exercise booklet for { }386 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Shoulder internal rotator strengthening in sidelying using free weights Therapist's aim To strengthen the shoulder internal rotators. Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your side. Do__ sessions per week. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Progress using strength training principles.

Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Support elbow on table. More advanced: 1. Instruct the patient to internally rotate their shoulder with their elbow flexed. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting side-on to the pulleys. Precautions 1. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting side-on to the pulleys. Finish with your hand across your chest. Start with your near hand out to the side. Less advanced: 1. Adjust the pulley system so that the direction of pull is in alignment with the height of your elbow. Progress using strength training principles. Do__ Progressions and variations sessions per week.Exercise booklet for { }387 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Shoulder internal rotator strengthening in sitting using pulleys Therapist's aim To strengthen the shoulder internal rotators. Ensure that you keep your elbow bent and tucked in beside your body. Perform __ sets of __ reps. Ensure that the chair does not tip backwards. Adjust the pulley system so that the direction of pull opposes shoulder internal rotation. Client's aim To strengthen your shoulder muscles.

Ensure that the chair does not tip backwards. Downgrade the colour of the theraband. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting side-on to the theraband. Client's aim To strengthen your shoulder muscles. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with their elbow flexed and shoulder adducted. Start with your near hand away from your chest and your elbow bent. Upgrade the sessions per week. Do__ Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Finish with your hand across your body. Instruct the patient to internally rotate their shoulder while maintaining elbow flexion at 90 degrees. Adjust the theraband so that the direction of pull opposes shoulder internal rotation. colour of the theraband.Exercise booklet for { }388 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Shoulder internal rotator strengthening in sitting using theraband Therapist's aim To strengthen the shoulder internal rotators. More advanced: 1. Ensure that you keep your elbow bent and tucked in beside your body. Adjust the theraband so that the direction of pull is in alignment with the height of your elbow. Precautions 1. Perform __ sets of __ reps.

Instruct the patient to internally rotate their shoulder while maintaining elbow flexion at 90 degrees. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . More advanced: 1. Downgrade the colour of the theraband. Finish with your hand across your body. Perform __ sets of __ reps. Client's instructions Position yourself standing side-on to the theraband.Exercise booklet for { }389 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Shoulder internal rotator strengthening in standing using theraband Therapist's aim To strengthen the shoulder internal rotators. Adjust the theraband so that the direction of pull opposes shoulder internal rotation. Start with your near hand away from your chest and your elbow bent. Do__ Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Upgrade the sessions per week. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with their elbow flexed and shoulder adducted. Adjust the theraband so that the direction of pull is at the level of your elbow. colour of the theraband. Ensure that you keep your elbow bent and tucked in beside your body. Client's aim To strengthen your shoulder muscles.

Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your back.Exercise booklet for { }390 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Shoulder internal rotator strengthening in supine using theraband Therapist's aim To strengthen the shoulder internal rotators. More advanced: 1. Adjust the theraband so that the direction of pull is in alignment with your elbow. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Finish with your arm across your body. Do__ Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Client's aim To strengthen your shoulder muscles. Perform __ sets of __ reps. Adjust the theraband so that the direction of pull opposes shoulder internal rotation. Downgrade the colour of the theraband. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in supine with their elbow flexed. Instruct the patient to internally rotate their shoulder while maintaining elbow flexion at 90 degrees. colour of the theraband. Start with your elbow bent and your hand away from your body. Upgrade the sessions per week. Ensure that you keep your elbow bent and tucked in beside your body.

Exercise booklet for { }391 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Shoulder internal rotator stretch in sitting Therapist's aim To stretch or maintain length of the shoulder internal rotators and adductors. Shoulder pain. 2. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with your hands behind your head. Raise the height of the tables. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Lower the height of the tables. Client's aim To stretch or maintain range in your shoulders. Hold for __ minutes. More advanced: 2. Impaired or absent sensation of stretch. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with their hands behind their head. Support the weight of their arms with a table. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Support the weight of your arms with a table. Precautions 1.

Increase the tautness of the belt. Impaired or absent sensation of stretch. Place a belt between their wrist and the end of the bed. Decrease the tautness of the belt. More advanced: 1. 2. Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your back with your shoulder out to your side and your elbow bent. Place a belt between your wrist and the end of the bed. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in supine with their shoulder abducted and externally rotated and their elbow flexed. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Hold for __ minutes. 2. Precautions 1.Exercise booklet for { }392 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Shoulder internal rotator stretch in supine Therapist's aim To stretch or maintain length of the shoulder internal rotators. Client's aim To stretch or maintain range in your shoulder. Shoulder pain. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Use a sandbag below the elbow to maintain shoulder abduction.

Progress using strength training principles. Do__ Precautions sessions per week. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles that move your shoulder blades. Finish with your arms pulled backwards. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with slings supporting their arms in shoulder flexion and elbow extension. Instruct the patient to protract and retract their shoulders. Ensure that the chair does not tip backwards. Progressions and variations More advanced: 1. Ensure that you keep your elbows straight and your arms point forwards. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with slings supporting your arms. Start with your arms in front of your body. Perform __ sets of __ reps. 1.Exercise booklet for { }393 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Shoulder protractor/retractor strengthening in sitting using slings Therapist's aim To strengthen the shoulder protractors and retractors.

Practice pulling your shoulders backwards and downwards. More advanced: 1. Progressions and variations 1. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the back of your shoulder. Ensure that the rhomboids and lower trapezius are activated. Perform __ sets of __ reps. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting in an erect posture. Instruct the patient to pull their shoulders backwards and downwards. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right .Exercise booklet for { }394 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Shoulder retractor strengthening in sitting Therapist's aim To strengthen the shoulder retractors. Do__ sessions per week. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting up straight. Progress using strength training principles.

Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting facing the pulley. Instruct the patient to retract their shoulder. Progress using strength training principles. Start with your arm in front of your body. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles that move your shoulder blades.Exercise booklet for { }395 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Shoulder retractor strengthening in sitting using pulleys Therapist's aim To strengthen the shoulder retractors. Adjust the pulley so that the direction of pull opposes shoulder retraction. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting facing the pulley. Precautions 1. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Perform __ sets of __ reps. Ensure that the chair does not tip backwards. Fri Right . Adjust the pulley so that the direction of pull is in alignment with the height of your shoulder. Finish with your arm pulled back. Do__ sessions per week. Progressions and variations More advanced: 1.

Progressions and variations Perform __ sets of __ reps. Finish with your heel lifted off the wedge and standing on your toes. Start with your foot flat on the wedge. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with one foot on a wedge. the other foot in the air and a table nearby for support. Client's instructions Position yourself standing with one foot on a wedge. Do__ More advanced: 1. Instruct the patient to lift their heel off the wedge by plantarflexing their ankle. Client's aim To strengthen your calf muscles. Progress using strength training principles.Exercise booklet for { }396 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Single leg calf raises on a wedge Therapist's aim To strengthen the ankle plantarflexors. sessions per week. their other foot in the air and a table nearby for support.

Do__ sessions per week. Instruct the patient to plantarflex their ankle. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing on one leg. 2. Client's instructions Position yourself standing on one leg. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Progress using strength training principles. Wear a backpack with weights in it. Start with your heel on the ground. Finish with your heel off the ground. Client's aim To strengthen your calf muscles.Exercise booklet for { }397 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Single-leg calf raises Therapist's aim To strengthen the ankle plantarflexors. More advanced: 1. Provide hand support for balance. Perform __ sets of __ reps.

Instruct the patient to quickly flex their affected hip and knee and then extend it again so that their foot makes a circle. More advanced: 1. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 .Exercise booklet for { }398 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Single-leg cycling in standing Therapist's aim To improve the ability to swing the leg when running. Flex and extend the knee through a smaller range of motion. Repeat __ times. Client's aim To improve your ability to swing your leg when running. Increase speed of task. Practice quickly bending your affected leg up in front of you and straightening it behind you again so that your foot makes a circle. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing on their unaffected leg with their arm placed on a wall for support and their affected hip and knee extended behind them. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Decrease speed of task. Client's instructions Position yourself standing on your unaffected leg with your arm placed on a wall for support and your affected leg extended straight behind you. Flex and extend the knee through a larger range of motion. 2. 2.

Client's aim To strengthen your calf muscles or improve your ability to walk. More advanced: 1. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Do__ hips. Move the chair or block further away. Client's instructions Position yourself standing with your unaffected leg placed on a chair or block in front of you and your affected leg on the floor. 2. Provide hand support for balance. Wear a backpack with weights in it. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Ensure that both feet point forwards and your shoulders remain over your Perform __ sets of __ reps. Move the chair or block closer. Practice lifting your affected heel off the floor to raise up onto your toes. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with their unaffected leg placed on a chair or block in front of them and their affected leg on the floor. Ensure that the hip remains extended.Exercise booklet for { }399 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Single-leg heel raises Therapist's aim To strengthen the calf muscles or improve the ability to walk. both feet point forwards and the shoulders remain over the hips. Instruct the patient to lift their affected heel off the floor to raise up onto their toes. sessions per week. 2.

Do__ elevation. 2. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Increase the height of the stool. More advanced: 1. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in supine with one leg over the edge of a bed on a stool. Increase duration of hip Perform __ sets of __ reps.Exercise booklet for { }400 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Single-leg hip extensor strengthening in supine Therapist's aim To strengthen the hip extensors. 2. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the back of your hip. Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your back with one leg over the edge of a bed and your foot on a stool. Push down through your foot and lift your bottom off the bed. Position scales under the foot for feedback. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Instruct the patient to push down through their foot and extend their hip. sessions per week. Decrease the height of the stool.

Place the scales on a higher block. using the scales as feedback. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Do__ scales. Instruct the patient to push down through their foot and extend their hip. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the back of your hip. hip elevation. Increase the target weight on the scales. Increase duration of sessions per week. Decrease the target weight on the Perform __ sets of __ reps. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in supine with their leg resting over the edge of a bed on a set of digital scales. 2. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. More advanced: 1. Practice pushing down through your foot and lifting your bottom off the bed. Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your back with one leg resting over the edge of a bed on a set of digital scales. 2. using the scales as feedback.Exercise booklet for { }401 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Single-leg hip extensor strengthening in supine using digital scales Therapist's aim To strengthen the hip extensors.

Client's instructions Position yourself standing on one leg. Wear a backpack with weights in it.Exercise booklet for { }402 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Single-leg squat Therapist's aim To strengthen the leg extensors. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Perform __ sets of __ reps. Start with your knee straight. More advanced: 1. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles that straighten your leg. Provide hand support for balance. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing on one leg. Do__ sessions per week. Instruct the patient to flex and then extend their knee. Increase the amount of knee bend. Finish with your knee straight. 2. Bend your knee.

Decrease knee flexion. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Practice bending and straightening your knee to slide your Perform __ sets of __ reps. Ensure that the knee does not hyperextend and the foot point forwards. Increase knee flexion. More advanced: 1.Exercise booklet for { }403 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Single-leg squat against a wall Therapist's aim To strengthen the leg extensors and improve the ability to stand or walk. Instruct the patient to flex and extend the knee to slide their back up and down the wall. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with their back against a wall. your foot points forwards. Do__ back up and down the wall. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles that straighten your leg and improve your ability to stand or walk. Ensure that your knee does not lock back past straight and sessions per week. one foot in the air and your other foot a little away from the wall. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Client's instructions Position yourself standing with your back against a wall. one foot in the air and their other foot a little away from the wall.

2. knee and ankle. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles that straighten your hip. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing on a tilt-table with their foot on the footplate and their other leg resting to the side. Client's instructions Position yourself standing on a tilt-table with your foot on the footplate and your other leg resting to the side. Decrease the angle of the tilt table. Place a piece of foam under the Perform __ sets of __ reps. Progressions and variations Less Advanced: 1. Practice bending and straightening your knee to raise and lower yourself on the tilt table.Exercise booklet for { }404 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Single-leg squat on a tilt table Therapist's aim To strengthen the lower limb muscles. Do__ sessions per week. Increase the angle of the tilt table. affected knee to prevent hyperextension. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Instruct the patient to flex and extend their knee to raise and lower themselves on the tilt table. More advanced: 1.

Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting on a plinth with an object placed behind them. Practice reaching for the object without using your other hand for support. Client's aim To improve your ability to sit unsupported.Exercise booklet for { }405 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Sitting and reaching behind Therapist's aim To improve the ability to sit unsupported. Decrease reaching distance. More advanced: 1. Position the object more to Repeat __ times. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting over the edge of a plinth with an object placed behind you. Instruct the patient to reach for the object without using their other hand for support. 2. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Increase reaching distance. Position the object more to the side than to the back. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . 2. the back than to the side.

Position the alarm further away. over your foot so that you weight-bear through your affected side. Ensure that your affected knee remains Repeat __ times. Set the alarm timer to ring. Ensure that the affected knee remains over a flat foot so that weight is borne through the affected side. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Set the alarm timer to ring. Position the alarm closer. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with their feet flat on the floor and an alarm timer on a table that is more than arms-length in front of them. More advanced: 1. Practice reaching forward and turning off the alarm as quickly as possible. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with your feet flat on the floor and an alarm timer on a table that is more than arms-length in front of you. Client's aim To improve your ability to sit unsupported. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . 2. Instruct the patient to reach forward and turn off the alarm as quickly as possible. Increase speed of task.Exercise booklet for { }406 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Sitting and reaching quickly Therapist's aim To improve the ability to sit unsupported.

Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with their feet flat on the floor and a full bowl of water on the floor in front of them. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with your feet flat on the floor and a full bowl of water on the floor in front of you.Exercise booklet for { }407 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Sitting and reaching slowly Therapist's aim To improve the ability to sit unsupported. Ensure that your affected knee remains over your foot so that you Repeat __ times. weight-bear through your affected side. Position the bowl higher. Practice reaching down and picking up the bowl with your unaffected hand without spilling the water. More advanced: 1. Ensure that the affected knee remains over a flat foot so that weight is borne through the affected side. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . 2. Position the bowl further away. Fill the bowl with less water. Instruct the patient to reach down and pick up the bowl with their unaffected hand without spilling the water. Client's aim To improve your ability to sit unsupported.

Ensure that the affected knee remains over a flat foot so that weight is borne through the affected side. Client's aim To improve your ability to sit unsupported.Exercise booklet for { }408 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Sitting and reaching to the affected side Therapist's aim To improve the ability to sit unsupported. Practice reaching to pick up the object with your unaffected hand without dropping the foam. Position the object lower. Position the object further away. Instruct the patient to reach and pick up the object with their unaffected hand without dropping the foam. 2. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Ensure that your affected knee Repeat __ times. remains over your foot so that you weight-bear through your affected side. 3. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with your feet flat on the floor. Use an object that requires accuracy of manipulation. 2. More advanced: 1. some foam between their knees and an object placed on a table on their affected side. Position the object closer. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with their feet flat on the floor. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. some foam between your knees and an object placed on a table on your affected side. Position the table and object in front.

Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with a cup on the floor underneath and a low table in front of them. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Position the table further away. Practice picking up the cup and placing it on the table in front of you and then putting it back again. 2. Instruct the patient to pick up the cup and place it on the table in front of them and then put it back again. through your affected side. More advanced: 1. Client's aim To improve your ability to sit unsupported. Ensure that the affected knee remains over a flat foot so that weight is borne through the affected side. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Ensure that your affected knee remains over your foot so that you weight-bear Repeat __ times. Place the cup higher by putting it on a block. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with a cup on the floor underneath and a low table in front of you.Exercise booklet for { }409 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Sitting and reaching up and down Therapist's aim To improve the ability to sit unsupported. Position the table closer.

Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with their thighs mostly supported and their feet flat on the floor. Precautions Less advanced: 1. Repeat __ times. Client's aim To improve your ability to sit unsupported. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Instruct the patient to lift up their buttock and reach behind to put a wallet in their back pocket. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with your thighs mostly supported and your feet flat on the floor. Put the wallet in the side pocket.Exercise booklet for { }410 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Sitting and turning around Therapist's aim To improve the ability to sit unsupported. Practice lifting up your buttock and reaching behind to put a wallet in your back pocket.

their affected foot on a set of scales and their unaffected foot on a block level with the scales. your affected foot on a set of scales and your unaffected foot on a block level with the scales. Position yourself sitting with your thighs mostly supported. Client's aim To improve your ability to sit unsupported. Ensure that there is room to push down through the affected foot without the thigh running into the plinth and both feet point straight ahead. Client's instructions Repeat __ times. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Position your ankles at 90 degrees. Ensure that there is room to push down through your affected foot without your thigh running into the plinth and both feet point straight ahead. Decrease the weight-bearing target amount on the scales. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with their thighs mostly supported. Instruct the patient to then move their trunk to the affected side while still pushing down through the scales. Position the feet in plantargrade. Reach to targets on the affected side with the unaffected hand. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Practice then moving your trunk to your affected side while still pushing down through the scales. More advanced: 1. Practice pushing down through your affected foot to deflect the scales about 10% of bodyweight without moving your trunk.Exercise booklet for { }411 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Sitting and weight-bearing through the affected leg Therapist's aim To improve the ability to sit unsupported. Instruct the patient to push down through their affected foot to deflect the scales about 10% of bodyweight without moving their trunk.

Instruct the patient to sit upright by bringing their unaffected shoulder to touch the wall. Client's aim To improve your ability to sit unsupported. Ensure that your affected knee remains over Repeat __ times. your foot so that you weight-bear through your affected side. Practice sitting upright by bringing your unaffected shoulder to touch the wall. 2. Ensure that the affected knee remains over a flat foot so that weight is borne through the affected side. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with your feet flat on the floor. Move the table further away.Exercise booklet for { }412 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Sitting back upright Therapist's aim To improve the ability to sit unsupported. their unaffected side close to a wall and a table at shoulder height on their affected side to use as a cue. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting on a plinth with their feet flat on the floor. Progressions and variations More advanced: 1. your unaffected side close to a wall and a table at shoulder height on your affected side. Decrease the amount of thigh support.

Exercise booklet for { }413 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Sitting forward Therapist's aim To improve the ability to sit unsupported. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting in a chair with a sloping back with your hips forward and upperback resting against the backrest. 2. More advanced: 1. Instruct the patient to sit forward and up straight. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with their hips well forward and upper-back resting against the backrest of a chair with a sloping back. Position the bottom closer to the back of the chair. Client's aim To improve your ability to sit unsupported. Position the bottom further away from the back of the chair. sloping back. Practice sitting forward and up straight. Use a chair with a steeper Repeat __ times. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1.

Practice then moving your trunk to your affected side while still pushing down through the scales. Decrease the weight-bearing target amount on the scales. Position the feet in plantargrade.Exercise booklet for { }414 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Sitting on a high plinth and weight-bearing through the affected leg Therapist's aim To improve the ability to sit unsupported. Increase the amount of thigh support by decreasing the height of the plinth. Ensure that both feet point straight ahead. your affected Repeat __ times. 2. Reach to targets in front with the unaffected hand. foot on a set of scales and your unaffected foot on a block level with the scales. 2. Instruct the patient to push down through their affected foot to deflect the scales about 30% of bodyweight without moving their trunk. Practice pushing down through your affected foot to deflect the scales about 30% of bodyweight without moving your trunk. Then instruct the patient to move their trunk to the affected side while still pushing down through the scales. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. More advanced: 1. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting on a raised plinth with 25% thigh support. Client's aim To improve your ability to sit unsupported. Reach to targets on the affected side with the unaffected hand. Ensure that both feet point straight ahead. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting on a raised plinth with your thighs partly supported. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . their affected foot on a set of scales and their unaffected foot on a block level with the scales.

Angle the head of the plinth upwards to position the patient in a semi-inclined position. Practice sitting up from supine. Practice lifting the head laterally only from a sidelying position. 2. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sidelying on a plinth with their affected side uppermost. 2. lifting your head sideways and sitting up. More advanced: 1. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Instruct the patient to put their legs over the side of the bed. 3.Exercise booklet for { }415 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Sitting up from sidelying Therapist's aim To improve the ability to move from lying to sitting. lift their head up sideways and sit up. Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your side on a plinth with your affected side uppermost. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Client's aim To improve your ability to move from lying to sitting. Place pillows underneath the trunk. Practice putting your legs over the side of the bed. Position the patient on a soft mattress. Repeat __ times.

Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your back on a plinth with your affected side away from the edge. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. More advanced: 1. Practice sitting up from sidelying. Position the Repeat __ times. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in supine on a plinth with their affected side away from the edge. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right .Exercise booklet for { }416 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Sitting up from supine Therapist's aim To improve the ability to move from lying to sitting. patient on a soft mattress. 2. Angle the head of the plinth upwards to position the patient in a semi-inclined position. Client's aim To improve your ability to move from lying to sitting. Instruct the patient to roll over and sit up over the side of the bed at the same time. Practice rolling over and sitting up over the side of the bed at the same time.

advanced: 1. using pillows under trunk). More Repeat __ times. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in supine. 2. Position the patient in a more upright posture (eg. Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your back. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Practice sitting up by rolling towards one side and pushing up using your arms. with the unaffected side up). Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Roll to the unaffected side (ie. Position the patient on a soft surface. Roll to the affected side (ie.Exercise booklet for { }417 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Sitting up from supine using one arm Therapist's aim To improve the ability to move from lying to sitting. Instruct the patient to roll to one side and sit up. 2. Client's aim To improve your ability to move from lying to sitting. with the affected side facing up). using one arm to push up into sitting.

More advanced: 1. Repeat __ times. Position the object closer to the head. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with a target object such as a ruler placed above their head. Instruct the patient to sit up straight and touch the target with the crown of their head. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with a target object such as a ruler placed above your head. Client's aim To improve your ability to sit up straight. Position the object further away from the head. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right .Exercise booklet for { }418 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Sitting up straight Therapist's aim To improve the ability to sit upright. Practice sitting up straight to touch the target with the crown of your head.

2. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Client's aim To improve your ability to run or skip. Decrease step length. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing. 3. More advanced: 1. Leap forwards only. 2. Hop forwards only. 3. Repeat __ times. Practice skipping forwards. Client's instructions Position yourself standing up. Skip in different directions or around obstacles. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1.Exercise booklet for { }419 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Skipping Therapist's aim To improve the ability to run or skip. Skip on different surfaces. Increase step length. Instruct the patient to skip forwards.

Remove the slide sheet. 2. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with your arm resting straight out on a table in front of you. More advanced: 1. Instruct the patient to slide their arm forwards to touch the object. Position the object closer to the fingertips. Remove the table. Place a slide sheet under their arm and an object a small distance beyond their fingertips.Exercise booklet for { }420 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Sliding the arm forwards on a table Therapist's aim To improve the ability to protract the shoulder. Place the arm in an airsplint. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with their arm extended on a table at shoulder height in front of them. 2. your back against the chair. Client's aim To improve your ability to reach forwards. Ensure that you keep your elbow straight and Repeat __ times. Place a slide sheet under your arm and an object a small distance beyond your fingertips. Practice sliding your arm forwards to touch the object. Ensure that the elbow remains straight and the trunk remains against the chair. 3. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Position the object so that maximum protraction is required.

Instruct the patient to slide their hand forwards to touch the object. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . 2. Increase the distance to the object. Ensure that the patient does not elevate or internally rotate their shoulder. Sprinkle talcum powder on the table to reduce friction. Decrease the Repeat __ times. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with their hand resting on a table in front of them and an object on the table. Ensure that you do not hitch your shoulder or move your elbow out to the side. 2. More advanced: 1. distance to the object. Lift the hand forwards rather than sliding it on the table. Practice sliding your hand forwards to touch the object.Exercise booklet for { }421 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Sliding the hand forwards on a table Therapist's aim To improve the ability to forward flex the shoulder. Client's aim To improve your ability to move your arm forwards. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with your hand resting on a table in front of you and an object on the table. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1.

Stabilise the ruler between two objects. and your thumb resting on top of the ruler. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with their hand in mid-pronation. Client's aim To improve your ability to manipulate objects with your hand. 3. Draw a line on the ruler to serve as a target for thumb abduction. Stabilise the ruler between two objects. Move the target line further away. and their thumb resting on top of the ruler. a ruler placed between their index and middle finger. Ensure that only the thumb moves. Ensure that only your thumb moves. Move the target line closer. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with your hand held vertically. Practice sliding your thumb along the ruler away from your index finger. More advanced: 1. 2. Repeat __ times. a ruler placed between your index and middle finger. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Use talcum powder on the ruler to reduce friction. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1.Exercise booklet for { }422 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Sliding the thumb on a ruler Therapist's aim To improve the ability to abduct the thumb or manipulate objects with the hand. Instruct the patient to slide their thumb along the ruler into abduction until reaching the target distance.

Exercise booklet for { }423 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Sliding the thumb on a stick with hand around cup Therapist's aim To improve the ability to abduct the thumb or manipulate objects with the hand. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Practice moving your thumb away from the cup to reach a target line. 2. Instruct the patient to abduct their thumb to reach a target line. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting in front of a table with their hand grasping an inverted foam cup that has a stick pushed through it. More advanced. Position your thumb and index finger on top of the stick. Client's aim To improve your ability to manipulate objects with your hand. Use a smaller diameter cup. Position the thumb and index finger on top of the stick. 2. Move the target line closer to the thumb. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Ensure that the cup does not deform and only the thumb moves. 1. Use a larger diameter cup. Ensure that you Repeat __ times. don`t squeeze the cup and only your thumb moves. Move the target line further away from the thumb. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting in front of a table with your hand grasping an upside-down foam cup that has a stick pushed through it.

Increase the angle of the wedge. Client's aim To stretch or maintain range in your ankle. Hold for __ minutes. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with a wedge underneath their foot. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Impaired or absent sensation of stretch. More advanced: 1. Precautions 1. Place a strap from the bottom of the wedge up over your knees. 2.Exercise booklet for { }424 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Soleus stretch in sitting using a wedge and belt Therapist's aim To stretch or maintain length of the soleus. Decrease the angle of the wedge. 2. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with a wedge underneath your foot. Place a strap from the bottom of the wedge up over their knees. Increase the tautness of the strap. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Decrease the tautness of the strap.

Increase the angle of the wedge. Decrease the weight on the knee. 2. Increase the weight on the knee. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with a wedge underneath their foot. Client's aim To stretch or maintain range in your ankle. Hold for __ minutes. 2. Place a weight on top of their knee. Decrease the angle of the wedge. More advanced: 1. Precautions 1. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Place a weight on top of your knee. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with a wedge underneath your foot.Exercise booklet for { }425 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Soleus stretch in sitting using a wedge and sandbag Therapist's aim To stretch or maintain length of the soleus. Impaired or absent sensation of stretch.

Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with your feet placed underneath the chair until your heels lift off the floor. More advanced: 1. Hold for __ minutes. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Precautions 1. Impaired or absent sensation of stretch. Decrease the weight on the knee. Increase the weight on the knee. Place a weight on top of your knee.Exercise booklet for { }426 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Soleus stretch in sitting using sandbags Therapist's aim To stretch or maintain length of the soleus. Client's aim To stretch or maintain range in your ankles. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with their knees bent backwards until the heels lift off the floor. Place a weight on top of their knee. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 .

Precautions 1. Client's instructions Position yourself standing with one leg in front of the other and your hands resting on a wall. Lean forwards while keeping your back knee bent. More advanced: 1. Ensure that both feet point forwards and your back heel remains on the ground. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Impaired or absent sensation of stretch. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Hold for __ minutes. Increase forwards lean. 2. Decrease forwards lean.Exercise booklet for { }427 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Soleus stretch in standing Therapist's aim To stretch or maintain length of the soleus. Take the back leg further back. Ensure that both feet point forwards and the back heel remains on the ground. Instruct the patient to lean forwards while keeping the back knee bent. Client's aim To stretch or maintain range in your ankles. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with one leg in front of the other and their hands resting on a wall.

Client's instructions Position yourself in your wheelchair with your heels off the back edge of your footplate. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Increase the tautness of the strap. Decrease the tautness of the strap. Place the feet further back on the footplates. More advanced: 1. Place a strap from the bottom of your wheelchair up over your knees.Exercise booklet for { }428 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Soleus stretch in wheelchair using a belt Therapist's aim To stretch or maintain length of the soleus. Client's aim To stretch or maintain range in your ankles. 2. Precautions 1. Hold for __ minutes. Place a strap from the bottom of their wheelchair up over their knees. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in their wheelchair with their heels off the back edge of their footplate. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Perform skin tests.

Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with your thighs supported on a bed. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting. Precautions 1. Hold for __ minutes.Exercise booklet for { }429 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Spinal rotation stretch in sitting Therapist's aim To stretch or maintain range in the spine. Client's aim To stretch or maintain range in your spine. Rotate your head and trunk to one side and reach behind you with both hands. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Impaired or absent sensation of stretch. Instruct the patient to rotate their head and trunk to one side and reach behind them with both hands.

Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Hold for __ minutes. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with their hands folded across their chest. Instruct the patient to rotate their head and trunk to one side. Client's aim To stretch or maintain range in your spine. Impaired or absent sensation of stretch. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with your hands folded across your chest.Exercise booklet for { }430 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Spinal rotation stretch in sitting with the arms crossed Therapist's aim To stretch or maintain range in the spine. Rotate your head and trunk to one side. Precautions 1.

Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1.Exercise booklet for { }431 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Squatting against a wall Therapist's aim To strengthen the leg extensors and improve the ability to stand or walk. Client's instructions Position yourself standing with your back against a wall and both feet a little away from the wall. More advanced: 1. Increase knee flexion. Place the unaffected leg on a step to increase weight through the affected leg. your knees do not lock back past Perform __ sets of __ reps. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles that straighten your leg and improve your ability to stand or walk. Ensure that your feet and knees are held together. Practice bending and straightening your knees to slide your back up and down the wall. Do__ sessions per week. 2. Ensure that the feet and knees are together. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Instruct the patient to flex and extend the knees to slide their back up and down the wall. straight and both of your feet point forwards. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with their back against a wall and both feet a little away from the wall. Decrease knee flexion. the knees do not hyperextend and both feet point forwards.

Client's aim To improve the ability to stand or walk. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. 2. Decrease speed of task. Remove hand support. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with a table nearby for support. Client's instructions Position yourself standing with a table nearby for support. Ensure that the affected knee does not hyper-extend and hand support is used only if necessary. Practice standing on your affected leg and rapidly bending and straightening your knee through a small range.Exercise booklet for { }432 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Standing and bending and straightening the knees quickly Therapist's aim To improve the ability to stand or walk. Repeat __ times. Ensure that your affected knee does not lock back past straight and hand support is used only if necessary. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Instruct the patient to stand on their affected leg and rapidly flex and extend their knee through a small range. More advanced: 1. Increase speed of task.

Progressions and variations Repeat __ times. Increase the size of the square on the floor to increase the base of support. More advanced: 1. Client's instructions Position yourself standing with your feet inside a square marked on the floor. Less advanced: 1. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . holding onto a ball with both hands. Client's aim To improve your ability to stand with your feet closer together and use both hands. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with their feet inside a square marked on the floor. holding onto a ball with both hands.Exercise booklet for { }433 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Standing and bouncing a ball with both hands Therapist's aim To improve the ability to stand with a smaller base of support while using both hands. Decrease the size of the square on the floor to decrease the base of support. Practice bouncing and catching the ball with both hands without moving your feet outside the square. Instruct the patient to bounce and catch the ball with both hands without moving their feet outside the square.

Ensure that both feet point forwards. Instruct the patient to raise their pelvis on their unaffected side by abducting their affected hip without increasing the weight displayed on the scales.Exercise booklet for { }434 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Standing and elevating the pelvis Therapist's aim To improve the ability to stand or walk. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with their unaffected foot on some scales on a plinth. Ensure that both feet point forwards. Client's aim To improve your ability to stand or walk. Client's instructions Position yourself standing with your unaffected foot on some scales on a plinth. Repeat __ times. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Practice raising your pelvis on your unaffected side without increasing the weight displayed on the scales.

Ensure that the movement occurs at the ankles. the hips remain extended and the feet do not change position. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with their feet slightly apart. Ensure that the movement occurs at your ankles. Less advanced: 1. Practice leaning forwards and backwards. your hips stay straight and your feet do not change position. 2. Client's aim To improve your ability to stand. Instruct the patient to lean forwards and then lean backwards. Progressions and variations Repeat __ times. Decrease forwards and backwards lean. Provide hand support for balance. Increase forwards and backwards lean. Client's instructions Position yourself standing with your feet slightly apart. More advanced: 1. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 .Exercise booklet for { }435 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Standing and leaning forwards and backwards Therapist's aim To improve the ability to stand.

Provide hand support for balance. Instruct the patient to look up and then look down. Practice looking up and down.Exercise booklet for { }436 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Standing and looking up and down Therapist's aim To improve the ability to stand. 2. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Client's instructions Position yourself standing with your feet slightly apart. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Decrease the amplitude of head movement. Repeat __ times. More advanced: 1. Turn the head in different directions. Increase the amplitude of head movement. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with their feet slightly apart. 2. Client's aim To improve your ability to stand.

2. Client's instructions Position yourself standing with one leg in front of the other and an object on the floor in front of you. Instruct the patient to pick the object up off the floor with either hand. Practice picking the object up off the floor with either hand. Repeat __ times. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. More advanced: 1. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Position the feet closer together.Exercise booklet for { }437 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Standing and picking up an object off the floor Therapist's aim To improve the ability to stand and reach for objects. 2. Pick up a heavier object. Position the feet wider apart. Client's aim To improve your ability to stand and reach for objects. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with one leg in front of the other and an object on the floor in front of them. Position the object higher.

Place the object further away. 1. Client's aim To improve your ability to stand and reach for objects. Position the feet closer together. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with their feet slightly apart and an object such as a box placed on the floor in front of them. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. More advanced: Repeat __ times. Instruct the patient to crouch down and pick up the object with both hands. 2. Client's instructions Position yourself standing with your feet slightly apart and an object such as a box placed on the floor in front of you. Practice crouching down to pick up the object with both hands. Ensure that body weight is borne equally through both legs. 2. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 .Exercise booklet for { }438 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Standing and picking up an object off the floor with both hands Therapist's aim To improve the ability to stand and reach for objects. Position the feet wider apart. Ensure that you weight-bear equally through both legs. Place the object closer.

Ensure that hand support is used only if necessary. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Client's aim To improve your ability to stand or walk. Remove hand support. More advanced: 1. Pivot with two feet on the floor. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with a table nearby for support. Practice standing on one leg and pivoting from side to side. Repeat __ times. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Client's instructions Position yourself standing up with a table nearby for support.Exercise booklet for { }439 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Standing and pivoting on one leg with support Therapist's aim To improve the ability to stand or walk. Ensure that hand support is used only if necessary. Instruct the patient to stand on one leg and pivot from side to side.

Exercise booklet for { }440 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Standing and reaching Therapist's aim To improve the ability to reach forwards when standing. More advanced: 1. Ensure that their hips makes contact with the table. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with a table at hip level a small distance in front of them and an object at shoulder height a little further than an arms-length away. Less advanced: 1. Ensure that your hips makes contact with the table. Position the table and object closer. Client's aim To improve your ability to reach forwards when standing. Progressions and variations Repeat __ times. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Instruct the patient to reach forwards and pick up the object. Practice reaching forwards to pick up the object. Client's instructions Position yourself standing with a table at hip level a small distance in front of you and an object at shoulder height a little further than an arms-length away. Position the table and object further away.

Practice crouching down to pick up the object and lifting it up to place it on the target above you. 3. Increase the height of the target. 2. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Client's aim To improve your ability to stand and reach for objects. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Provide hand support for balance. Instruct the patient to crouch down to pick up an object then stand up to place it on the target above them. Decrease the height of the Repeat __ times. 3. Position the object higher off the floor. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with objects on the floor and a target above them. Increase speed of task. 2. More advanced: 1. Increase the accuracy demands of the task.Exercise booklet for { }441 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Standing and reaching from the floor to above the head Therapist's aim To improve the ability to stand and reach for objects. Client's instructions Position yourself standing with objects on the floor and a target above you. target.

Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Position a table at hip level beside them. Position the target and table further away. Client's instructions Position yourself standing with your feet slightly apart and a target placed at shoulder height out to your side. Position the target and table closer. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with their feet slightly apart and a target placed at shoulder height out to their side.Exercise booklet for { }442 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Standing and reaching to the side Therapist's aim To improve the ability to shift weight sideways when reaching to the side in standing. Instruct the patient to reach sideways to touch the target with their hand and the table with their hips. Position a table at hip level beside you. More advanced: 1. Ensure that your hips move slightly sideways to make contact with the table. Practice reaching sideways to touch the target. Repeat __ times. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Client's aim To improve your ability to reach to the side in standing.

Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Instruct the patient to transfer weight onto their affected leg. Remove the harness.Exercise booklet for { }443 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Standing and shifting weight using a harness Therapist's aim To improve the ability to stand or walk. Client's aim To improve your ability to stand or walk. Ensure that the shoulders remain over the hips. Use scales for feedback about weight-bearing. More advanced: 1. about lateral displacement of the hips. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with their feet slightly apart and a harness attached for body-weight support. Ensure that your shoulders remain over your hips. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Practice transferring your weight from one leg to the other. 2. Client's instructions Position yourself standing with your feet slightly apart and a harness attached for bodyweight support. Use cues for feedback Repeat __ times.

Less advanced: 1. Practice throwing the ball at a target on the wall with both hands and then catching it again. 3. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing facing a wall with their feet slightly apart and holding onto a ball with both hands. Use a smaller target. Use a heavier ball. More advanced: 1. Client's instructions Position yourself standing facing a wall with your feet slightly apart and holding onto a ball with both hands. 4. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Instruct the patient to throw the ball at a target on the wall with both hands and then catch it again. Stand further away from the wall. Client's aim To improve your ability to stand and use both hands.Exercise booklet for { }444 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Standing and throwing a ball with two hands Therapist's aim To improve the ability to stand and use both hands. Stand with the feet closer together. 4. Progressions and variations Repeat __ times. Stand closer to the wall. Use a larger target. 3. 2. 2. Stand with the feet wider apart. Use a lighter ball.

Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with one leg in front of the other. Client's aim To improve your ability to stand. Decrease the amplitude of the movement. Increase the amplitude of the movement. Client's instructions Position yourself standing with one leg in front of the other. Practice turning your head to look over your shoulders. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Repeat __ times. Instruct the patient to turn and look over their shoulders.Exercise booklet for { }445 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Standing and turning with one leg forwards Therapist's aim To improve the ability to stand. Turn in the opposite direction. Fri Right . Provide hand support for balance. 2. 2. More advanced: 1.

More advanced: 1. Increase the amplitude of the movement. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Repeat __ times. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. 2. Fri Right . Practice turning your head to look over your shoulders. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with their feet slightly apart. Client's instructions Position yourself standing with your feet slightly apart. Turn in the opposite direction. Provide hand support for balance.Exercise booklet for { }446 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Standing and turning with the feet close together Therapist's aim To improve the ability to stand. Instruct the patient to turn and look over their shoulders. 2. Decrease the amplitude of the movement. Client's aim To improve your ability to stand.

Position the feet further apart. More advanced: 1.Exercise booklet for { }447 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Standing in semi-tandem stance Therapist's aim To improve the ability to stand or walk. Client's aim To improve your ability to stand or walk. Ensure that hand support is used only if necessary. Turn to look behind. support. Stand in tandem stance. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in semi-tandem stance with one foot forward and no space between the feet and a table nearby for support. Ensure that hand support is used only if necessary. Practice maintaining the position. 3. 4. Client's instructions Position yourself standing with one foot forward and no space between you feet and a table nearby for support. 2. Instruct the patient to maintain the position. Progressions and variations Hold for __ seconds. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Throw and catch a ball in this position. Remove hand times. Repeat __ Less advanced: 1.

Exercise booklet for { }448 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Standing in step stance and throwing a ball Therapist's aim To improve the ability to stand. Use a lighter ball. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Practice throwing a ball at the wall with the hand opposite to your front leg and catching it again. Throw Repeat __ times. Instruct the patient to throw a ball at the wall with the hand opposite to their front leg and catch it again. Client's instructions Position yourself standing facing a wall with one leg in front of the other. 3. and catch the ball with the affected hand. More advanced: 1. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Throw and catch the ball with the unaffected hand. Provide hand support for balance. 2. Client's aim To improve your ability to stand. Use a heavier ball. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing facing a wall with one leg in front of the other. 2.

Client's instructions Position yourself standing with one foot forward in front of the other and a table nearby for support.Exercise booklet for { }449 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Standing in tandem stance Therapist's aim To improve the ability to stand or walk. Client's aim To improve your ability to stand or walk. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Throw and catch a ball in this position. Remove hand support. More advanced: 1. 3. Turn to look behind. Position the feet in semi-tandem standing. Position the feet further times. Stand on one leg. Instruct the patient to maintain the position. Progressions and variations Hold for __ seconds. Ensure that hand support is used only if necessary. 2. Practice maintaining the position. Repeat __ Less advanced: 1. Ensure that hand support is used only if necessary. 4. 2. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in tandem stance with one foot forward in front of the other and a table nearby for support. apart.

Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Decrease the distance between the lines. Increase speed of task. Instruct the patient to jump forwards over the line. More advanced: 1. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing on a line with their feet shoulder width apart and another line across the floor in front of them. Less advanced: 1. Ensure that their knees flex prior to takeoff and when landing. Practice jumping forwards over the line. Perform successive jumps. Jump on the spot. Client's instructions Position yourself standing on a line with your feet shoulder width apart and another line placed across the floor in front of you. 3. Client's aim To improve your ability to jump forwards. 2. 2. Increase the distance between the lines.Exercise booklet for { }450 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Standing long jump with feet together Therapist's aim To improve the ability to jump forwards. Ensure that you bend your knees and swing your arms. Progressions and variations Repeat __ times.

Stand without performing the concurrent activity. Use a lighter ball. Increase the speed or direction of the task.Exercise booklet for { }451 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Standing on an unstable surface and throwing a ball Therapist's aim To improve the ability to stand and perform a concurrent upper limb task. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Repeat __ times. More advanced: 1. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing on an unstable surface (such as a piece of foam) with their feet slightly apart. Instruct the patient to throw and catch a ball with both hands. 3. Use a heavier ball. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. 3. Stand with the feet wider apart. 4. Client's instructions Position yourself standing on an unstable surface (such as a piece of foam) with your feet slightly apart. Practice throwing and catching a ball with both hands. Fri Right . Stand with the feet closer together. Client's aim To improve your ability to stand and use both hands. Stand on the floor. 2. 2.

Instruct the patient to maintain the position without touching their other foot on the floor. Client's aim To improve your ability to stand on one leg. More advanced: 1. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing on one leg. Client's instructions Position yourself standing on one leg.Exercise booklet for { }452 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Standing on one leg Therapist's aim To improve the ability to stand on one leg. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. 2. Practice maintaining the position without touching your other foot on the floor. Provide hand support for balance. Repeat __ times. Add a concurrent task. Move the other leg in different directions. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right .

Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing on one leg with a chair or table nearby for support. Ensure that hand support is used only if necessary. Ensure that hand support is used only if necessary. Instruct the patient to maintain the position without touching their other foot on the floor. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Add a concurrent task. Practice maintaining the position without touching your other foot on the floor. Client's aim To improve your ability to stand or walk. More advanced: 1. Progressions and variations Hold for __ seconds. Precautions 1. times. 2. Stand in tandem stance. Remove hand support.Exercise booklet for { }453 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Standing on one leg with support Therapist's aim To improve the ability to stand or walk. Throw and catch a ball in this position. 3. Client's instructions Position yourself standing on one leg with a chair or table nearby for support. Ensure that the support is stable. Repeat __ Less advanced: 1.

Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Raise and lower Repeat __ times. Instruct the patient to stand on one leg and hold their other foot just resting on the cup. the foot on and off the cup. Client's aim To improve your ability to weight-bear through your leg. Ensure that the foam cup is not squashed. Provide hand support for balance. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with a foam cup on the floor in front of them. Ensure that you do not squash the foam cup. Swap from one leg to the other. More advanced: 1. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 .Exercise booklet for { }454 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Standing on one leg with the other leg resting on a foam cup Therapist's aim To improve the ability to weight-bear through the leg. Practice standing on one leg while holding your other foot just resting on the cup. 2. Client's instructions Position yourself standing with a foam cup on the floor in front of you.

Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with a piece of foam squeezed between their ankles. More advanced: 1. Client's aim To improve your ability to stand and walk.Exercise booklet for { }455 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Standing on tip toes Therapist's aim To improve the ability to stand on tip-toes. Stand on the tip. Client's instructions Position yourself standing with a piece of foam squeezed between your ankles. Ensure that both ankles plantarflex the same amount. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Ensure that both ankles move the same amount.Repeat __ times. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Instruct the patient to stand up on their tip-toes without dropping the foam. Practice standing up on your tip-toes without dropping the foam. toes and turn to look over the shoulder. Provide hand support for balance.

More advanced: 1. and weight is borne equally through both legs.Exercise booklet for { }456 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Standing up and sitting down Therapist's aim To improve the ability to stand up or sit down. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with their feet underneath their knees. Increase the height of the chair. Ensure that the shoulders and knees move forward while moving between sitting and standing. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with your feet underneath your knees. Ensure that your shoulders and knees move forward while you move between sitting and standing. Instruct the patient to stand up and then sit down again. of the chair. and your weight is borne equally through both legs. Decrease the height Repeat __ times. Client's aim To improve your ability to stand up or sit down. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Practice standing up and sitting down.

More advanced: 1. your shoulders and knees move forward while you move Repeat __ times. Increase the height of the chair. 2. Instruct the patient to stand up and then sit down and tuck the chair in to the table. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting on a light-weight chair at a dining table. Ensure that the chair moves backwards when you stand up. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting on a light-weight chair at a dining table. Ensure that the chair moves backwards when standing up. the shoulders and knees move forward while moving between sitting and standing and weight is borne equally through both legs. between sitting and standing and your weight is borne equally through both legs. Decrease the height of the chair. Remove the table.Exercise booklet for { }457 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Standing up and sitting down from a dining table Therapist's aim To improve the ability to stand up or sit down from a table. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Practice standing up and then sitting down and tucking the chair in to the table. Client's aim To improve your ability to stand up or sit down from a table. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 .

Decrease the height of the plinth. Practice standing up and sitting down. and your weight is borne equally through both legs. Ensure that your shoulders move forward when you move between sitting and standing. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . More advanced: 1. Instruct the patient to stand up and then sit down again. Progressions and variations Repeat __ times. Provide hand support for balance. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting on a relatively high surface with both feet on the floor. Client's aim To improve your ability to stand up or sit down. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting on a relatively high surface with both feet on the floor.Exercise booklet for { }458 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Standing up and sitting down from a high surface Therapist's aim To improve the ability to stand up or sit down. and weight is borne equally through both legs. 2. 2. Less advanced: 1. Increase the height of the plinth. Stand fully upright. Ensure that the shoulders move forward while moving between sitting and standing.

Client's instructions Position yourself sitting on a low stool with both feet on the floor. Ensure that your shoulders move forward when you move between sitting and standing. Instruct the patient to stand up and then sit down again. Position the unaffected leg forward. Client's aim To improve your ability to stand up or sit down. 3. Increase the height of the stool. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting on a low stool with both feet on the floor. and weight is borne equally through both legs. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . 2. Practice standing up and sitting down. Less advanced: 1. Ensure that the shoulders move forward while moving between sitting and standing.Exercise booklet for { }459 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Standing up and sitting down from a low stool Therapist's aim To improve the ability to stand up or sit down. 2. Decrease the height of the stool. Use a stool with wheels. More advanced: 1. Provide hand support for balance. and your weight is borne equally through both legs. Progressions and variations Repeat __ times.

Decrease the height of the chair. More advanced: 1. Ensure that your shoulders move forward when you Repeat __ times. trying to move your knees forward to touch the object each time you move between sitting and standing. and weight is borne equally through both legs. move between sitting and standing. Ensure that the knees move forward to touch the object. Instruct the patient to stand up and then sit down again. Practice standing up and sitting down. and your weight is borne equally through both legs. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with an object in front of you at knee height. the shoulders move forward while moving between sitting and standing. Client's aim To improve your ability to stand up or sit down. Increase the height of the chair.Exercise booklet for { }460 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Standing up and sitting down to a knee cue Therapist's aim To improve the ability to stand up or sit down. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with an object in front of them at knee height. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 .

More advanced: 1. Decrease the height of the plinth. Client's aim To improve your ability to stand up or sit down.Exercise booklet for { }461 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Standing up and sitting down using a lateral knee cue Therapist's aim To improve the ability to stand up or sit down. Practice standing up and sitting down without touching the object with your knee. and weight is borne equally through both legs. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Increase the height of the plinth. Instruct the patient to stand up and then sit down again. borne equally through both legs. the shoulders move forward while moving between sitting and standing. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with an object placed on the outside of your affected knee. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Ensure that the affected knee does not touch the object. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with an object placed laterally to their affected knee. Ensure that your shoulders move forward when you move between sitting and standing. and your weight is Repeat __ times.

Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with a limb-load monitor placed under their foot. Increase the target weight borne through the affected leg. Instruct the patient to move their shoulders and knees forward and stand up. Decrease the target weight borne through the affected leg. Add a concurrent task. 2. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1.Exercise booklet for { }462 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Standing up and sitting down using a limb-load monitor Therapist's aim To improve the ability to stand up and sit down. Ensure that your weight is borne through your leg to the target amount using the monitor as feedback. Increase the height of the chair. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . turn the noise of the limb load monitor on/off). More advanced: 1. 2. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with a limb-load monitor placed under your foot. Client's aim To improve your ability to stand up and sit down. 3. Repeat __ times. Practice moving your shoulders and knees forward and standing up. Decrease the height of the chair. Ensure that the target percentage of body weight is borne through their leg (ie.

Client's aim To improve your ability to stand up or sit down. Increase the height of the chair. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting while holding onto an object. Place a cup of water on the tray. Instruct the patient to stand up and then sit down again without dropping the object.Exercise booklet for { }463 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Standing up and sitting down while holding onto an object Therapist's aim To improve the ability to stand up or sit down. Repeat __ times. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting while holding onto an object. More advanced: 1. Practice standing up and sitting down without dropping the object. and your weight is borne equally through both legs. Ensure that the shoulders and knees move forward while moving between sitting and standing. 2. Ensure that your shoulders and knees move forward while you move between sitting and standing. and weight is borne equally through both legs. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Decrease the height of the chair.

Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. 2. Client's aim To improve your ability to stand up or sit down. Instruct the patient to stand up and then sit down again. and weight is borne equally through both legs. More advanced: 1. Decrease the height of the chair. Remove the weight belt. 2. Increase the weight of the weight belt.Exercise booklet for { }464 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Standing up and sitting down while wearing a weight belt Therapist's aim To improve the ability to stand up or sit down. Decrease the weight of the weight belt. 3. Ensure that your shoulders and knees move forward while you move between sitting and standing. Increase the height of the chair. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with their feet underneath their knees and wearing a weight belt. Ensure that the shoulders and knees move forward while moving between sitting and standing. Practice standing up and sitting down. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with your feet underneath your knees and wearing a weight belt. and your weight is borne equally through Repeat __ times. both legs.

Increase the height of the chair. Practice standing up and sitting down. Instruct the patient to stand up and then sit down again. 2. More advanced: 1.Exercise booklet for { }465 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Standing up and sitting down with a harness Therapist's aim To improve the ability to stand up or sit down. Client's aim To improve your ability to stand up or sit down. Ensure that the shoulders and knees move forward while moving between sitting and standing. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with a harness attached for body-weight support and their feet underneath their knees. borne equally through both legs. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with a harness attached for body-weight support and your feet underneath your knees. Decrease the height of the chair 2. and weight is borne equally through both legs. Ensure that your shoulders and knees move forward while you move between sitting and standing. Decrease the amount of body-weight support. and your weight is Repeat __ times. Increase the amount of body-weight support. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 .

Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Decrease the height of the seat. Stand up without using arm support. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with your forearms resting on a high table in front of you. Ensure that your hands slide forward on the table when standing up and your weight is borne equally through both legs. Ensure that the hands slide forward on the table while standing up (so that the shoulders and knees can move forward) and weight is borne equally through both legs. Instruct the patient to stand up and then sit down again. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with their forearms resting on a high table in front of them. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1.Exercise booklet for { }466 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Standing up and sitting down with arm support Therapist's aim To improve the ability to stand up or sit down. Client's aim To improve your ability to stand up or sit down. Increase the height of the seat. More advanced: 1. Practice standing up and sitting down. 2. Repeat __ times.

Exercise booklet for { }467 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Standing up and sitting down with foam between the knees Therapist's aim To improve the ability to stand up or sit down. Instruct the patient to stand up and then sit down again. Practice standing up and sitting down without dropping the foam. and weight is borne equally through both legs. and your weight is borne equally through Repeat __ times. Decrease the height of the plinth. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with a piece of foam placed between your knees. the shoulders move forward while moving between sitting and standing. Client's aim To improve your ability to stand up or sit down. Increase the height of the plinth. Ensure that the foam is not dropped. More advanced: 1. Ensure that your shoulders move forward when you move between sitting and standing. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with a piece of foam placed between their knees. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. both legs. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 .

Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with a table nearby for support and both feet on the floor. Ensure that your shoulders move forward when you move between sitting and standing. Instruct the patient to stand up and sit down. More advanced: 1. Increase the height of the chair.Exercise booklet for { }468 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Standing up and sitting down with hand support nearby Therapist's aim To improve the ability to stand up or sit down. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Decrease the height of the chair. support is used only if necessary. weight is borne equally through both legs and the hand support is used only if necessary. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Client's aim To improve your ability to stand up or sit down. your weight is borne equally through both legs and the hand Repeat __ times. Ensure that the shoulders move forward while moving between sitting and standing. Practice standing up and sitting down. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with a table nearby for support and both feet on the floor.

2. Decrease the height Repeat __ times. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with your feet underneath your knees. Ensure that the shoulders and knees move forward while moving between sitting and standing. Client's aim To improve your ability to stand up and walk without pausing. Add a concurrent task. Practice standing up and walking in different directions without pausing in standing. of the chair.Exercise booklet for { }469 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Standing up and walking Therapist's aim To improve the ability to stand up and walk without pausing. Instruct the patient to stand up and walk in different directions without pausing in standing. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with their feet underneath their knees. Increase the height of the chair. More advanced: 1. Ensure that your shoulders and knees move forward while moving between sitting and standing.

Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Therapist's instructions Position the patient in half-kneeling. Practice standing up and kneeling down. Repeat __ times. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Client's instructions Position yourself kneeling with one leg up. Instruct the patient to stand up and then kneel down again. Provide hand support for balance.Exercise booklet for { }470 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Standing up from half-kneeling Therapist's aim To improve the ability to stand up from the floor. More advanced: 1. Client's aim To improve your ability to stand up from the floor. Wear a backpack containing weights.

Exercise booklet for { }471 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Standing up from the floor through a crouched position Therapist's aim To improve the ability to stand up from the floor. More advanced: 1. Wear a backpack containing weights. Client's aim To improve your ability to stand up from the floor. Therapist's instructions Position the patient crouching on the floor. Practice standing up and crouching down using your arms for support. Client's instructions Position yourself crouching on the floor. Use a stable. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Repeat __ times. Instruct the patient to stand up and then crouch down again using their arms for support. 2. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. low piece of furniture as a support. Perform task without using arm support.

Position the front leg only slightly forward. Client's aim To improve your ability to stand up and weight-bear through one leg. mostly through your affected leg. 2. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with your affected leg back and your unaffected leg forwards. Ensure that your shoulders and knees move forwards while moving between sitting and standing. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Instruct the patient to stand up and then sit down again. Add a concurrent task. Increase the height of the chair. Decrease the height of the chair. and weight is borne mostly through their affected leg. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with their affected leg back and their unaffected leg forwards. 2. More advanced: 1. Practice standing up and sitting down keeping the leg forwards. and you weight-bear Repeat __ times. Ensure that their shoulders and knees move forward while moving between sitting and standing.Exercise booklet for { }472 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Standing up with one leg forward Therapist's aim To improve the ability to stand up and weight-bear through one leg.

Decrease the height of the chair. Client's aim To improve your ability to stand up and weight-bear through your affected leg. More advanced: 1. Ensure that your shoulders and knees move forwards while moving between sitting and standing. and you weight-bear mostly through Repeat __ times. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with their affected leg on the floor and their unaffected leg on a block. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Increase the height of the block. your affected leg. Increase the height of the chair. Practice standing up and sitting down. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Instruct the patient to stand up and then sit down again.Exercise booklet for { }473 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Standing up with one leg on a block Therapist's aim To improve the ability to stand up and weight-bear through the affected leg. Ensure that their shoulders and knees move forward while moving between sitting and standing. 3. 2. and weight is borne mostly through their affected leg. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with your affected leg on the floor and your unaffected leg on a block. Add a concurrent task.

Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with their feet together and a table nearby for support. Client's aim To improve your ability to stand or walk.Exercise booklet for { }474 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Standing with the feet together Therapist's aim To improve the ability to stand or walk. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. 3. Repeat __ times. 2. Remove hand support. Practice maintaining the position. Instruct the patient to maintain the position. Client's instructions Position yourself standing with your feet together and a table nearby for support. Turn look behind. Ensure that hand support is used only if necessary. Hold for __ seconds. Position the feet further apart. Ensure that hand support is used only if necessary. More advanced: 1. Stand on one leg. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Throw and catch a ball in this position. 4.

Client's instructions Position yourself standing with your feet inside a square marked on the floor. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Instruct the patient to bounce a ball up and down with either hand without moving their feet outside the square.Exercise booklet for { }475 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Standing with the feet together and bouncing a ball with one hand Therapist's aim To improve the ability to stand with a smaller base of support. Decrease the size of the square on the floor to decrease the base of support. Increase the size of the square on the floor to increase the base of Repeat __ times. support. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with their feet inside a square marked on the floor. More advanced: 1. Practice bouncing a ball up and down with either hand without moving your feet outside the square. Client's aim To improve your ability to stand with your feet closer together. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1.

Client's instructions Position yourself standing with one leg in front of the other. Repeat __ times. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . 2. Use tape on the ground to provide cues. Take larger steps. Provide hand support for balance. 3. Instruct the patient to step forward. Client's aim To improve your ability to step. Practice stepping forward.Exercise booklet for { }476 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Stepping Therapist's aim To improve stance or swing phase of gait. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with one leg in front of the other. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. More advanced: 1. Take smaller steps.

Position the lines further apart to increase step length. Practice stepping backwards to pass the rear line with your affected leg. Client's aim To improve your ability to move your leg back and forth when standing. 2. More advanced: 1. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Position the lines closer together to decrease step length. Provide Repeat __ times. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with two lines behind them. Instruct the patient to step backwards to pass the rear line with their affected leg. Client's instructions Position yourself standing with two lines behind you.Exercise booklet for { }477 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Stepping backwards to a line with the affected leg Therapist's aim To improve the ability to move the leg back and forth when standing. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Ensure that both feet point forwards and the weight is transferred backwards. hand support for balance. Ensure that both feet point forwards.

Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. 2. Ensure that both feet point forwards and the affected knee only flexes slightly. Place the stool closer to the block. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . 2. Instruct the patient to step down with their affected leg and let their knee bend forwards to touch the stool.Exercise booklet for { }478 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Stepping down from a block to a knee cue Therapist's aim To improve the ability to weight-bear through the leg. Client's aim To improve your ability to weight-bear through your leg. Repeat __ times. Ensure that both feet point forwards and your affected knee only bends slightly. More advanced: 1. Place the stool further away from the block. Wear a backpack with weights in it. 3. Decrease the height of the block. Practice stepping down with your affected leg and bending your knee forwards to touch the stool. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing on a block with a stool placed at knee height in front of them. Increase the height of the block. Client's instructions Position yourself standing on a block with a stool placed at knee height in front of you.

Client's aim To improve your ability to walk. Increase the variation in height of the objects. Increase Repeat __ times.Exercise booklet for { }479 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Stepping forward over uneven blocks Therapist's aim To improve the ability to walk. run and climb stairs. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with some stable objects of different heights in front of them. 2. More advanced: 1. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. 2. Ensure patient is wearing suitable footwear. Provide hand support for balance. the distance between the objects. 2. Ensure objects are stable and appropriate. Practice walking from object to object. Precautions 1. Decrease the variation in height of the objects. Instruct the patient to walk from object to object. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Client's instructions Position yourself standing with some stable objects of different heights in front of you. run and climb stairs.

Position the block Repeat __ times. Client's instructions Position yourself standing with a block diagonally forwards on your unaffected side. More advanced: 1. Ensure that both feet point forwards. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with a block diagonally forwards on their unaffected side to constrain lateral foot movement. Client's aim To improve your ability to stand and walk.Exercise booklet for { }480 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Stepping forward with the unaffected leg to a target Therapist's aim To improve the ability to stand and walk. further medially. Instruct the patient to step forward with their unaffected leg without touching the block. Practice stepping forward with your unaffected leg without touching the block. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Position the block further laterally. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Ensure that both feet point forwards.

Practice stepping forwards and backwards with your unaffected leg. Client's aim To improve your ability to weight-bear through your affected leg. Practice stepping with the affected foot on the floor. Practice transferring weight laterally in standing. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with their affected knee resting side-on to a chair. Progressions and variations Repeat __ times. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Adjust the chair height so that your hips are level. Less advanced: 1. Ensure that your shoulders remain over your hips. Adjust the chair height so that their hips are level.Exercise booklet for { }481 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Stepping forwards and backwards with the affected knee on a chair Therapist's aim To improve the ability to weight-bear through the affected leg. More advanced: 1. Ensure that the shoulders remain over the hips. Client's instructions Position yourself standing with your affected knee resting side-on to a chair. Instruct the patient to step forwards and backwards with their unaffected leg.

Progressions and variations Repeat __ times. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with an obstacle on the floor in front of them and a table nearby for support. Use obstacles that can be squashed if stood on. Ensure that hand support is used only if necessary. Practice stepping over the obstacle and back again. Client's instructions Position yourself standing with an obstacle on the floor in front of you and a table nearby for support.Exercise booklet for { }482 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Stepping forwards over an obstacle with hand support nearby Therapist's aim To improve the ability to walk over uneven ground. Instruct the patient to step over the obstacle and back again. Ensure that hand support is used only if necessary. Remove hand support. 2. Less advanced: 1. More advanced: 1. Client's aim To improve your ability to walk over uneven ground. Add a concurrent task. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 .

Fri Right . Client's instructions Position yourself standing with a table placed in front of you at hip level. Ensure that both feet point forwards. Practice stepping forward with your unaffected leg and bringing your hips forward to touch the table during the step. Ensure that both feet point forwards. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with a table placed in front of them at hip level. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Repeat __ times. Place the table further away.Exercise booklet for { }483 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Stepping forwards to a cue Therapist's aim To improve the ability to walk. Instruct the patient to step forward with their unaffected leg and bring their hips forward to touch the table during the step. Client's aim To improve your ability to walk. Place the table closer. More advanced: 1.

Client's aim To improve your ability to step forwards and reach for an object. Client's instructions Position yourself standing with an object placed on a high table in front of you. 2. Fri Right . Use an object that is difficult to manipulate with the hand. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with an object placed on a high table in front of them. Instruct the patient to step forwards and pick up the object.Exercise booklet for { }484 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Stepping forwards to reach for an object Therapist's aim To improve the ability to step forwards and reach for an object. More advanced: 1. Position the object further away. Position the object closer. 2. Practice stepping forwards to pick up the object. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Use an object that is easy to manipulate with the hand. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Repeat __ times.

Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing on their toes with a stool placed in front of them. your weight is borne through your back foot. your shoulders remain over your hips and most of Repeat __ times. Client's instructions Position yourself standing on your toes with a stool placed in front of you. Provide hand support for balance. Increase the distance to the stool. More advanced: 1. Ensure that both feet point forwards. Instruct the patient to step up onto the stool with their unaffected leg while remaining on their toes on their affected leg. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. 2. Ensure that both feet point forwards. Client's aim To improve your ability to stand on your toes in preparation for running.Exercise booklet for { }485 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Stepping onto a stool off tip-toes Therapist's aim To improve the ability to stand on the toes in preparation for running. the shoulders remain over the hips and most of the weight is borne through the back foot. Practice stepping up onto the stool with your unaffected leg while remaining on your toes on your affected leg. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Decrease the distance to the stool.

placed at knee-height in front of them. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with an obstacle. Provide hand support for balance. Client's instructions Position yourself standing with an obstacle. Practice stepping over the obstacle without touching it. Client's aim To improve your ability to walk in different environments. 2.Exercise booklet for { }486 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Stepping over a raised rope Therapist's aim To improve the ability to walk in different environments. More advanced: 1. such as a rope. placed at knee-height in front of you. Increase the height of the obstacle. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Decrease the height of the obstacle. 2. Repeat __ times. Instruct the patient to step over the obstacle without touching it. Add a concurrent task. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . such as a rope.

Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Repeat __ times. Take smaller steps. Client's instructions Position yourself standing with your feet together. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing. Practice stepping sideways. Client's aim To improve your ability to walk. Ensure that the knees remain extended and the feet point forwards.Exercise booklet for { }487 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Stepping sideways Therapist's aim To improve the ability to walk. More advanced: 1. Ensure that your knees are kept straight and your feet point forwards. Take larger steps. Instruct the patient to step sideways.

More advanced: 1. Practice stepping sideways. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with their back against a wall. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1.Exercise booklet for { }488 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Stepping sideways against a wall Therapist's aim To improve the ability to walk. Repeat __ times. Provide hand support for balance. Instruct the patient to step sideways. Ensure that both feet point forwards. Client's aim To improve your ability to walk. Ensure that both feet point forwards. Take larger steps. 2. Client's instructions Position yourself standing with your back against a wall. Take smaller steps.

Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . 2. Take smaller steps. 2. Repeat with your other leg. Practice transferring weight onto your affected leg. Repeat with the other leg. the feet point forwards and the heels and back remain in contact with the wall. Client's instructions Position yourself standing with your feet apart and your back and heels against a wall. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. More advanced: 1. Take larger steps.Exercise booklet for { }489 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Stepping sideways and back with the back against a wall Therapist's aim To improve the ability to transfer weight for standing and walking. then stepping your unaffected leg towards your affected leg. then step their unaffected leg towards their affected leg. Perform the exercise without standing against the wall. Ensure that the knees remain extended. Repeat __ times. Client's aim To improve your ability to take weight from one foot to the other for standing or walking. Provide hand support for balance. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with their feet apart and their back and heels against a wall. your feet point forwards and your heels and back remain in contact with the wall. Instruct the patient to transfer weight onto their affected leg. Ensure that your knees remain extended.

More advanced: 1. 3. Instruct the patient to walk sideways from object to object. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with some stable objects of different heights beside them. 2.Exercise booklet for { }490 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Stepping sideways on uneven blocks Therapist's aim To improve the ability to walk. Decrease the height variation of the objects. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. 2. Walk sideways with a step-to gait. Increase Repeat __ times. 2. Ensure patient is wearing suitable footwear. Precautions 1. Walk sideways by crossing one leg over the other. Provide hand support for balance. Client's aim To improve your ability to walk. Practice walking sideways from object to object. run and climb stairs. Ensure objects are stable and appropriate. 3. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . the distance between the objects. Client's instructions Position yourself standing with some stable objects of different heights beside you. Increase the height variation of the objects. run and climb stairs.

Client's instructions Position yourself standing with your affected foot on a block beside you. Provide hand support for balance. Instruct the patient to step up and down sideways onto the block with their unaffected leg. 2. Client's aim To improve your ability to stand or walk. 2. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with their affected foot on a block beside them. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . your feet point straight ahead and your shoulders remain over Repeat __ times. More advanced: 1. the feet point forwards and the shoulders are over the hips. Ensure that your affected knee straightens and bends.Exercise booklet for { }491 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Stepping sideways onto a block Therapist's aim To improve the ability to stand or walk. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Ensure that the affected knee extends and flexes. Increase the height of the block. Practice stepping up and down sideways onto the block with your unaffected leg. your hips. Wear a backpack with weights in it. Decrease the height of the block.

Ensure that the affected knee extends and flexes. Client's aim To improve your ability to stand or walk.Increase the height of the block. Instruct the patient to step up and down sideways onto the block with their unaffected leg. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with their affected foot on a block beside them and a table nearby for support. 2. and the hand support is used only if necessary. the feet point forwards and the hand support is used only if necessary. Remove hand support. your feet point straight ahead Repeat __ times. Ensure that your affected knee straightens and bends. More advanced: 1. Decrease the height of the block. 3. Client's instructions Position yourself standing with your affected foot on a block beside you and a table nearby for support. Practice stepping up and down sideways onto the block with your unaffected leg. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Wear a backpack with weights in it.Exercise booklet for { }492 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Stepping sideways onto a block with hand support nearby Therapist's aim To improve the ability to stand or walk.

Exercise booklet for { }493 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Stepping sideways over an obstacle with hand support nearby Therapist's aim To improve the ability to walk over uneven ground. Ensure that hand support is used only if necessary. Practice stepping sideways over the obstacle and back again. Instruct the patient to step sideways over the obstacle and back again. Ensure that hand support is used only if necessary. Progressions and variations Repeat __ times. Add a concurrent task. 2. Client's aim To improve your ability to walk over uneven ground. Less advanced: 1. Use obstacles that can be squashed if stood on. More advanced: 1. Client's instructions Position yourself standing with an obstacle on the floor beside you and a table nearby for support. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with an obstacle on the floor beside them and a table nearby for support. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Remove hand support.

Less advanced: 1. Instruct the patient to step sideways along the line while throwing and catching the ball with both hands. Client's instructions Position yourself standing with your toes on a line and holding onto a ball. Decrease step length. Decrease speed of task. Progressions and variations Repeat __ times. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Increase speed of task. 2. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with their toes on a line and holding onto a ball. Ensure that their trunk and feet face forwards. More advanced: 1. Practice moving sideways along the line while throwing and catching the ball with both hands. Increase step length. Client's aim To improve your ability to run and throw a ball. Leap sideways (include a flight phase). Ensure that your body and feet face forwards.Exercise booklet for { }494 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Stepping sideways while catching and throwing a ball Therapist's aim To improve the ability to run and throw a ball. 3. 2.

Progressions and variations Repeat __ times.Increase distance to the targets. Instruct the patient to step to the targets alternately. Place the targets in a full circle around the patient.Exercise booklet for { }495 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Stepping to targets with hand support nearby Therapist's aim To improve the ability to walk in different directions. Practice stepping to the targets alternately. Ensure that most of the weight is transferred to the front leg and that hand support is used only if necessary. Client's aim To improve your ability to walk in different directions. Remove hand support. Client's instructions Position yourself standing with targets placed in a semi-circle on the floor in front of you. 2. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with targets placed in a semi-circle on the floor in front of them. Decrease distance to the targets. 3. More advanced: 1. Ensure that most of your weight is transferred to the front leg and that hand support is used only if necessary. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Less advanced: 1.

Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with a step in front of them.Exercise booklet for { }496 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Stepping up onto a block Therapist's aim To improve the ability to walk and walk up stairs. Decrease the height of the step. Increase the height of the step. Client's aim To improve your ability to walk and walk up stairs. Repeat __ times. Provide hand support for balance. 2. Instruct the patient to step up onto the step. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. More advanced: 1. Practice stepping up onto the step. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . 2. Wear a backpack with weights in it. Client's instructions Position yourself standing with a step in front of you.

Therapist's instructions Position the patient in supine with their legs extended. Start with your leg straight and your heel on the bed. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the front of your hip and knee. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Perform __ sets of __ reps. Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your back with your legs straight. Finish with your leg straight and your heel above the bed. Progress using strength training principles. Do__ sessions per week. Progressions and variations More advanced: 1.Exercise booklet for { }497 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Straight leg raise Therapist's aim To strengthen the hip flexors and knee extensors. Instruct the patient to flex one hip while keeping their knee extended.

Instruct the patient to flex their hip while keeping their knee extended. Start with your leg straight and your heel on the bed. More advanced: 1. knee and abdomen. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Therapist's instructions Position the patient in supine with one leg extended and their other knee flexed. knee extensors and abdominals. Ensure that the other leg remains flexed and the lower back remains in contact with the bed. Ensure that your other leg remains bent and your lower back remains in contact with the bed. Perform __ sets of __ reps. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles at the front of your hip. Finish with your leg straight and your heel above the bed.Exercise booklet for { }498 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Straight leg raise with other knee bent Therapist's aim To strengthen the hip flexors. Progress using strength training principles. Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your back with one leg straight and your other leg bent. Do__ Progressions and variations sessions per week.

Practice straightening your fingers to touch a target object with your middle knuckle joint. Instruct the patient to extend their fingers to touch a target object with their proximal interphalangeal joints. Client's aim To improve your ability to manipulate objects with your hand. Use a cylinder with a smaller diameter. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting while grasping a cylindrical object between the tips of your fingers and thumb and place a sandbag over your forearm.Exercise booklet for { }499 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Straightening and bending the fingers using targets Therapist's aim To improve the ability to manipulate objects with the hand. Use a cylinder with a larger diameter. Ensure that your thumb and wrist do Repeat __ times. 2. Place sandbag over their forearm. not move. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. More advanced: 1. Grasp and release objects. 2. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting grasping a cylindrical object between the tips of their fingers and thumb. Position the target closer to the proximal interphalangeal joints. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Ensure that the thumb and wrist do not move. Position the target further away from the proximal interphalangeal joints. 3.

Client's instructions Place the two electrodes over the muscle belly as shown. Precautions 1. Do__ sessions per week. Therapist's instructions Place the electrodes over the muscle belly of the supraspinatus.Exercise booklet for { }500 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Supraspinatus electrical stimulation Therapist's aim To strengthen the supraspinatus. Perform skin tests. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Perform __ sets of __ reps. Client's aim To strengthen the muscle at the top of your shoulder.

Use a lower chair or block. Ensure that reciprocal arm swing is achieved. your shoulders are over your hips and your unaffected foot points forwards. 4. Increase speed of task. and a chair or large block in front of you. and then extend their hip and knee to return to the starting position as quickly as possible. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Count the number of repetitions in a set time period for feedback. Client's instructions Position yourself standing with your affected leg behind you.Exercise booklet for { }501 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Swinging the foot quickly up to a target Therapist's aim To improve the ability to run. Place lines on the floor to serve as targets for foot placement and a chair or large block in front of the patient. Use a higher chair or block. Ensure that your arms swing (like when running). Practice moving your affected leg forwards to touch the chair with the sole of your foot then moving it backwards to return to the starting position as quickly as possible. 3. Instruct the patient to flex their affected hip and knee forwards to touch the chair in front of them with the sole of their foot. your unaffected leg forwards Repeat __ times. More advanced: 1. Client's aim To improve your ability to run. 3. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. the shoulders are over the hips and the unaffected foot points forwards. Place the chair or block closer. Decrease speed of task. Place the chair or block further away. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in step-standing with their affected leg behind them and their unaffected leg forwards. 2. 2.

Progressions and variations Repeat __ times. Client's instructions Position yourself standing with your toes on a line and facing obliquely. Provide hand support for balance. Instruct the patient to swivel on the balls of their feet to face obliquely in the opposite direction. Ensure that both feet rotate the same amount. Ensure that both feet rotate the same amount and your toes stay on the line.Exercise booklet for { }502 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Swivelling on the balls of the feet Therapist's aim To improve the ability to change direction when walking or running. Client's aim To improve your ability to change direction when walking or running. Swivel the feet through a smaller range of movement. Less advanced: 1. More advanced: 1. Swivel the feet through a larger range of movement. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with their toes on a line and facing obliquely. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . 2. Practice swivelling on the balls of your feet to face obliquely in the opposite direction.

Ensure appropriate for patients with swallowing difficulties. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with a cup on a table in front of them. Client's aim To improve your ability to bring a cup to your mouth. Ensure that you keep your head up straight. Lift the hand to the mouth without holding onto a cup. Practice lifting the cup up to your mouth. Ensure that their head remains erect. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Repeat __ times.Exercise booklet for { }503 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Taking a cup to the mouth Therapist's aim To improve the ability to bring a cup to the mouth. Precautions 1. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. More advanced: 1. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with a cup on a table in front of you. Instruct the patient to lift the cup up to their mouth. Add water to the cup.

Remove the pillow. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. More advanced: 1. Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your back with a rolled-up towel underneath the length of your upper spine. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in supine with a rolled-up towel underneath the length of their thoracic spine. 2.Exercise booklet for { }504 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Thoracic spine and upper-chest stretch Therapist's aim To stretch or maintain length of the trunk and upper chest muscles. 3. Use a smaller towel. Place the arms up behind the head. Use a larger towel. Client's aim To stretch or maintain range in your trunk and chest muscles. Impaired or absent sensation of stretch. Hold for __ minutes. Precautions 1.

Repeat __ times. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with some nylon line and some macaroni in a container on a table in front of them. Pick up the macaroni with different fingers. 3. Thread larger objects. 4. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with some nylon line and some macaroni in a container on a table in front of you. 2. Thread smaller objects. 2. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Client's aim To improve your ability to manipulate objects with your hand. Pick up several pieces of macaroni. keeping them in the hand as each piece of macaroni is threaded. Use a container with a larger diameter.Exercise booklet for { }505 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Threading macaroni Therapist's aim To improve the ability to manipulate objects with the hand. Use a container with a smaller diameter. More advanced: 1. Instruct the patient to pick up the macaroni one at a time using their affected thumb and index finger and thread it onto the nylon line held in their unaffected hand. Practice picking up the macaroni one at a time using your affected thumb and index finger and threading it onto the nylon line held in your unaffected hand.

Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing. 2. Repeat __ times. Position the target further away. Instruct the patient to throw a ball overhead at a target with both hands. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right .Exercise booklet for { }506 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Throwing a ball overhead with two hands Therapist's aim To improve the ability to throw a ball overhead using both hands. Use a lightweight ball. Position the target closer. Practice throwing a ball overhead at a target with both hands. Client's aim To improve your ability to throw a ball overhead using both hands. 3. 3. Client's instructions Position yourself standing up. More advanced: 1. Use a heavier ball. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Position the target higher. 2. Position the target lower.

Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing facing a wall with one leg in front of the other. 2. Practice throwing and catching a ball at a target on the wall. 2. Let the ball bounce before catching it. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Client's aim To improve your ability to throw and catch. Place a marker on the wall as a target. Stand closer to the wall. 3. Use a bouncier ball. Use a heavier ball.Exercise booklet for { }507 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Throwing a ball with one hand Therapist's aim To improve the ability to throw and catch. Stand further away from the wall. 3. Use a smaller target. Instruct the patient to throw the ball at the target on the wall and then catch it again. Client's instructions Position yourself standing facing a wall with one leg in front of the other. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . 4. Use a larger target. More advanced: 1. Repeat __ times.

Position the target further away. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Position the target closer. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with some objects beside them and a target in front of them. objects higher off the ground. Client's aim To improve your ability to reach and throw objects and maintain a standing position. Position the Repeat __ times. Pick up heavier objects. Client's instructions Position yourself standing with some objects beside you and a target in front of you. 3. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. 2. Instruct the patient to reach down and pick up an object and throw it at the target.Exercise booklet for { }508 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Throwing an object underarm at a target Therapist's aim To improve the ability to reach and throw objects underarm and maintain a standing position. 2. Practice reaching down to pick up an object and practice throwing it at the target. Pick up lighter objects. More advanced: 1.

Client's instructions Position yourself standing up. Repeat __ times. Position the patient closer. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Client's aim To improve your ability to throw and catch using both hands. Use a heavier ball. 2. 2. throw to either side of the patient). Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing. Practice throwing and catching a ball with both hands. Use a smaller ball. More advanced: 1. Use a lightweight ball or balloon. Change the speed and trajectory of throw (eg. Instruct the patient to throw and catch a ball with both hands.Exercise booklet for { }509 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Throwing and catching a large ball with two hands Therapist's aim To improve the ability to throw and catch using two hands. 3.

Place the electrodes over the thumb abductors.Exercise booklet for { }510 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Thumb abduction with electrical stimulation Therapist's aim To strengthen the thumb abductors and improve the ability to abduct the thumb. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with your hand held vertically. Practice opening your thumb and sliding it along your index finger in time with the electrical Perform exercise for __ minutes. Place the electrodes over your thumb as shown. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with their forearm in mid pronation. Precautions 1. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . your fingers bent and your thumb resting on top of your index finger. Practice without electrical stimulation. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles that open your thumb. their fingers flexed and their thumb resting on top of their index finger. Perform skin tests. Mark lines on the index finger to use as targets for thumb abduction. stimulation machine. More advanced: 1. Instruct the patient to abduct their thumb and slide it along their index finger in time with the electrical stimulation machine. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1.

Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . More advanced. Client's aim To improve your ability to abduct your thumb to be able to pick things up. you keep your forearm and wrist still and only move your thumb. Move the target line further away from the thumb. Ensure that the cup does not deform and only the thumb moves. Position your thumb and index finger on top of the stick. 1.Exercise booklet for { }511 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Thumb abduction: sliding the thumb on a stick with hand on top of cup Therapist's aim To improve the ability to abduct the thumb. Instruct the patient to abduct their thumb to reach a target line. Use a smaller diameter cup. Move the target line closer to the thumb. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Use a larger diameter cup. 2. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting in front of a table with your hand grasping an upside-down foam cup that has a flat stick taped on top of it. Ensure that Repeat __ times. Position the thumb and index finger on top of the stick. Practice moving your thumb away from the cup to reach a target line. 2. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting in front of a table with their hand grasping an inverted foam cup that has a flat stick (or tongue depressor) taped on top of it.

Exercise booklet for { }512 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Toe raises in standing Therapist's aim To improve the ability to stand or walk. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with their back against a wall. hand support for balance. Provide Repeat __ times. your knees slightly bent and both feet pointing forwards. Move the feet closer to the wall (knees less bent). Ensure that the feet don`t invert. Client's instructions Position yourself standing with your back against a wall. Instruct the patient to raise and lower their toes. Practice raising and lowering your toes. 2. Client's aim To improve your ability to stand or walk. More advanced: 1. Ensure that the soles of your feet do not turn inwards. both feet pointing forwards and the knees slightly flexed. Move the feet further away from the wall (knees more bent).

Client's instructions Position yourself sitting while holding your tongue gently between your teeth. Fri Right . Client's aim To strengthen the base of your tongue and to improve your ability to swallow and maintain an oral diet. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Repeat __ times. Instruct the patient to swallow strongly while concentrating on the squeezing sensation at the back of their throat. Practice swallowing strongly while concentrating on the squeezing sensation at the back of your throat.Exercise booklet for { }513 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Tongue base strengthening (Masako manoeuvre) Therapist's aim To strengthen the base of the tongue and to improve the ability to retract the tongue to initiate swallowing. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting while holding their tongue gently between their teeth.

Client's aim To increase strength of your tongue and improve your ability to swallow and speak clearly. Repeat __ times. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting. Practice poking your tongue out as far as possible and then moving your tongue as far left. More advanced: 1. Hold for __ seconds.Exercise booklet for { }514 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Tongue strengthening . Client's instructions Position yourself sitting in a chair.lateral tongue movements Therapist's aim To increase strength of the tongue and improve the ability to swallow and speak clearly. then as far right as possible. Use a mirror for visual feedback. then as far right as possible. Instruct the patient to poke their tongue out as far as possible and then move their tongue as far left. Increase rate of tongue movement. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right .

Use a mirror for visual feedback. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. direction.Exercise booklet for { }515 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Tongue strengthening . Client's instructions Position yourself sitting in a chair. Instruct the patient to move their tongue around the outside of their teeth in a circular motion while keeping their mouth closed. Client's aim To increase strength of your tongue and improve your ability to clear food from the side of your mouth when eating. Repeat in the opposite direction. Practice moving your tongue around the outside of your teeth in a circular motion while keeping your mouth closed.moving tongue in circular motion Therapist's aim To increase strength of the tongue and improve the ability to clear food from the buccal cavities when eating. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting. Repeat in the opposite Repeat __ times. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 .

Instruct the patient to push their tongue into their left cheek then push their tongue into their right cheek. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 .Exercise booklet for { }516 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Tongue strengthening . Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with two fingers placed on their cheek. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with two fingers placed on your cheek.pressing tongue into cheek Therapist's aim To increase strength of the tongue and improve the ability to clear food from the buccal cavities when eating. Provide resistance with the fingers. More advanced: 1. using their fingers to feel the position of the tongue. times. 2. Client's aim To increase strength of your tongue and improve your ability to clear food from the side of your mouth when eating. using your Hold for __ seconds. Increase rate of tongue movement. Practice pushing your tongue into your left cheek then pushing your tongue into your right cheek. Repeat __ fingers to feel the position of your tongue. Use a mirror for visual feedback. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1.

tongue movement. Use a mirror for visual feedback. then downwards towards your chin as far as possible. Practice poking your tongue out as far as possible and then moving your tongue upwards towards your nose. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Client's instructions Position yourself sitting in a chair.vertical tongue movements Therapist's aim To increase strength of the tongue and improve the ability to speak clearly. More advanced: 1. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting. Progressions and variations Hold for __ seconds. Repeat __ Less advanced: 1. Instruct the patient to poke their tongue out as far as possible and then move their tongue upwards towards their nose. Increase rate of times.Exercise booklet for { }517 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Tongue strengthening . then downwards towards their chin as far as possible. Client's aim To increase strength of your tongue and improve your ability to speak clearly.

Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with their hand resting in front of them. Repeat using the second. Practice touching the tip of your first finger to the tip of your thumb. Decrease speed of task. Ensure that there is cupping of the medial border of the hand. third and fourth fingers. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Instruct the patient to touch the tip of their first finger to the tip of their thumb. Perform task with the hand in different positions. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with your hand resting in front of you. Repeat __ times. Repeat using your second.Exercise booklet for { }518 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Touching the thumb to each fingertip Therapist's aim To improve the ability to manipulate objects with the hand. Increase speed of task. third and fourth fingers. 2. Client's aim To improve your ability to manipulate objects with your hand. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. More advanced: 1.

Client's aim To improve your ability to take weight from one foot to the other for standing or walking. Repeat __ times. 3.Exercise booklet for { }519 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Transferring weight laterally in standing Therapist's aim To improve the ability to transfer weight for standing and walking. Perform the exercise standing next to the wall. Instruct the patient to transfer weight onto their affected leg. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Practice transferring your weight from one leg to the other. 2. Client's instructions Position yourself standing with your feet slightly apart. Ensure that your shoulders remain over your hips. Use cues for feedback about lateral displacement of the hips. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Use scales for feedback about weight-bearing. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with their feet slightly apart. Ensure that the shoulders remain over the hips.

Use targets at the hip and shoulder for feedback. More advanced: 1. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing in the corner of a room with their back against one wall. Ensure that your back remains against the back wall and both feet point forwards. affected hip and shoulder away from the side wall to stand upright. Instruct the patient to transfer their weight laterally and move their affected hip and shoulder away from the side wall to stand upright. Ensure that the back remains against the back wall and both feet point forwards. your affected side close to the side wall and your feet slightly apart. 2.Exercise booklet for { }520 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Transferring weight laterally in standing against two walls Therapist's aim To improve the ability to maintain an upright standing position. Client's instructions Position yourself standing in the corner of a room with your back against one wall. Practice moving your Repeat __ times. Client's aim To improve your ability to stand upright. Practice without the wall behind. Use a mirror for feedback on patient position. their affected side close to the side wall and their feet slightly apart.

the targets. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Client's instructions Position yourself standing with your unaffected side close to a wall and your feet slightly apart.Exercise booklet for { }521 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Transferring weight laterally in standing beside a wall Therapist's aim To improve the ability to transfer weight for standing and walking. Practice exercise with the side and back against a wall. Client's aim To improve your ability to take weight from one foot to the other for standing or walking. Instruct the patient to transfer weight onto their affected leg and bring their affected hip and shoulder to touch the targets. More advanced: 1. Place two targets at hip and shoulder height on your affected side. Practice transferring weight onto your affected leg and bring your affected hip and shoulder to touch Repeat __ times. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Place two targets at hip and shoulder height on their affected side. Increase the distance to the targets. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with their unaffected side close to a wall and their feet slightly apart.

Exercise booklet for { }522 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Transferring weight laterally in standing with the back against a wall Therapist's aim To improve the ability to transfer weight for standing and walking. about lateral displacement of the hips. Practice transferring your weight from one leg to the other. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Client's instructions Position yourself standing with your shoulders against a wall. 2. Instruct the patient to transfer weight onto their affected leg. Use scales for feedback about weight-bearing. their bottom away from the wall and their feet slightly apart and as far back as comfortable. Client's aim To improve your ability to take weight from one foot to the other for standing or walking. Use cues for feedback Repeat __ times. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with their shoulders against a wall. Ensure that the shoulders remain close to the wall. More advanced: 1. Perform the exercise without standing next to the wall. Ensure that your shoulders are kept close to the wall. your bottom away from the wall and your feet slightly apart and as far back as comfortable. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1.

Therapist's instructions Place the electrodes over the muscle belly of the elbow extensors. Client's instructions Place the two electrodes over the muscle belly as shown. Perform skin tests. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Perform __ sets of __ reps.Exercise booklet for { }523 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Triceps electrical stimulation Therapist's aim To strengthen the elbow extensors. Precautions 1. Client's aim To strengthen your triceps. Do__ sessions per week.

Hold for __ minutes. More advanced: 1. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Place a weight on the top of your knees. Decrease the weight on the knees. Place a weight on the top of their knees. Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your back with your shoulders on the bed and your pelvis and legs rotated to one side.Exercise booklet for { }524 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Trunk and spine stretch in supine Therapist's aim To stretch or maintain range in the spine. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in supine with their shoulders on the bed and their pelvis and legs rotated to one side. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Client's aim To stretch or maintain range in your spine. Increase the weight on the knees.

Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your side over a pillow. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sidelying over a pillow. Hold for __ minutes. Client's aim To stretch or maintain range in your trunk. Add another pillow. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Remove the pillow. More advanced: 1.Exercise booklet for { }525 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Trunk side flexor stretch Therapist's aim To stretch or maintain length of the trunk side-flexors.

Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right .Exercise booklet for { }526 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Turning around on the spot Therapist's aim To improve the ability to walk in different directions. Add a concurrent task. 2. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Client's aim To improve your ability walk in different directions. Practice turning around on the spot. Instruct the patient to turn around on the spot. 2. Repeat __ times. Pivot from side to side with two feet on the floor. Turn on the spot towards the unaffected side. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing. Client's instructions Position yourself standing up. Turn on the spot towards the affected side. More advanced: 1.

Use smaller nuts and bolts. Client's aim To improve your ability to manipulate objects with your hand. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with some nuts and bolts on a table in front of them. Use larger nuts and bolts. Instruct the patient to pick up a nut with their affected hand and thread it onto a bolt using their thumb and index finger. Less advanced: 1.Exercise booklet for { }527 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Turning nuts and bolts Therapist's aim To improve the ability to manipulate objects with the hand. Practice picking up a nut with your affected hand and threading it onto a bolt using your thumb and index finger. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with some nuts and bolts on a table in front of you. More advanced: 1. Progressions and variations Repeat __ times. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 .

More advanced: 1. Turn the head only. Client's aim To improve your ability to sit unsupported. Turn and reach for an object. Repeat __ times. 2. Practice turning your head and shoulders to look behind you. Look up and down only. Instruct the patient to turn their head and shoulders to look behind them. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right .Exercise booklet for { }528 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Turning the head and shoulders in sitting Therapist's aim To improve the ability to sit unsupported. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with their thighs supported and feet flat on the floor. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with your thighs supported and feet flat on the floor.

Client's instructions Position yourself standing against a wall with one foot on a wedge and the other foot resting on a stool in front of you. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Increase the angle Hold for __ minutes. Decrease the angle of the wedge. Ensure that their leg on the wedge is kept straight and both feet point forwards. Precautions 1. Impaired or absent sensation of stretch. of the wedge. Client's aim To stretch or maintain range in your ankles. More advanced: 1. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing against a wall with one foot on a wedge and the other foot resting on a stool in front of them. Ensure that your leg on the wedge is kept straight and both feet point forwards.Exercise booklet for { }529 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Unilateral ankle plantarflexor stretch standing against a wall Therapist's aim To stretch or maintain length of the ankle plantarflexors.

Lean forward while keeping your leg and back as straight as possible. Instruct the patient to lean forward while keeping their leg and back as straight as possible. Client's aim To stretch or maintain length in the muscles at the back of your thigh. Impaired or absent sensation of stretch. More Hold for __ minutes. Decrease the amount of forward lean.Exercise booklet for { }530 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Unilateral hamstring stretch in long sitting Therapist's aim To stretch or maintain length of the hamstrings. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with one leg extended in front of them and the other leg bent out to the side. 2. advanced: 1. Provide back support. Precautions 1. Increase the amount of forward lean. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with one leg out straight in front of you and the other leg bent out to the side.

Precautions 1. Client's aim To stretch or maintain length in the muscles at the back of your thigh. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Hold for __ minutes. Impaired or absent sensation of stretch. Pull leg further into hip flexion.Exercise booklet for { }531 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Unilateral hamstring stretch in supine Therapist's aim To stretch or maintain length of the hamstrings. Place your hands around your thigh for support and straighten your knee. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in supine with one leg flexed at the hip. Fri Right . Add ankle dorsiflexion. Instruct the patient to place their hands around their thigh for support and straighten their knee. Progressions and variations More advanced: 1. 2. Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your back with one leg bent up at the hip.

Support their hand on a pillow and place a weight on their hand. Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your back with your hand supported above your head on a pillow. Place a weight on your hand. 2. Place a towel under the elbow. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Precautions 1. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Impaired or absent sensation of stretch. Increase the weight on the hand. Hold for __ minutes. Client's aim To stretch or maintain range in your shoulder. Shoulder pain. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in supine with their shoulder abducted and externally rotated and their elbow flexed.Exercise booklet for { }532 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Unilateral shoulder internal rotator stretch in supine Therapist's aim To stretch or maintain length of the shoulder internal rotators. More advanced: 1.

Position the patient in supine. More advanced: 1. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your back with a pillow underneath your back. Hold for __ minutes. Position the patient supine lying over two pillows. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1.Exercise booklet for { }533 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Upper chest and abdominal stretch Therapist's aim To stretch or maintain length of the anterior trunk muscles. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in supine with a pillow underneath their back. Client's aim To stretch or maintain range in your trunk and neck.

Therapist's instructions Position the patient in supine with their head resting on the bed without a pillow. Hold for __ seconds. Instruct the patient to raise their head and look at their feet. More advanced: 1. Sustain the position but perform fewer repetitions. Less advanced: 1. Increase the number and speed of repetitions. Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your back with your head resting on the bed without a pillow. Ensure that the shoulders are not raised. Repeat __ Progressions and variations times. Finish with your head raised to look at your feet.Exercise booklet for { }534 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Upper oesophageal sphincter opening (Shaker exercise) Therapist's aim To strengthen the suprahyoid muscles that open the upper oesophageal (cricopharyngeal) sphincter and improve the ability to clear food through the pharynx. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Start with your head on the bed. Ensure that your shoulders are not raised. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles that assist with swallowing and improve your ability to swallow and maintain an oral diet.

Practice stabbing the putty with the fork and then cut the putty with the knife. the blade of the knife Repeat __ times. More advanced: 1. fork and some putty on a table in front of you. Ensure that the prongs of the fork push downwards without dragging across the putty. Put the putty on a plate. Client's aim To improve your ability to use a knife and fork. fork and some putty on a table in front of them. 2. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Precautions 1. 2. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with a knife. the blade of the knife remains vertical and the index fingers are extended. remains vertical and your index fingers are kept straight. Ensure that the prongs of the fork push downwards without dragging across the putty. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with a knife. Use tape to position the fingers on the knife or fork appropriately. Stab and cut different objects. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Make deeper indents or cuts in the putty. Make shallower indents or cuts in the putty. 3.Exercise booklet for { }535 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Using a knife and fork Therapist's aim To improve the ability to use a knife and fork. Instruct the patient to stab the putty with the fork and then cut the putty with the knife. Ensure that the patient does not cut themselves.

Instruct the patient to draw similar circular loops continuously across the width of the paper without going above or below the lines. Repeat __ times. Draw some circular loops across the entire top line of the paper.Exercise booklet for { }536 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Using a pen Therapist's aim To improve the ability to write. Progressions and variations More advanced: 1. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with a pen and some lined paper on a table in front of them. Client's aim To improve your ability to write. Increase speed of task. Practice drawing circular loops continuously across the width of the paper without going above or below the lines. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with a pen and some lined paper on a table in front of you.

Precautions 1. Ensure that appropriate caution is taken when handling the safety pin.Exercise booklet for { }537 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Using a safety pin Therapist's aim To improve the ability to manipulate objects with the hand. Repeat __ times. Client's aim To improve your ability to manipulate objects with your hand. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Client's instructions Position yourself sitting in front of a table while holding a safety pin with your unaffected hand. Progressions and variations More advanced: 1. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting in front of a table while holding a safety pin with their unaffected hand. Instruct the patient to open and close the safety pin with their affected hand. Practice opening the safety pin using different fingers. Practice opening and closing the safety pin with your affected hand.

Practice turning the handle of the eggbeater. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Increase speed of task. Instruct the patient to turn the handle of the eggbeater. Practice using the eggbeater in a bowl of water. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting in front of a table while holding an eggbeater. Progressions and variations More advanced: 1. 3.Exercise booklet for { }538 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Using an eggbeater Therapist's aim To improve the ability to manipulate objects with the hands. Client's aim To improve your ability to manipulate objects with your hands. Perform exercise for __ minutes. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting in front of a table while holding an eggbeater. Practice turning the handle backwards and forwards. 2.

Use pegs that require more resistance to open. manipulate objects with the hand and to strengthen the finger and thumb flexors. Position the box further away. using your thumb Repeat __ times. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with some pegs on a table in front of you. 2. one at a time. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with some pegs on a table in front of them. manipulate objects with your hand and to strengthen the muscles that bend your fingers and thumb. Place a box in front that has horizontal wires across it.Exercise booklet for { }539 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Using pegs Therapist's aim To improve the ability to reach for objects. Practice picking up the pegs. Place a box in front that has horizontal wires across it. Client's aim To improve your ability to reach for objects. using their thumb and index finger and place them on the wires. and index finger and placing them on the wires. one at a time. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. More advanced: 1. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Instruct the patient to pick up the pegs. Use pegs that require less resistance to open.

Instruct the patient to cut out the shape with scissors. Use more intricate shapes. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Practice cutting out the shape with scissors. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting at a table with some paper with a random shape drawn on it. More advanced: 1. Use simpler shapes. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right .Exercise booklet for { }540 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Using scissors Therapist's aim To improve the ability to manipulate objects with the hand. Client's aim To improve your ability to manipulate objects with your hand. Repeat __ times. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting at a table with some paper with a random shape drawn on it.

Instruct the patient to pick up the paperclips one at a time using tweezers and place them in the cup. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . paperclips and a cup on a table in front of them. paperclips and a cup on a table in front of you. 2. Practice picking Repeat __ times. Client's aim To improve your ability to manipulate objects with your hand.Exercise booklet for { }541 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Using tweezers Therapist's aim To improve the ability to manipulate objects with the hand. More advanced: 1. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with some tweezers. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with some tweezers. Practice picking up the paperclips one at a time using the tweezers and placing them in the cup. Practice picking up larger objects. up smaller objects.

More advanced: 1.Exercise booklet for { }542 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Walking a set distance within a set time Therapist's aim To improve the ability to walk faster. Instruct the patient to walk as quickly as possible to the target line and record the time taken using a stopwatch. Client's aim To improve your ability to walk faster. Increase the distance to the target line. Client's instructions Position yourself standing on a line with another target line a set distance in front of you. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing on a line with another target line a set distance in front of them. Decrease walking speed. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Increase walking speed. Less advanced: 1. Decrease the distance to the target line. 2. 2. Practice walking to the target line as quickly as possible and record the time taken using a stopwatch. Progressions and variations Repeat __ times.

Choose a wider wall. Client's instructions Position yourself standing on a low wall. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . 3. Repeat __ times. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing on a low wall. More advanced: 1. 3.Exercise booklet for { }543 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Walking along a low wall Therapist's aim To improve the ability to walk with a smaller base of support. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Choose a narrower wall. Practice walking forward along the wall. Provide hand support for balance. Walk backwards along the wall. 2. Walk heel to toe along the wall. Client's aim To improve your ability to walk with your feet closer together. Instruct the patient to walk forward along the wall. Walk sideways along the wall. 2.

Walk around the obstacles without dribbling a ball. Practice dribbling the ball around the obstacles in a figure-of-eight pattern. Client's instructions Position yourself standing with a ball at your feet and two obstacles close-by. Repeat __ times. Instruct the patient to dribble the ball around the obstacles in a figure-of-eight pattern.Exercise booklet for { }544 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Walking and dribbling a ball around obstacles Therapist's aim To improve the ability to walk in different environments. Client's aim To improve your ability to walk in different environments. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with a ball at their feet and two obstacles close-by. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . More advanced: 1. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Increase speed of task.

Provide hand support for balance. More advanced: 1. Add a concurrent task. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Client's instructions Position yourself standing up.Exercise booklet for { }545 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Walking backwards Therapist's aim To improve the ability to walk in different directions. Client's aim To improve your ability to walk in different directions. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Practice walking backwards. Instruct the patient to walk backwards. Repeat __ times. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing.

Add a concurrent task.Exercise booklet for { }546 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Walking between lines Therapist's aim To improve the ability to walk with a smaller base of support. Repeat __ times. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. 2. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Instruct the patient to walk forwards in between the lines without touching them. Client's aim To improve your ability to walk with your feet closer together. Client's instructions Position yourself standing with two lines on the floor in front of you. Practice walking forwards in between the lines without touching them. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with two lines on the floor in front of them. Decrease the width of the lines. More advanced: 1. Increase the width of the lines.

Use hand-rail for balance. Practice walking down the stairs. Instruct the patient to walk down the stairs. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Walk down one step at a time leading with the affected leg. Increase the height of the stairs. More advanced: 1. Repeat __ times. Wear a backpack with weights in it. 2. Client's instructions Position yourself standing at the top of a flight of stairs. Decrease the height of the stairs. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing at the top of a flight of stairs. 2. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . 3.Exercise booklet for { }547 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Walking down stairs Therapist's aim To improve the ability to walk down stairs. Add a concurrent task. 3. Client's aim To improve your ability to walk down stairs.

the distance between the lines. Client's instructions Position yourself standing with lines evenly spaced across the floor in front of you.Exercise booklet for { }548 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Walking forwards over lines Therapist's aim To improve the ability to walk. Decrease the distance between the lines. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with lines evenly spaced across the floor in front of them. Ensure that each heel lands on the floor in front of the line. Increase Repeat __ times. More advanced: 1. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Instruct the patient to walk forwards over the lines. Client's aim To improve your ability to walk. Ensure that heel strike occurs in front of the line. Practice walking forwards over the lines. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right .

Less advanced: 1. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your stomach on a ball with your hands on the floor.Exercise booklet for { }549 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Walking hands forward and backward while prone on a ball Therapist's aim To strengthen the shoulder. hip and trunk muscles. Instruct the patient to walk their hands forward and backward. Ensure that you keep your body in a horizontal position and your legs remain steady on the ball. More advanced: 1. Progressions and variations Perform exercise for __ minutes. Ensure that their body is kept in a horizontal position and the legs remain steady on the ball. Increase forwards walking distance so that only the lower legs remain on the ball. Client's aim To strengthen your shoulder. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in prone on a ball with their hands on the floor. Practice walking your hands forward and backward. Decrease forwards walking distance. hip and trunk muscles.

Exercise booklet for { }550 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Walking in a corridor Therapist's aim To improve the ability to walk with a smaller base of support. Ensure that hand support is used only if necessary. Ensure that hand support is used only if necessary. Client's instructions Position yourself standing in a narrow corridor. Practice walking with the legs wider apart. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing in a narrow corridor. Instruct the patient to walk forwards down the corridor while keeping their feet closer together. Practice walking forwards down the corridor while keeping your feet closer together. Client's aim To improve your ability to walk with your feet closer together. Practice Repeat __ times. More advanced: 1. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . walking without hand support nearby.

Exercise booklet for { }551 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Walking in a figure-of-eight Therapist's aim To improve the ability to walk in different directions. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing. Walk in a smaller figure-ofeight pattern. 2. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Walk in straight lines and turn around with the affected leg on the inside. Instruct the patient to walk in a figure-of-eight pattern. Practice walking in a figure-of-eight pattern. 2. Increase speed of task. Repeat __ times. Client's instructions Position yourself standing up. More advanced: 1. Walk in a larger figure-of-eight pattern. Client's aim To improve your ability to walk in different directions.

More advanced: 1. Client's aim To improve your ability to walk. Decrease the amount of body-weight support.Exercise booklet for { }552 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Walking in a harness Therapist's aim To improve the ability to walk. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Increase the amount of body-weight support. device with your unaffected arm. Position your affected upper limb on the handle as required using a splint or bandage. Position their affected upper limb on the handle as required using a splint or bandage. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with a harness attached for body-weight support and the wheels locked in a forwards direction only. Client's instructions Position yourself standing with a harness attached for body-weight support and the wheels locked in a forwards direction only. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Practice walking forwards while pushing the harness Perform exercise for __ minutes. Instruct the patient to walk forwards while pushing the harness device with their unaffected arm.

Increase Perform exercise for __ minutes. Position targets on the floor in front of them to regulate step length and width. Client's aim To improve your ability to walk with an even step length. Client's instructions Position yourself standing with a harness attached for minimal body-weight support and some slackness in the straps. Instruct the patient to walk forwards by stepping to each target. the distance between the targets. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. More advanced: 1. Practice walking forwards by stepping to each target. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with a harness attached for minimal body-weight support and some slackness in the straps. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 .Exercise booklet for { }553 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Walking in a harness to targets Therapist's aim To improve the ability to walk with an even step length. Decrease the distance between the targets. Position targets on the floor in front of you to regulate step length and width.

Practice taking one large step forwards and lowering your back knee towards the floor. Ensure that both feet point forwards. Ensure that both feet point forwards. Lower the back knee closer to the floor. Instruct the patient to take one large step forwards and lower the back knee towards the floor. More advanced: 1. 2. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles that straighten your leg. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing their feet together. Less advanced: 1. then take another large step forwards and lower the back knee towards the floor. Raise the back knee higher off the floor. Progressions and variations Repeat __ times. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 .Exercise booklet for { }554 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Walking lunge Therapist's aim To strengthen the leg extensors. Client's instructions Position yourself standing your feet together. Wear a backpack with weights in it. then taking another large step forwards and lowering your back knee towards the floor.

More advanced: 1. Client's aim To improve your ability to walk with your feet closer together. Client's instructions Position yourself standing on a raised beam with one leg in front of the other. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing on a beam with one leg in front of the other. 2. 3. Practice walking forwards along the beam without stepping off the beam.Exercise booklet for { }555 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Walking on a balance beam Therapist's aim To improve the ability to walk with a smaller base of support. Walk on a narrower beam. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Walk on a wider beam. 2. 3. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. directly in front of the other (heel to toe). Walk backwards on the beam. 4. Add a concurrent task. Place each foot Repeat __ times. Provide hand support for balance. Instruct the patient to walk forwards along the beam. Walk sideways along the beam.

Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with a line on the floor in front of them. Practice walking forwards along the line. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Repeat __ times. Client's instructions Position yourself standing with a line on the floor in front of you.Exercise booklet for { }556 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Walking on a line Therapist's aim To improve the ability to walk with a smaller base of support. Add a concurrent task. Ensure that the inside border of each foot touches the line. Instruct the patient to walk forwards along the line. Ensure that the medial border of each foot touches the line. Client's aim To improve your ability to walk with your feet closer together. Progressions and variations More advanced: 1.

Practice walking forwards along the line while bouncing the ball on the floor with either hand. More advanced: 1. Client's instructions Position yourself standing with your feet on a line and holding onto a ball. Client's aim To improve your ability to walk with your feet closer together and perform another task at the same time. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Increase Repeat __ times. Walk along the line while carrying the ball. Instruct the patient to walk forwards along the line while bouncing the ball on the floor with either hand. Walk along a beam on the floor while bouncing the ball.Exercise booklet for { }557 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Walking on a line while bouncing a ball Therapist's aim To improve the ability to walk with a smaller base of support and perform a concurrent task. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with their feet on a line and holding onto a ball. 2. speed of task.

Increase the amount of body-weight support. 3. 3. using assistance as required for the affected leg. Client's aim To improve your ability to walk.Exercise booklet for { }558 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Walking on a treadmill in a harness with assistance Therapist's aim To improve the ability to walk. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. More advanced: 1. Use a metronome to regulate cadence. 2. Increase treadmill speed. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing on a treadmill with a harness attached for body-weight support. Provide assistance as required for the affected leg. Client's instructions Position yourself standing on a treadmill with a harness attached for body-weight support. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . of body-weight support. Decrease the amount Perform exercise for __ minutes. Provide less assistance. Decrease treadmill speed. Practice walking on the treadmill. 2. Instruct the patient to walk on the treadmill.

Decrease treadmill speed. 3. Decrease the amount of body-weight support. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . 2. Practice walking on the treadmill. More advanced: 1. Client's instructions Position yourself standing on a treadmill with a harness attached for body-weight support. the pillowcase. Increase treadmill speed. Provide less assistance. 2. Position a pillowcase around your affected foot and twist it at the end. Position a pillowcase around their affected foot and twist it at the end. Client's aim To improve your ability to walk.Exercise booklet for { }559 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Walking on a treadmill in a harness with pillowcase to assist swing Therapist's aim To improve the ability to walk. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing on a treadmill with a harness attached for body-weight support. Use a metronome to regulate cadence. Provide assistance as required to lift the foot in swing by pulling on the end of the pillowcase. Increase the amount of body-weight support. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. 3. Instruct the patient to walk on the treadmill. using assistance as required to lift the foot in swing by pulling on the end of Perform exercise for __ minutes.

Decrease the amount of body-weight support. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing on a treadmill with a harness attached for body-weight support and some theraband around their affected foot. Provide less assistance. 3. 2. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Client's aim To improve your ability to walk. 2. 3. Provide assistance as required to keep the affected foot on the treadmill as the hip extends. Decrease treadmill speed.Exercise booklet for { }560 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Walking on a treadmill in a harness with theraband to assist swing Therapist's aim To improve the ability to walk. keep your affected foot on the treadmill as your hip straightens. Use a metronome to regulate cadence. using assistance as required to Perform exercise for __ minutes. Increase the amount of body-weight support. Practice walking on the treadmill. Instruct the patient to walk on the treadmill. Adjust the theraband so that the direction of pull is aligned forwards. Client's instructions Position yourself standing on a treadmill with a harness attached for body-weight support and some theraband around your affected foot. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . More advanced: 1. Adjust the theraband so that the direction of pull is aligned forwards. Increase treadmill speed.

Precautions 1. Walk sideways or backwards over the uneven surface.Exercise booklet for { }561 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Walking on an unstable surface using playground equipment Therapist's aim To improve the ability to walk in different environments. Client's aim To improve your ability to walk in different environments. Ensure patient is wearing suitable footwear. Provide hand support for balance. Repeat __ times. Instruct the patient to walk forwards over the uneven surface. More advanced: 1. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Client's instructions Position yourself standing on an uneven surface such as a wobbly bridge. Remove hand support. Practice walking forwards over the uneven surface. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. 2. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing on an uneven surface such as a wobbly bridge.

Instruct the patient to walk forwards without letting their toes touch the floor.Exercise booklet for { }562 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Walking on heels Therapist's aim To improve the ability to walk and to strengthen the ankle dorsiflexors. Carry a heavy object. Repeat __ times. 2. Client's instructions Position yourself standing on your heels. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. More advanced: 1. Practice walking forwards without letting your toes touch the floor. Walk on heels in different directions. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing on their heels. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Increase step length. Provide hand support for balance. 3. Client's aim To improve your ability to walk and to strengthen the muscles at the front of your ankles.

Client's instructions Position yourself standing with a slope in front of you. More advanced: 1. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with a slope in front of them. Practice walking up and down the slope. 2. Practice walking over obstacles.Exercise booklet for { }563 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Walking on slopes Therapist's aim To improve the ability to walk in different environments. Provide hand support for balance. Client's aim To improve your ability to walk in different environments. Repeat __ times. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Instruct the patient to walk up and down the slope. Add a concurrent task.

Ensure patient is wearing suitable footwear. 2. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . objects of varying heights. More advanced: 1. Instruct the patient to walk from object to object. Precautions 1. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with some stable objects of different heights in front of them. Position objects further apart. Practice walking from object to object. 3. Use objects of similar heights. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Use Repeat __ times. Client's aim To improve your ability to walk in different environments. Client's instructions Position yourself standing with some stable objects of different heights in front of you. Position objects closer together. Ensure objects are stable and appropriate.Exercise booklet for { }564 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Walking on stepping stones Therapist's aim To improve the ability to walk in different environments. 2. Provide hand support for balance. 2.

increase step length. Practice walking on the spot to the beat of the metronome with each step then slowly increase the speed of the treadmill to Perform exercise for __ minutes. Remove the metronome. Increase the metronome speed to increase cadence. 3. 2. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing on a treadmill with a harness attached for body-weight support and a metronome set to a pre-determined beat nearby. Client's aim To improve your ability to walk. 2. 3.Exercise booklet for { }565 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Walking on the spot on a treadmill in a harness to the beat of a metronome Therapist's aim To improve the ability to walk. More advanced: 1. Increase the amount of body-weight support. Decrease the metronome speed to decrease cadence. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Decrease the amount of body-weight support. Client's instructions Position yourself standing on a treadmill with a harness attached for body-weight support and a metronome set to a pre-determined beat nearby. Increase the treadmill speed to increase step length. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . 4. Decrease the treadmill speed to decrease step length. Instruct the patient to walk on the spot to the beat of the metronome with each step then slowly increase the speed of the treadmill to increase step length.

2. Carry a heavy object. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing on their tip-toes. Instruct the patient to walk forwards without letting their heels touch the floor. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Run on tip-toes. Practice walking forwards without letting your heels touch the floor. Repeat __ times. Client's instructions Position yourself standing on your tip-toes. 3. More advanced: 1.Exercise booklet for { }566 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Walking on tip-toes Therapist's aim To improve the ability to walk and run and to strengthen the calf muscles. Provide hand support for balance. Client's aim To improve your ability to walk and run and to strengthen your calf muscles. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Walk on tip-toes in different directions.

More advanced: 1. Instruct the patient to walk over the uneven ground. Ensure patient is wearing suitable footwear. Repeat __ times. Precautions 1. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with uneven ground in front of them. Client's aim To improve your ability to walk in different environments. Client's instructions Position yourself standing with uneven ground in front of you. Practice walking over larger obstacles. Provide hand support for balance. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Practice walking over the uneven ground.Exercise booklet for { }567 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Walking on uneven ground Therapist's aim To improve the ability to walk in different environments.

Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with obstacles placed on the floor in front of them. 2. Instruct the patient to walk forwards over the obstacles without touching them. Decrease the height of the obstacles.Exercise booklet for { }568 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Walking over obstacles Therapist's aim To improve the ability to walk. Repeat __ times. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Practice walking forwards over the obstacles without touching them. Increase the height of the obstacles. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Use obstacles that can be squashed if stood on. Client's aim To improve your ability to walk. Client's instructions Position yourself standing with obstacles placed on the floor in front of you. More advanced: 1.

Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1.Exercise booklet for { }569 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Walking sideways along a line Therapist's aim To improve the ability to walk. Take smaller steps. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with their toes touching a line across the floor. Client's instructions Position yourself standing with your toes touching a line across the floor. Ensure that both feet point forwards. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Ensure that both feet point forwards. Instruct the patient to walk sideways along the line. Take larger steps. More advanced: 1. Practice walking sideways along the line. Client's aim To improve your ability to walk. Repeat __ times.

Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Practice stepping sideways up one side of the stairs leading with one leg. Walk sideways up the stairs with the unaffected leg first and walk sideways down the stairs with the affected leg first. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing facing sideways to a set of stairs. Ensure that your arms are held behind Repeat __ times. Client's aim To improve your ability to walk up and down stairs. Client's instructions Position yourself standing side-on to a set of stairs.Exercise booklet for { }570 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Walking sideways up and down stairs Therapist's aim To improve the ability to abduct and adduct the hip. turning around at the top and then stepping sideways down the other side of the stairs with the same leg. the hand-rail to keep your trunk straight. More advanced: 1. Walk sideways up the stairs with the affected leg first and walk sideways down the stairs with the unaffected leg first. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . turn around at the top and then step sideways down the other side of the stairs with the same leg. Wear a backpack with weights in it. 2. Ensure that the arms are held behind the hand-rail to maintain hip extension. Instruct the patient to step sideways up one side of the stairs leading with one leg.

More advanced: 1. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Instruct the patient to walk to the beat of the metronome with each step. Client's aim To improve your ability to walk with even steps. Increase the beat of the metronome. 2. Practice walking to the beat of the metronome with each step. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1.Exercise booklet for { }571 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Walking to the beat of a metronome Therapist's aim To improve the ability to walk with an even cadence. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with a metronome set to a pre-determined beat nearby. Practice walking without the metronome. Decrease the beat of the metronome. Client's instructions Position yourself standing with a metronome ticking nearby. Repeat __ times.

Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with a kerb in front of them.Exercise booklet for { }572 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Walking up a kerb Therapist's aim To improve the ability to walk in different environments. Client's instructions Position yourself standing with a kerb in front of you. Provide hand support for balance. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Instruct the patient to walk up and down the kerb. Add a concurrent task. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Practice walking up and down the kerb. More advanced: 1. Client's aim To improve your ability to walk in different environments. Repeat __ times.

Client's instructions Position yourself standing at the bottom of a flight of stairs.Exercise booklet for { }573 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Walking up stairs Therapist's aim To improve the ability to walk up stairs. 3. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . 2. Increase the height of the stairs. Instruct the patient to walk up the stairs. More advanced: 1. Add a concurrent task. Wear a backpack with weights in it. Client's aim To improve your ability to walk up stairs. Practice walking up the stairs. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Decrease the height of the stairs. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing at the bottom of a flight of stairs. 2. Use hand-rail for balance. 3. Walk up one step at a time leading with the unaffected leg. Repeat __ times.

Change Repeat __ times. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing while holding onto a large object. Walk without holding onto an object. Practice walking forwards while carrying the object. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Decrease the size and weight of the object. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . directions when walking.Exercise booklet for { }574 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Walking while carrying a large object Therapist's aim To improve the ability to walk. Client's instructions Position yourself standing up while holding onto a large object. 2. 2. More advanced: 1. trying not to drop it. Increase the size and weight of the object. Instruct and encourage the patient to walk forwards while carrying the object. trying not to drop it. Client's aim To improve your ability to walk.

Practice walking on uneven ground while performing complex tasks.Exercise booklet for { }575 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Walking while performing multiple tasks Therapist's aim To improve the ability to walk in different environments. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Practice walking without carrying any objects. Client's aim To improve your ability to walk in different environments. 2. More advanced: 1. Fri Right . Instruct the patient to walk while carrying the objects. Client's instructions Position yourself standing with an object in one or both of your hands. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Repeat __ times. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with an object in one or both of their hands. Practice walking while performing tasks that require more concentration. Practice walking while carrying the objects.

Increase the height of the cylinders. Instruct the patient to walk forwards on the cylinders. Decrease the size of the cylinders. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in standing with their feet on two cylinders with ropes attached to them. Practice walking forwards on the cylinders. 2. 3. More advanced: 1. Walk in different directions. Perform exercise for __ minutes.Exercise booklet for { }576 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Walking with stilts Therapist's aim To improve the ability to walk with a smaller base of support. Increase the size of the cylinders. Client's instructions Position yourself standing with your feet on two cylinders with ropes attached to them. Client's aim To improve your ability to walk with your feet closer together. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right .

2. More advanced: 1. Practice standing up. then bend forward at the hips to increase the amount of weight borne through the scales. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with your thighs half supported on a raised plinth. Client's aim To improve your ability to weight-bear through your affected leg when standing up. then bending forward Repeat __ times. your affected foot on a set of scales. Practice maintaining an upright sitting position. your unaffected foot on a block and your knees bent so that your toes are under your knees. 3. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with half thigh-support on a raised plinth . at the hips to increase the amount of weight borne through the scales. Use cues for feedback on limb alignment. their affected foot on a set of scales and their unaffected foot on a block. Practice without using scales for feedback. Increase the weight-bearing target amount on the scales. Instruct the patient to firstly maintain an upright sitting position. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1.Exercise booklet for { }577 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Weight-bearing through affected leg when standing up using scales for feedback Therapist's aim To improve the ability to weight-bear through the affected leg when standing up. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Position their knees bent so that their toes are under their knees. Decrease the weightbearing target amount on the scales. 2.

Exercise booklet for { }578 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Wrist extensor electrical stimulation Therapist's aim To strengthen the wrist extensors. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Precautions 1. Therapist's instructions Place the electrodes over the muscle belly of the wrist extensors. Client's aim To strengthen your wrist/hand muscles. Perform __ sets of __ reps. Perform skin tests. Client's instructions Place the two electrodes over the muscle belly as shown. Do__ sessions per week.

Instruct the patient to extend their wrist. Start with your wrist dropped downwards. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with your arm supported on a table. Client's aim To strengthen your wrist muscles. Progress using strength training principles. Perform __ sets of __ reps. your palm facing downwards and your hand over the edge of the table. Do__ sessions per week.Exercise booklet for { }579 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Wrist extensor strengthening in sitting using free weights Therapist's aim To strengthen the wrist extensors. their forearm pronated and their hand over the edge of the table. Finish with your wrist pulled upwards. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Progressions and variations More advanced: 1. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with their arm supported on a table.

Client's aim To strengthen your wrist muscles. colour of the theraband. Start with your wrist dropped downwards. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Upgrade the Perform __ sets of __ reps. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with your arm hanging downwards and resting on your knee. Finish with your wrist pulled upwards. Adjust the theraband so that the direction of pull opposes wrist extension. Do__ sessions per week.Exercise booklet for { }580 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Wrist extensor strengthening in sitting using theraband Therapist's aim To strengthen the wrist extensors. Instruct the patient to extend their wrist. Downgrade the colour of the theraband. Attach one end of theraband to the bottom of your wheelchair and the other end around your hand. More advanced: 1. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with their shoulder semi-flexed and elbow fully extended. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1.

Tape a cup in their hand and tape a flexible straw to the dorsal surface of their forearm with the joint of the straw aligned with their wrist joint. a cup in your hand and tape a flexible straw to the top of your forearm so that the bend of the straw is over your wrist. Client's aim To strengthen the muscles that pull your wrist back. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with their forearm pronated and resting on a block on a table in front of them. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Instruct the patient to extend their wrist to touch the tip of the straw in time with the electrical stimulation machine and then slowly lower their wrist into flexion when the stimulation stops.Exercise booklet for { }581 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Wrist extensor strengthening using electrical stimulation and a target Therapist's aim To strengthen the wrist extensors. Tape Repeat __ times. Place the electrodes over the muscle belly of the wrist extensors. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with your forearm resting on a block on a table in front of you. Practice bending your wrist back so that your hand touches the tip of the straw in time with the electrical stimulation machine then lower your hand down slowly after the stimulation stops. Place the electrodes over the muscle belly of your wrist muscles as shown.

Therapist's instructions Place the electrodes over the muscle belly of the wrist flexors. Perform __ sets of __ reps. Perform skin tests. Client's instructions Place the two electrodes over the muscle belly as shown. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Precautions 1. Client's aim To strengthen your wrist/hand muscles. Do__ sessions per week.Exercise booklet for { }582 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Wrist flexor electrical stimulation Therapist's aim To strengthen the wrist flexors.

their forearm supinated and their hand over the edge of the table. your palm facing upwards and your hand over the edge of the table. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with their arm supported on a table. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with your arm supported on a table. Progressions and variations More advanced: 1. Start with your wrist dropped downwards. Do__ sessions per week. Perform __ sets of __ reps. Progress using strength training principles. Finish with your wrist pulled upwards. Instruct the patient to flex their wrist. Client's aim To strengthen your wrist muscles.Exercise booklet for { }583 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Wrist flexor strengthening in sitting using free weights Therapist's aim To strengthen the wrist flexors.

Start with your wrist dropped downwards. Mon Left Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 Right Left Tue Right Left Wed Right Left Thu Right Left Fri Right . Finish with your wrist pulled upwards. Progress using strength training principles. Do__ sessions per week.Exercise booklet for { }584 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Wrist flexor strengthening in supine using free weights Therapist's aim To strengthen the wrist flexors. Progressions and variations More advanced: 1. Client's aim To strengthen your wrist muscles. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in supine. Perform __ sets of __ reps. Instruct the patient to flex their wrist. Client's instructions Position yourself lying on your back.

Exercise booklet for { }585 Compiled by Dr chandrashekar belludi { } Wrist flexor. Apply a bandage over the hand if necessary to maintain the position of the can. Progressions and variations Less advanced: 1. Increase the weight Hold for __ minutes. forearm pronator and web-space stretch in sitting Therapist's aim To stretch or maintain length of the wrist and hand muscles. Precautions 1. Decrease the weight of the can. Client's instructions Position yourself sitting with your hand resting palm-up over the edge of a table. Impaired or absent sensation of stretch. Therapist's instructions Position the patient in sitting with their hand resting in supination over the edge of a table. Place a sandbag over the forearm and a can between the fingers and thumb. More advanced: 1. Place a sandbag over your forearm and a can between your fingers and thumb. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 Week 6 Week 7 . Apply a bandage over your hand if necessary to maintain the position of the can. of the can. Client's aim To stretch or maintain range in your wrist and hand.

As such.net respects the intellectual property of others. redistributing this book without the copyright owner's permission can constitute copyright infringement. COPYRIGHT INFORMATION Free-eBooks.free-ebooks.net. please follow our Notice and Procedure for Making Claims of Copyright Infringement as seen in our Terms of Service here: http://www.net/tos. Unless otherwise stated in this book. this permission is not passed onto others. When a book's copyright owner submits their work to Free-eBooks. we'd be very grateful if you'd kindly post your comments for this book here.Free-eBooks. they are granting us permission to distribute such material.This book was distributed courtesy of: For your own Unlimited Reading and FREE eBooks today.net Share this eBook with anyone and everyone automatically by selecting any of the options below: To show your appreciation to the author and help others have wonderful reading experiences and find helpful information too. If you believe that your work has been used in a manner that constitutes copyright infringement.html . visit: http://www.

You're Reading a Free Preview

Download
scribd
/*********** DO NOT ALTER ANYTHING BELOW THIS LINE ! ************/ var s_code=s.t();if(s_code)document.write(s_code)//-->